2011 Mitsubishi l200 12

L200 - ENGLISH - OCRE11E1
L200
OWNER’S MANUAL
L200 - ENGLISH - OCRE11E1

Foreword Throughout this owner’s manual the words WARNING and CAUTION ap- Information for station service
E09200103398 pear. E09300102174
Thank you for selecting a MITSUBISHI L200 as your new vehicle. These serve as reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow instruc- Fuel tank capacity 75 litres
This owner’s manual will add to your understanding and full enjoyment of tions could result in personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
the many fine features of this vehicle. Fuel Cetane number (EN590)
It contains information prepared to acquaint you with the proper way to oper- Fuel requirements 51 or higher
ate and maintain your vehicle for the utmost in driving pleasure. WARNING Refer to the “General information” section for the fuel selection.
indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if in- Engine oil Refer to the “Maintenance” section for the selection of engine oil.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to make changes in structions are not followed.
design and specifications and/or to make additions to or improvements in Tyre inflation pressure Refer to the “Maintenance” section for the tyre inflation pressure.
this product without obligation to install them on products previously manu-
factured. CAUTION
It is an absolute requirement for the driver to strictly observe all laws and reg-
ulations concerning vehicles. means hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor personal in-
jury or damage to your vehicle.
This owner’s manual has been written in compliance with such laws and reg- You will see another important symbol:
ulations, but some of the contents may become contradictory with later amend- NOTE: gives helpful information.
ment of the laws and regulations.
*: indicates optional equipment.
Please leave this owner’s manual in this vehicle at time of resale. The next It may differ according to the sales classification; refer
owner will appreciate having access to the information contained in this own- to the sales catalogue.
er’s manual. Abbreviations used in this owner’s manual:
LHD: Left-Hand Drive
Repairs to your vehicle: RHD: Right-Hand Drive
Vehicles in the warranty period: M/T: Manual Transmission
All warranty repairs must be carried out by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au- A/T: Automatic Transmission
thorized Service Point.
Vehicles outside the warranty period:

Where the vehicle is repaired is at the discretion of the owner.
OCRE11E1
BLC10.002829 11
© 2010 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation
Table of contents
Overview
General information
Locking and unlocking 1
Seat and seat belts 2
Instruments and controls 3
Starting and driving 4
For pleasant driving 5
For emergencies 6
Vehicle care 7
Maintenance 8
Specifications 9
Overview
Instruments and Controls (Driver’s area)

E00100105444
1. Combination headlamps and dipper switch p. 3-30

LHD Turn-signals lever p. 3-33
Front fog lamp switch* p. 3-34
Rear fog lamp switch p. 3-35
Headlamp washer switch* p. 3-39
2. Audio remote control switches* p. 5-28
3 3. Instruments p. 3-02
4
4. Wiper and washer switch p. 3-36
5. Cruise control switches* p. 4-49
2 5 6. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for driver’s
seat) p. 2-27
Horn switch p. 3-40
1 7. Ignition switch p. 4-11
6 8. Steering wheel height adjustment p. 4-09
9. Fuel tank filler door release lever* p. 02
10. Bonnet release lever p. 8-03
11. Fuses p. 8-20
12. Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch Type 2* p. 4-46
7
15 13. Headlamp levelling switch* p. 3-32
14. Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch Type 1* p. 4-46
Rear differential lock switch* p. 4-34
14 8 15. Outside rear-view mirrors switch* p. 4-10
9
11
13
10
12
Overview
1. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for driver’s

RHD seat) p. 2-27
Horn switch p. 3-40
2. Audio remote control switches* p. 5-28
4 3. Combination headlamps and dipper switch p. 3-30
Turn-signals lever p. 3-33
5 Front fog lamp switch* p. 3-34
Rear fog lamp switch p. 3-35
Headlamp washer switch* p. 3-39
3 6 4. Cruise control switches* p. 4-49
5. Instruments p. 3-02
6. Wiper and washer switch p. 3-36
7 7. Ignition switch p. 4-11
8. Outside rear-view mirrors switch* p. 4-10
2 9. Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch Type 1* p. 4-46
Rear differential lock switch* p. 4-34
LHD 8 10. Headlamp levelling switch* p. 3-32
1 11. Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch Type 2* p. 4-46
12. Fuses p. 8-20
13. Bonnet release lever p. 8-03
9 14. Fuel tank filler door release lever* p. 02
15. Steering wheel height adjustment p. 4-09
15 10
14 12
13 11
Overview
Instruments and Controls (Single cab)

E00100104577
1. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 3-34

LHD 2. Heater/Manual air conditioning* p. 5-03
3. Rear window demister switch p. 3-40
4. Utility box p. 5-43
5. Ventilators p. 5-02
6. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for front passen-
ger’s seat) p. 2-27
7. Front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp p. 2-31
3 4 5 8. Glove box p. 5-42
2
Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch p. 2-30
9. Cigarette lighter p. 5-37
10. Gearshift lever p. 4-14
1 6 11. Transfer shift lever (4WD only) p. 4-20
12. Cup holder* p. 5-44
13. Parking brake lever Type 1* p. 4-07
15 14. Parking brake lever Type 2* p. 4-07
15. Ashtray p. 5-36
7
8
14
13 12 11 10 9
Overview

RHD ger’s seat) p. 2-27
3. Utility box p. 5-43
4. Rear window demister switch p. 3-40
5. Heater/Manual air conditioning* p. 5-03
3 5
10. Cup holder* p. 5-44
6 11. Transfer shift lever (4WD only) p. 4-20
12. Gearshift lever p. 4-14
1 13. Ashtray p. 5-36
14. Glove box p. 5-42
7 Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch p. 2-30
15
14
13
12 11 10 9
Overview
Instruments and Controls (Club, Double cab)

E00100104580

LHD 2. Heater/Manual air conditioning* p. 5-03
Automatic air conditioning* p. 5-08
3. Rear window demister switch (vehicle with heater/manual air con-
ditioning) p. 3-40
4. Utility box* p. 5-43
Centre information display* p. 3-10
3
2 4 MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication System*
Refer to the separate “MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication Sys-
5 tem owner’s manual”
6 5. Ventilators p. 5-02
1 6. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for front passen-
ger’s seat) p. 2-27
19
18
7 8. Glove box p. 5-42
Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch p. 2-30
17 9. Ashtray (fixed position)* p. 5-36
16 8 10. Cigarette lighter p. 5-37
11. Rear retractable power window switch* p. 1-08
15 10 12. Transfer shift lever (4WD only) p. 4-25, 4-29
9 13. Parking brake lever p. 4-07
14 11 14. Cup holder p. 5-44
15. Ashtray (moveable)* p. 5-36
12 16. Front console box* p. 5-42
13
17. Heated seat switch* p. 2-06
18. Gearshift lever* p. 4-14
Selector lever* p. 4-16, 4-20
19. Audio* p. 5-13
Overview

RHD ger’s seat) p. 2-27
3. Utility box* p. 5-43
Centre information display* p. 3-10
MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication System*
3 4 5 Refer to the separate “MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication Sys-
6 tem owner’s manual”
2 4. Rear window demister switch (vehicle with heater/manual air con-
ditioning) p. 3-40
5. Heater/Manual air conditioning* p. 5-03
7 Automatic air conditioning* p. 5-08
1 6. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 3-34
7. Audio* p. 5-13
8. Transfer shift lever (4WD only) p. 4-25, 4-29
18 9. Heated seat switch* p. 2-06
8
10. Parking brake lever p. 4-07
11. Cup holder p. 5-44
17 9 12. Ashtray (moveable)* p. 5-36
13. Gearshift lever* p. 4-14
10 Selector lever* p. 4-16, 4-20
14. Front console box* p. 5-42
16 16. Rear retractable power window switch* p. 1-08
17. Glove box p. 5-42
13 Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch p. 2-30
15 11 18. Front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp p. 2-31
14 12
Overview
Interior (Single cab)

E00100203278
1. Lock switch* p. 1-09

LHD 2. Electric window control switch* p. 1-08
3. Room lamp p. 5-39, 8-24, 8-32
4. Digital clock p. 5-39
5. Inside rear-view mirror p. 4-09
1 3 4 6. Sun visors p. 5-35
7. Bottle holder p. 5-45
8. Front seats p. 2-03
9. Jack p. 6-07
10. Tools*1 p. 6-07
11. Accessory socket* p. 5-38
2 12. Floor console box* p. 5-42
5
13. Jack handle p. 6-07
14. Head restraints p. 2-08
15. Seat belts p. 2-09
15 6
NOTE:*1- Tools differ according to the vehicle model.

14
13
12
8
10 9
11
Overview
1. Digital clock p. 5-39

RHD 2. Inside rear-view mirror p. 4-09
3. Room lamp p. 5-39, 8-24, 8-32
5. Electric window control switch* p. 1-08
1 4 6. Seat belts p. 2-09
3 7. Head restraints p. 2-08
8. Tools*1 p. 6-07
9. Jack p. 6-07
10. Accessory socket* p. 5-38
11. Floor console box* p. 5-42
2 5 12. Jack handle p. 6-07
13. Front seats p. 2-03
6 15. Sun visors p. 5-35
15
7 NOTE:*1- Tools differ according to the vehicle model.
14
13
12 11
10
Overview
Interior (Club cab)

E00100203890

3. Room lamp (rear) p. 5-39, 8-24, 8-32
4. Personal lamps* p. 5-40, 8-24, 8-32
5. Sunglasses holder* p. 5-43
1 4 5 6. Room lamp (front)* p. 5-39, 8-24, 8-32
3 7. Inside rear-view mirror p. 4-09
8. Digital clock* p. 5-39
8 Card holder p. 5-35
Vanity mirror p. 5-36
2 10. Bottle holder p. 5-45
7 11. Front seats p. 2-03
Seat under tray* p. 5-44
12. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag (for front
19 seat)* p. 2-35
18 9 13. Secret box p. 5-43
14. Rear seat* p. 2-07
17 15. Floor console box p. 5-42
Accessory socket p. 5-38
Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA)* p. 5-27
Auxiliary Video connector (RCA)* p. 5-27
16 16. Jack p. 6-07
10 Jack handle p. 6-07
Tools p. 6-07
11 17. Head restraints p. 2-08
15 18. Coat hook* p. 5-46
12 Adjustable seat belt anchor p. 2-11
14 13
Overview
1. Personal lamps* p. 5-40, 8-24, 8-32

RHD 2. Sunglasses holder* p. 5-43
3. Room lamp (front)* p. 5-39, 8-24, 8-32
2 6. Room lamp (rear) p. 5-39, 8-24, 8-32
1 7 7. Lock switch* p. 1-09
6
3 9. Seat belts p. 2-09
5 Adjustable seat belt anchor p. 2-11
10. Coat hook* p. 5-46
8
4 12. Secret box p. 5-43
13. Floor console box p. 5-42
9 Accessory socket p. 5-38
19 10 Auxiliary Video connector (RCA)* p. 5-27
14. Rear seat* p. 2-07
15. Jack p. 6-07
11 Jack handle p. 6-07
Tools p. 6-07
seat)* p. 2-35
12
15 14
Overview
Interior - front area (Double cab)

E00100203904

3. Sunroof switch* p. 1-13
4. Sunglasses holder p. 5-43
5. Personal lamps p. 5-40, 8-24, 8-32
1 3 4 6. Digital clock* p. 5-39
5 8. Room lamp (front) p. 5-39, 8-24, 8-32
9. Sun visors p. 5-35
8
Card holder p. 5-35
6 Vanity mirror p. 5-36
2 7 10. Front seats p. 2-03
16 seat)* p. 2-35
13. Floor console box p. 5-42
15 Accessory socket* p. 5-38
14 Auxiliary Video connector (RCA)* p. 5-27
14. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - curtain airbag* p. 2-35
15. Coat hook* p. 5-46
Adjustable seat belt anchor (front seats) p. 2-11
10
13
11
12
Overview
1. Sunroof switch* p. 1-13

RHD 2. Sunglasses holder p. 5-43
3. Personal lamps p. 5-40, 8-24, 8-32
1 6. Room lamp (front) p. 5-39, 8-24, 8-32
2 7
3 9. Seat belts p. 2-09
6 Adjustable seat belt anchor (front seats) p. 2-11
4 10. Coat hook* p. 5-46
11. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - curtain airbag* p. 2-35
5 8 12. Floor console box p. 5-42
Accessory socket* p. 5-38
9 Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA)* p. 5-27
16 Auxiliary Video connector (RCA)* p. 5-27
10 14. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag (for front
seat)* p. 2-35
16. Sun visors p. 5-35
12
14
13
Overview
Interior - rear area (Double cab)

E00100201144

LHD 2. Bottle holder p. 5-45
3. Room lamp (rear)* p. 5-39, 8-24, 8-32
5. Armrest (for rear seat) p. 2-07
3 6. Rear seats p. 2-07
7. Tools*1 p. 6-07
2 8. Jack p. 6-07
9. Jack handle*1 p. 6-07
10. Seat belts (for rear seats) p. 2-09
1 NOTE:*1- Tools differ according to the vehicle model.
10
4
9
5
6
8
7
Overview
1. Room lamp (rear)* p. 5-39, 8-24, 8-32

RHD 2. Bottle holder p. 5-45
4. Seat belts (for rear seats) p. 2-09
5. Jack handle*1 p. 6-07
6. Tools*1 p. 6-07
1 7. Jack p. 6-07
2 8. Rear seats p. 2-07
9. Armrest (for rear seat) p. 2-07
3
NOTE:*1- Tools differ according to the vehicle model.
10
5
9
6
8
7
Overview
Exterior - front (Single cab)

E00100503952
1. Wiper and washers p. 3-36

2. Antenna p. 5-34
3. Outside rear-view mirrors p. 4-10
4. Fuel tank filler door p. 02
5. Locking and unlocking p. 1-02
6. Side turn-signal lamps p. 3-33, 8-24, 8-28
7. Front turn-signal lamps p. 3-33, 8-24, 8-27
2 8. Headlamps p. 3-30, 8-24, 3-31
1
Position lamps p. 3-30, 8-24, 8-27
3 9. Headlamp washers* p. 3-39
10. Engine compartment p. 9-21
Bonnet p. 8-03
10
5
9
8 7
Overview
Exterior - rear (Single cab)

E00100503112
1. Rear turn-signal lamps p. 3-33, 8-24, 8-30

2. Stop and tail lamps p. 3-30, 8-24, 8-30
3. Reversing lamps p. 8-24, 8-30
4. Tyre inflation pressures p. 8-12
Changing tyres p. 6-17
Tyre rotation p. 8-13
Tyre chains p. 8-14
1 5. Spare wheel p. 6-16
6. Licence plate lamps p. 3-30, 8-24, 8-31
7. Rear fog lamp (Driver’s side only) p. 3-35, 8-24, 8-29
8. Rear gate p. 1-11
9 9. High-mounted stop lamp p. 8-24, 8-31
8
3
6 5
Overview
Exterior - front (Club cab)

E00100503965

2. Rain sensor* p. 3-36
3. Antenna p. 5-34
6. Locking and unlocking p. 1-02
2
Keyless entry system* p. 1-04
7. Side turn-signal lamps p. 3-33, 8-24, 8-28
1 3 8. Front turn-signal lamps p. 3-33, 8-24, 8-27
4 9. Headlamps p. 3-30, 8-24, 3-31
10. Front fog lamps* p. 3-34, 8-24, 8-28
11. Headlamp washers* p. 3-39
12. Engine compartment p. 9-21
12 Bonnet p. 8-03
11 6
10
7
9 8
Overview
Exterior - rear (Club cab)

E00100503978

1 Tyre chains p. 8-14
5. Spare wheel p. 6-16
6. Licence plate lamps p. 3-30, 8-24, 8-31
7. Rear fog lamp (Driver’s side only) Type 2* p. 3-35, 8-24, 8-29
10
10. High-mounted stop lamp p. 8-24, 8-31
2
9
3
6 5
7
Overview
Exterior - front (Double cab)

E00100503981

2. Rain sensor* p. 3-36
3. Antenna* p. 5-34
4. Sunroof* p. 1-13
5. Antenna* p. 5-34
5 8. Locking and unlocking p. 1-02
2 Keyless entry system* p. 1-04
4 9. Side turn-signal lamps p. 3-33, 8-24, 8-28
1 3
10. Front turn-signal lamps p. 3-33, 8-24, 8-27
11. Headlamps p. 3-30, 8-24, 3-31
12. Front fog lamps* p. 3-34, 8-24, 8-28
13. Headlamp washers* p. 3-39
14 6 14. Engine compartment p. 9-21
Bonnet p. 8-03
13
8
12
9
11
10
Overview
Exterior - rear (Double cab)

E00100503138

Tyre chains p. 8-14
1
5. Spare wheel p. 6-16
10 6. Licence plate lamps p. 3-30, 8-24, 8-31
10. High-mounted stop lamp p. 8-24, 8-31
9 2
8 3
4
6 5
7
General information
Fuel selection...................................................................................02
Filling the fuel tank..........................................................................02
Installation of accessories................................................................04
Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems................04
Genuine parts...................................................................................05
Used engine oils safety instructions and disposal infor-
mation..........................................................................................05
Disposal information for used batteries...........................................05
General information
Fuel selection l Poor-quality diesel fuel can cause deposits to

form in the injector, resulting in black smoke
Filling the fuel tank
E00200102141 E00200202025
and rough idling.
Cetane number (EN590) If these problems occur, you are advised to
Recommended fuel
51 or higher add a cleaning additive to the diesel fuel
when you refuel the vehicle.
WARNING
The additive will break up and remove the de- l When handling fuel, comply with the safe-
ty regulations displayed by garages and
CAUTION posits, thereby returning the engine to a nor-
mal condition. filling stations.
l Your vehicle is designed to use only diesel Be sure to use a genuine MITSUBISHI DIE- l Before removing the fuel cap, be sure to
fuel that meets the EN 590 standard. SEL FUEL SYSTEM CLEANER. Using an get rid of your body’s static electricity by
Use of any other type of diesel fuel would unsuitable additive could make the engine touching a metal part of the car or the
adversely affect the engine’s performance malfunction. For details, please contact your fuel pump. Any static electricity on your
and durability. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service body could create a spark that ignites
Point. fuel vapour.
l Perform the whole refueling process
NOTE (opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-
l Due to the separation of paraffin, the fluidity ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself. Do not
of the fuel decreases considerably as the tem- let any other person come near the fuel
perature falls. tank filler. If you allowed a person to
Because of this fact there are two kinds of help you and that person was carrying
fuel: “summer” and “winter”. static electricity, fuel vapour could be ig-
This must be considered in winter use. nited.
Select either of the two kinds of fuel in ac- l Do not move away from the fuel tank fill-
cordance with ambient temperature. er until refueling is finished. If you
Above -5 °C: “Summer” diesel moved away and did something else (for
Below -5 °C: “Winter” diesel example, cleaning your windscreen) part-
When travelling abroad, find out in advance way through the refueling process, you
about the fuels served in local service stations. could pick up a fresh charge of static elec-
tricity.
l If the tank cap must be replaced, use only
a MITSUBISHI MOTORS original part.
Fuel tank capacity

75 litres
Refueling
1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.
02
General information
2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear left 3. Open the fuel tank filler tube by slowly turn-
side of your vehicle. ing the cap anticlockwise. CAUTION
Type 1
Open the fuel tank filler door with the re- l Since the fuel system may be under pres-
sure, remove the fuel tank filler tube cap
lease lever located below the instrument panel. slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-
uum that might have built up in the fuel
LHD tank. If you hear a hissing sound, wait un-
til it stops before removing the cap. Oth-
erwise, fuel may spray out, injuring you
or others.
4. Insert the gun in the tank port as far as it

goes. Do not tilt the gun.
5. When the gun stops automatically, do not fill
A- Remove with fuel any more.
B- Close 6. To close, turn the fuel tank filler tube cap
slowly clockwise until you hear clicking
Type 2 sounds, then gently push the fuel tank filler
RHD Slide the cover (1). Insert the key in the cap door closed.
(2) and unlock it.
Turn the cap and remove it.
03
General information
Installation of accessories Even when such parts are officially authorized, for
example by a “general operators permit” (an ap-
Modification/alterations to the
We recommend you to consult your MITSUBISHI
E00200300875
praisal for the part) or through the execution of the electrical or fuel systems
E00200400238
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. part in an officially approved manner of construc-
MITSUBISHI MOTORS CORPORATION has al-
l The installation of accessories, optional tion, or when a single operation permit following
ways manufactured safe, high quality vehicles. In
parts, should only be carried out within the the attachment or installation of such parts, it can-
order to maintain this safety and quality, it is impor-
limits prescribed by law in your country, and not be deduced from that alone, that the driving safe-
tant that any accessory that is to be fitted, or any
in accordance with the guidelines fitting in- ty of your vehicle has not been affected.
modifications carried out which involve the electri-
structions and warnings contained within the
cal or fuel systems, should be carried out in accord-
documents accompanying the parts or acces- Consider also that there basically exists no liability
ance with MITSUBISHI guidelines.
sories. on the part of the appraiser or the official. Only in
l Improper installation of electrical compo- the case of parts (MITSUBISHI MOTORS original
replacement or exchange parts as well as
nents may cause an electrical fire if incorrect-
ly fitted. Please refer to the Modification/al- MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine accessories) that CAUTION
teration to the electrical or fuel systems sec- are recommended and released by a MITSUBISHI l If the wiring interferes with any part of
tion within this owner’s manual. MOTORS Authorized Service Point and that are at- the vehicle bodywork or improper instal-
l Using a cellular phone or radio set inside the tached or installed by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS lation methods are used, i.e. protective
vehicle without an external antenna may Authorized Service Point can you assume, that op- fuses not installed, etc.), electronic devi-
cause electrical system interference, which timal safety has been provided. The same also per- ces may be adversely affected, possibly re-
could lead to unsafe vehicle operation. tains to modifications of MITSUBISHI vehicle sulting in an electrical fire or other fail-
l Tyres and wheels which do not meet specifi- with respect to the production specifications. For ures that may cause an accident.
cations must not be used. your own safety, in such cases, you should only un-
Refer to the “Specifications” section for in- dertake modifications according to the recommen-
formation regarding wheel and tyre sizes. dations of a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
l When fitting accessories, ensure that maxi- Service Point.
mum gross vehicle weight and maximum
axle weight are not exceeded.
Important points!
Due to large number of accessory and replacement
parts of different manufactures available in the mar-
ket, it is not possible, not only for MITSUBISHI
MOTORS, but also for a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point, to check whether the at-
tachment or installation of such parts affects the
overall safety of your MITSUBISHI-vehicle.
04
General information
Genuine parts Used engine oils safety Disposal information for used
E00200500545
MITSUBISHI MOTORS has gone to great lengths instructions and disposal batteries
to bring you a superbly crafted automobile offering information E00201300029
the highest quality and dependability. E00200600025

Your vehicle contains batteries
Use MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts, de- and/or accumulators.
signed and manufactured to maintain your Do not mix with general house-
MITSUBISHI MOTORS automobile at top per- WARNING hold waste.
formance. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts For proper treatment, recovery
are identified by this mark and are available at all l Prolonged and repeated contact may
cause serious skin disorders, including and recycling of used batteries,
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service please take them to applicable col-
dermatitis and cancer.
Points. lection points, in accordance
l Avoid contact with the skin as far as pos-
sible and wash thoroughly after any con- with your national legislation
tact. and the Directives 2006/66/EC.
l Keep used engine oils out of reach of chil- By disposing of these batteries
dren. correctly, you will help to save
valuable resources and prevent
any potential negative effects on
Protect the environment human health and the environ-
It is illegal to pollute drains, water courses and soil. ment which could otherwise
Use authorized waste collection facilities, includ- arise from inappropriate waste
ing civic amenity sites and garages providing facili- handling.
ties for disposal of used oil and used oil filters. If in
doubt, contact your local authority for advice on dis-
posal.
05
Locking and unlocking
Keys..............................................................................................1-02
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system).....................1-03
Keyless entry system*..................................................................1-04
Doors............................................................................................1-06 1
Central door locks*.......................................................................1-07
“Child-protection” rear doors (Double cab).................................1-08
Manual window control*..............................................................1-08
Electric window control*..............................................................1-08
Quarter window (Club cab)..........................................................1-12
Rear gate.......................................................................................1-13
Sunroof*.......................................................................................1-13
Keys WARNING
• Do not leave the key where it may be ex-
posed to high temperature or high humid-
E00300101608
Two keys are provided. The key fits all locks. ity.
l When taking a key on flights, do not
Keep one in a safe place as a spare key. press any switches on the key while on l The engine is designed so that it will not
the plane. If a switch is pressed on the start if the ID code registered in the immobil-
plane, the key emits electromagnetic izer computer and the key’s ID code do not
Type 1
waves, which could adversely affect the match. Refer to the “Electronic immobilizer”
plane’s flight operation. section for details and key usage.
1 When carrying a key in a bag, be careful
that no switches on the key can be easily
pressed by mistake.
NOTE
l The key number is stamped on the tag as in-
dicated in the illustration.
Make a record of the key number and store
the key and key number tag in separate pla-
Type 2 ces, so that you can order a key in the event
the original keys are lost.
l The key is a precision electronic device with
a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe
the following in order to prevent a malfunc-
tion.
• Do not leave in a place that is exposed to
direct sunlight, for example on the dash-
board.
• Do not disassemble or modify.
• Do not excessively bend the key or sub-
ject it to strong impacts.
• Do not expose to water.
• Keep away from magnetic key holders.
• Keep away from audio systems, personal
computers, TVs, and other equipment
that generates a magnetic field.
• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners or
similar equipment.
1-02
Electronic immobilizer (Anti- If the engine does not start, we recom-

mend you to contact your MITSUBISHI
l Two keys are provided.
If you lose one of them, order a replacement
theft starting system) MOTORS Authorized Service Point. as soon as possible.
E00300200921
To obtain a key, take your vehicle and all re-
The electronic immobilizer is designed to signifi- maining keys to a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
cantly reduce the possibility of vehicle theft. The Authorized Service Point.
purpose of the system is to immobilize the vehicle If you need an extra spare key, take your ve-
if an invalid start is attempted. A valid start attempt hicle and all the keys to a MITSUBISHI
can only be achieved (subject to certain conditions)
using a keyless operation system “registered” to
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. All the
keys have to be re-registered in the immobil-
1
the immobilizer system. izer computer unit. The immobilizer allows
up to 8 different ID codes to be registered;
NOTE you can register a maximum of 8 keys for use.
l In the following cases, the vehicle may not
be able to receive the registered ID code
from the key. This means the engine will not CAUTION
start even when the registered key is turned
to the “START” position. l Don’t make any alterations or additions
• When the key contacts a key ring or other to the immobilizer system; alterations or
metallic or magnetic object (Type A) additions could cause failure of the immo-
• When the key grip contacts metal of an- bilizer.
other key (Type B)
• When the key contacts or is close to other
immobilizing keys (including keys of oth-
er vehicles) (Type C)
In cases like these, remove the object or

additional key from the vehicle key and
turn the key back to the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position. Then try again to start
the engine.
1-03
Keyless entry system* l If the UNLOCK switch (2) is pressed and

any of the doors is not opened within approx-
• The indication lamp (3) is dim or does
not come on.
E00300301860
Press the remote control switch, and all doors will imately 30 seconds, relocking will automati-
be locked or unlocked as desired. cally occur. For further information, please contact
l It is possible to modify functions as follows: your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
For further information, please contact your ized Service Point.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service If you replace the battery yourself, refer
Point. to “Procedure for replacing the remote
1 • The time from pressing the UNLOCK control switch battery” on page 1-04.
switch (2) to the moment of automatic l If your remote control switch is lost or dam-
locking can be changed. aged, please contact your MITSUBISHI
• The confirmation function (flashing of MOTORS Authorized Service Point for a re-
the turn-signal lamps) can be set to oper- placement remote control switch.
ate only when the doors are locked or on- l If you wish to add a remote control switch,
ly when the doors are unlocked. we recommend you to contact a
• The confirmation function (this indicates MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
locking or unlocking of the doors with Point.
1- LOCK switch the blink of the turn-signal lamps) can be A maximum of 4 remote control switches are
2- UNLOCK switch deactivated. available for your vehicle.
3- Indication lamp • The number of times the turn-signal
lamps are flashed by the confirmation
Procedure for replacing the remote
To lock function can be changed.
Press the LOCK switch (1), and all doors will be l The keyless entry system does not operate in control switch battery
E00309500015
locked. When they are locked with the room lamp the following conditions: 1. Remove the screw (A) from the remote con-
at the [•] position, the room lamp and the turn-sig- • The key is left in the key cylinder. trol switch.
nal lamps blink once. • The door is open.
l The remote control switch will operate with-
To unlock in approximately 4 m from the vehicle. How-
Press the UNLOCK switch (2), and all doors will ever, the operating range of the remote con-
be unlocked. When unlocked with the room lamp trol switch may change if the vehicle is loca-
at the [•] position, the room lamp will be turned on ted near a power station, or radio/TV broad-
for approximately 15 seconds and the turn-signal casting station.
lamps will blink twice. l If either of the following problems occurs,
the battery may be exhausted.
• The remote control switch is operated at
NOTE the correct distance from the vehicle, but
l The indication lamp (3) comes on each time the doors are not locked/unlocked in re-
a switch is pressed. sponse.
1-04
2. With the MITSUBISHI mark facing you, in- 3. Remove the remote control transmitter from 9. Check the keyless entry system to see that it
sert the cloth covered tip of a straight blade the remote control switch case. Then, open works.
(or minus) screwdriver into the notch in the the remote control transmitter using the meth-
remote control switch case and use it to open od described in step 2. NOTE
the case.
l You may purchase a replacement battery at
an electric appliance store.
l A MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
ice Point can replace the battery for you if
you prefer. 1
CAUTION
l When the remote control switch case is
opened, be careful to keep water, dust,
etc. out. Also, do not touch the internal
components.
4. Remove the old battery.
NOTE 5. Install a new battery with the + side (B) down.
l Be sure to perform the procedure with the
MITSUBISHI mark facing you. If the
MITSUBISHI mark is not facing you when
you open the remote control switch case, the + side
switches may come out.
- side
Coin type battery

CR1616
6. Close the remote control transmitter firmly.

7. Place the remote control transmitter in the re-
mote control switch case, then securely close
the remote control switch case.
8. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 1.
1-05
Doors To lock or unlock from inside the vehi- To lock without using the key
E00300401584 cle
CAUTION
l Make sure the doors are closed: driving
with doors not completely closed is dan-
1 l
gerous.
Never leave children in the vehicle unat-
tended.
l Be careful not to lock the doors while the
key is inside the vehicle.
NOTE
1- Lock Set the inside lock knob (1) to the locked position,
l To prevent the key from being locked inside 2- Unlock and close the door (2).
the vehicle, neither the lock knob on the driv-
er’s door nor the key can be used to lock the
driver’s door when it is open. Pull the inside door handle towards you to open the NOTE
door. l The driver’s door cannot be locked using the
To lock or unlock with the key inside lock knob while the driver’s door is
NOTE opened.
l The driver’s door can be opened without us-
ing the lock knob by pulling on the inside
door handle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the central
door lock system, all other doors are un-
locked at the same time.
1- Insert or remove the key

2- Lock
3- Unlock
1-06
Central door locks* Driver’s door with inside lock knob NOTE
E00300801504 Set the inside lock knob on the driver’s door to- l The vehicle is shipped from the factory with
wards the front of the vehicle to lock the doors. Set a setting established such that the doors are
NOTE it towards the rear of the vehicle to unlock the doors. not unlocked when the selector lever is
placed in the in the “P” position with the ig-
l Each of the doors can be locked or unlocked nition switch in the “ON” position. If you
independently by using the inside lock knob.
wish to change the setting such that the doors
l Repeated continuous operation between lock are unlocked, contact your MITSUBISHI
and unlock could activate the central door
locking systems built-in protection circuit MOTORS Authorized Service Point. 1
and prevent the system from operating. If
this occurs, wait about 1 minute before oper-
ating the inside lock knob or the key.
All of the doors can be locked and unlocked as de-

scribed hereafter.
Driver’s door with key

Turn the key in the driver’s door towards the front 1- Lock
of the vehicle to lock the doors and towards the 2- Unlock
rear of the vehicle to unlock the doors.
Unlocking doors using selector lever
(vehicle with keyless entry system)
It is possible to unlock all of the doors using the se-
lector lever by placing in the “P” position while the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
1- Lock
2- Unlock
1-07
“Child-protection” rear doors Manual window control* Electric window control*

(Double cab) E00302100067 E00302200127
The electric windows can only be operated with the
E00300900742
ignition switch in the “ON” position.
WARNING
1 l Before operating the electric window con-
trol, make sure that nothing can get trap-
ped (head, hand, finger, etc.).
l Never leave the vehicle without removing
the key.
l Never leave a child (or other person who
might not be capable of safe operation of
1- To open the electric window control) in the vehicle
2- To close alone.
1- Lock
2- Unlock l The child may tamper with the switch at
the risk of its hands or head being trap-
ped in the window.
Child protection helps prevent doors from being
opened accidentally, especially when small chil-
dren are in the rear seat. Electric window control switch
E00302301431
A lever is provided on each rear door.
If the lever is set to the locked position, the rear Each window opens or closes while the correspond-
door cannot be opened using the inside handle. ing switch is operated.
To open the rear door while the child protection is
in use, pull the outside door handle. Driver’s switch (LHD)
If the lever is set to the “Unlock” position, the
child protection mechanism does not function.
CAUTION
l When driving with a child in the rear
seat, please use the child protection to pre-
vent accidental door opening which may
cause an accident.
1-08
Driver’s switch (RHD) If the switch is fully pressed down/pulled up, the NOTE
door window automatically opens/closes complete- l It is not possible to stop the rear retractable
ly. power window in any position other than the
If you want to stop the window movement, operate fully closed position, ventilation position,
the switch lightly in the reverse direction. and fully open position.
If the rear retractable power window is
NOTE opened while the rear window demister is op-
erating, the rear window demister automati-
l Repeated operation with the engine stopped
will run down the battery. Operate the win- cally stops. When the rear retractable power 1
dow switches only while the engine is running. window is subsequently fully closed, the be-
haviour of the rear window demister depends
l The rear door windows only open halfway.
upon the elapsed time of the rear window de-
1- Driver’s door window
2- Front passenger’s door window mister’s timer. (The timer runs for about 20
Rear retractable power window switch (Double
3- Rear left door window (Double cab) minutes in total.)
cab)*
4- Rear right door window (Double cab) • If the rear window demister’s timer is run-
The rear retractable power window switch can be ning, the rear window demister restarts
5- Lock switch used to operate the rear retractable power window.
6- Rear retractable power window (Double cab)* for the remaining time.
The rear retractable power window stops in three • If the rear window demister’s timer has
positions: the fully closed position, a ventilation po- finished, the rear window demister does
The switches can be used to operate all door win- sition, and the fully open position. not operate. If you wish to activate the
dows. A window can be opened or closed by oper-
rear window demister, press the rear win-
ating the corresponding switch.
dow demister switch again.
Press the switch down to open the window, and
pull up the switch to close it.
1- Close
2- Open
1-09
A- Fully closed position Lock switch

In this position, the rear retractable power win- WARNING E00303100396
dow is fully closed. When this switch is operated, the passenger’s

• Even if the rear retractable power win- switches and the rear retractable power window
To place the rear retractable power window dow switch (2) is lightly pressed while
in the fully closed position, firmly press the switch cannot be used to open or close the windows.
the rear retractable power window is To unlock, press it once again.
rear retractable power window switch (1). moving from the fully open position to-
wards the ventilation position, the
B- Ventilation position rear retractable power window does
1 In this position, the rear retractable power win-
dow is slightly open.
not return to the fully open position.
To place the rear retractable power window
in the ventilation position, lightly press the C- Fully open position
rear retractable power window switch (1) or In this position, the rear retractable power win-
(2). dow is fully open.
To place the rear retractable power window
in the fully open position, firmly press the
WARNING rear retractable power window switch (2).
l In each of the following circumstances,

1- Lock
the operating direction of the rear retract-
able power window switch and the operat-
WARNING 2- Unlock
ing direction of the rear retractable pow- l If the rear retractable power window
er window do not match each other. Exer- switch (1) is lightly pressed while the rear NOTE
cise caution to avoid the risk of accidental- retractable power window is moving
ly trapping a hand or your head when op- from the fully closed position towards the l The driver’s switch can open or close any
door windows.
erating the rear retractable power win- fully open position, the rear retractable
dow. power window will come up to the ventila-
• Even if the rear retractable power win-
dow switch (1) is lightly pressed while
tion position. To avoid the risk of acciden-
tally trapping a hand or your head, do
WARNING
the rear retractable power window is not operate the switch while the rear re- l A child may tamper with the switch at
moving from the fully closed position tractable power window is moving. the risk of its hands or head being trap-
towards the ventilation position, the ped in the window. When driving with a
rear retractable power window does child in the vehicle, please press the win-
not return to the fully closed position.
NOTE dow lock switch to disable the passen-
l The rear retractable power window only ger’s switches and rear retractable power
opens halfway. window switch.
1-10
Timer function
E00302400709 WARNING Rear retractable power window
Door’s window If a hand or head is trapped in the closing rear re-
The door windows can be opened or closed for 30 l If the safety mechanism is activated three
tractable power window, it will lower automatically.
or more times successively, the safety
seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts their head
mechanism will be temporarily cancelled.
“ON” position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. or hand out of the rear retractable power window
If a hand or head got trapped, a serious
If the driver’s door is opened during this period, when closing a rear retractable power window.
injury could result.
the door window can be opened or closed for anoth- The lowered window will become operational after
er 30 seconds.
However, once the driver’s door is closed, the win-
a few seconds. 1
dows cannot be operated. CAUTION
Rear retractable power window l The safety mechanism is cancelled just be- WARNING
fore the power window is fully closed.
The rear retractable power window can be opened
This allows the power window to close
l If the safety mechanism is activated three
or closed for 30 seconds after the ignition switch is or more times successively, the safety
completely. Therefore be especially care- mechanism will be temporarily cancelled.
turned from the “ON” position to the “ACC” or
ful that no fingers are trapped in the pow- If a hand or head got trapped, a serious
“LOCK” position.
er window. injury could result.
If the driver’s door is opened during this period,
the rear retractable power window can be opened
or closed for another 30 seconds. NOTE
However, once the driver’s door is closed, the rear l The safety mechanism can be activated if the CAUTION
retractable power window cannot be operated. driving conditions or other circumstances
cause the power window to be subjected to a l The safety mechanism is cancelled just be-
Safety mechanism physical shock similar to that caused by a trap-
fore the rear retractable power window is
E00302500537 fully closed. This allows the rear retracta-
Door’s window ped hand or head.
ble power window to close completely.
If a hand or head is trapped in the closing power l If the safety mechanism is activated three or
Therefore be especially careful that no fin-
window, it will lower automatically. more times in a row, the safety mechanism
gers are trapped in the rear retractable
Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts their head will be cancelled and the power window will
power window.
or hand out of the power window when closing a not close correctly.
power window. In such a case, the following procedure
The lowered window will become operational after should be implemented to rectify this situa- NOTE
tion. Repeatedly raise the appropriate power
a few seconds.
window switch until that power window has
l The safety mechanism can be activated if the
driving conditions or other circumstances
been fully closed. Following this, release the cause the rear retractable power window to
switch, raise the switch once again and hold be subjected to a physical shock similar to
it in this condition for at least one second, that caused by a trapped hand or head.
then release it. You should now be able to op-
erate the power window in the normal fashion.
1-11
l If the safety mechanism is activated three or

more times in a row, the safety mechanism
Quarter window (Club cab) To close
E00302600088 Pull the lever, returning it to its original position
will be cancelled and the rear retractable pow- and securing it in place.
er window will not close correctly. To open
In such a case, the following procedure 1. Pull the lever towards you.
should be implemented to rectify this situa-
tion. Repeatedly press the rear retractable
power window switch (1) until that rear re-
1 tractable power window has been fully closed.
Following this, release the switch, press the
switch once again and hold it in this condi-
tion for at least 1 second, then release it. You
should now be able to operate the rear retract-
able power window in the normal fashion.
2. Push the lever towards the outside of the ve-

hicle.
3. Push the lever towards the rear of the vehicle
to secure it in place.
1-12
Rear gate CAUTION Sunroof*

E00303000050 E00302700887
The sunroof can only be operated with the ignition
l Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe
To open when loading and unloading luggage. switch in the “ON” position.
Lift up the handle and lower the rear gate. Heat from the exhaust could lead to burns.
l Pay attention not to catch your fingers in
the rear gate.
l Do not weight the rear gate.
l Before driving, make sure that the rear 1
gate is securely closed. If the rear gate
opens while driving the vehicle, objects
stored in the cargo area could fall out on-
to the road.
To open
To close The sunroof automatically opens if the switch (3) is
Raise the rear gate and close with enough force to pressed.
latch the assembly securely into position. To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch (1) or
(2).
NOTE
l The sunroof automatically stops just before
reaching the fully open position.
Press the switch again to fully open it.
To close
The sunroof closes while the switch (2) is pressed.
To tilt up
When the switch (1) is pressed, the rear edge of sun-
roof rises for ventilation.
To tilt down
The sunroof tilt down while the switch (2) is pressed.
1-13
Safety mechanism l Be sure to tilt down the sunroof before clos-

E00303800029 CAUTION ing the sunshade.
If a hand or head is trapped in the closing sunroof, l The sunshade cannot be closed with the sun-
it will reopen automatically. l The safety mechanism is cancelled just be- roof opened. Do not attempt to close the sun-
fore the sunroof is fully closed. This al-
Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts their head shade when the sunroof is opened.
lows the sunroof to close completely.
or hand out of the sunroof when opening or closing.
Therefore be especially careful that no fin-
The opened sunroof will become operational after
gers are trapped in the sunroof.
a few seconds. WARNING
1 If the safety mechanism is activated 5 or more 4. Following this action, it should be possible l Do not put head, hands or anything else
times consecutively or the switch (1) is kept press- to operate the sunroof in the normal manner. out of the sunroof opening while driving
ed for 10 seconds or longer with the sunroof station- the vehicle.
ary in the fully tilted up position, normal closing of l Never leave a child (or other person who
the sunroof will be aborted. In such an event, you
Sunshade might not be capable of safe operation of
E00307900044
should take the following steps: the sunroof switch) in the vehicle alone.
Slide the sunshade manually to open and close it.
1. Press the switch (1) repeatedly until the sun- l Before operating the sunroof, make sure
roof has been fully tilt up. that nothing is capable of being trapped
2. Once the fully tilt up position has been (head, hand, finger, etc.).
reached, press again and hold the switch (1)
for at least 3 seconds.
NOTE
3. After pressing the switch (3) to perform full
opening, press the switch (2) to fully close l The sunroof stops just before reaching the
fully open position.
the sunroof.
If the vehicle is driven with the sunroof in
this position, wind throb is lower than with
NOTE the sunroof fully open.
l The safety mechanism can be activated if the l When leaving the vehicle unattended, make
driving conditions or other circumstances sure you close the sunroof and remove the ig-
cause the sunroof to be subjected to a physi- nition key.
cal shock similar to that caused by a trapped l Do not try to operate the sunroof if it is fro-
hand or head. zen closed (after snow fall or during extreme
l Avoid stopping the sunroof before it reaches CAUTION cold).
the opening or closing end during operations. l Do not sit or place heavy luggage on the sun-
If this should accidentally happen, repeat the l Be careful that hands are not trapped
when closing the sunshade. roof or roof opening edge.
process from step 1. l Release the switch as soon as the sunroof rea-
ches the fully open or fully closed position.
NOTE
l The sunshade will operate together with the
sunroof when the sunroof is opened.
1-14
l If the sunroof does not operate when the sun-

roof switch is operated, release the switch
and check whether something is trapped by
the sunroof. If nothing is trapped, we recom-
mend you to have the sunroof checked.
l Depending on the model of ski carriers or
roof carriers, the sunroof may make contact
with the carrier when the sunroof is tilted up.
Be careful when tilting up the sunroof if such
a ski carrier or a roof carrier is installed.
1
l Be sure to close the sunroof completely
when washing the vehicle or when leaving
the vehicle.
l Be careful, not to put any wax on the weath-
erstrip (black rubber) around the sunroof
opening. If stained with wax, the weather-
strip cannot maintain a weatherproof seal
with the sunroof.
l After washing the vehicle or after it has
rained, wipe off any water that is on the sun-
roof before operating it.
l Operating the sunroof repeatedly with the en-
gine stationary will run down the battery. Op-
erate the sunroof while the engine is running.
1-15
Seat and seat belts
Seat...............................................................................................2-02
Seat adjustment.............................................................................2-03
Front seat......................................................................................2-03
Rear seat*.....................................................................................2-07
Head restraints..............................................................................2-08
Seat belts.......................................................................................2-09
Pregnant women restraint.............................................................2-11
Seat belt pretensioner system and force limiter system*..............2-12
2
Child restraint...............................................................................2-13
Seat belt inspection.......................................................................2-27
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag*............................2-27
Seat and seat belts
Seat
E00400101146
1-Front seat
l To adjust forward or backward ® p. 2-03
l To recline the seatback ® p. 2-04
l To adjust the seat height (Driver’s seat)* ® p. 2-05
l To get in and out of the cargo space (Club cab, passenger’s seat) ® p. 2-05
l Folding the seatback forward (Single cab, passenger’s seat)* ® p. 2-06
l Heated seats* ® p. 2-06
2-Rear seat*
l Folding the seatback forward (Double cab) ® p. 2-07
l Folding up the seat cushion (Club cab)* ® p. 2-07
l Armrest (Double cab) ® p. 2-07
2-02
Seat and seat belts
Seat adjustment WARNING Front seat

E00400300200 E0400400012
Adjust the driver’s seat so that you are comfortable
l To minimize the risk of personal injury To adjust forward or backward
and that you can reach the pedals, steering wheel, in the event of a collision or sudden brak- E00400500475
switches etc. while retaining a clear field of vision. ing, the seatbacks should always be in the
almost upright position while the vehicle Manual type
is in motion. The protection provided by Pull the seat adjusting lever and adjust the seat for-
WARNING the seat belts may be reduced significant- ward or backward to the desired position. After ad-
justment, release the adjusting lever to lock the seat
ly when the seatback is reclined. There is
l Do not attempt to adjust the seat while
greater risk that the passenger will slide in position.
driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
trol and result in an accident. After ad- under the seat belt, resulting in serious in-
justments are made, ensure the seating is
locked in position by attempting to move
jury, when the seatback is reclined.
2
the seat forward and rearward without us-
ing the adjusting mechanism. CAUTION
l It is extremely dangerous to ride in the
cargo area (inside or outside) of a vehicle. l Make sure the seat is adjusted by an
Also, the cargo area and rear seats should adult or with adult supervision for cor-
never be used as a play area by children. rect and safe operation.
In a collision, people or children riding un- l Do not place a cushion or the like be-
restrained in these areas are more likely tween your back and the seatback while
to be seriously injured or killed. driving. The effectiveness of the head re-
Do not allow people or children to ride in straints will be reduced in the event of an
any area of your vehicle that is not equip- accident.
ped with seats and seat belts, and make l When sliding the seats, be careful not to
catch your hand or foot. WARNING
sure that everyone travelling in your vehi-
cle is in a seat and wearing a seat belt, or l When sliding or reclining the seat rear- l To ensure the seat is locked securely, try
in the case of a child is strapped in a child ward, pay careful attention to the rear to move the seat forward or backward
restraint. seat passengers. (Double cab and Club without using the adjusting lever.
cab)
2-03
Seat and seat belts
Power type To recline the seatback Power type

Adjust the seat by operating the switch as indicated E00400600593 Adjust the seatback angle by operating the switch
by the arrows. as indicated by the arrows.
Manual type
In order to recline the seatback, lean forward slight-
ly, pull the seatback lock lever up, and then lean
backward to the desired position and release the lev-
er. The seatback will lock in that position.
1- Adjustment forward 1- To move to forward direction

2- Adjustment backward 2- To recline rearward
NOTE NOTE
l To prevent the battery from running down, l To prevent the battery from running down,
operate the power type seat with the engine operate the power type seat with the engine
running. CAUTION running.
l The reclining mechanism of the seatback

is spring loaded, causing it to return to
the vertical position when the lock lever
is operated. When operating the lever, sit
close to the seatback or hold it with your
hand to control its return motion.
2-04
Seat and seat belts
To adjust the seat height (Driver’s

seat)*
E00400700653
Manual type
Adjust the seat height by repeatedly operating the
lever.
1- To move the front of the seat up and down 3- To move the whole seat up and down 2
To get in and out of the cargo space
(Club cab, passenger’s seat)
E00411000021
The lever can be used to make getting in and out
easier.
1- Raise
2- Lower
Power type
To adjust the seat height, operate the switch as indi-
cated by arrows.
2- To move the rear of the seat up and down
NOTE
l To prevent the battery from running down,
operate the power type seat with the engine
running.
1- To get in or out
2- To get out
2-05
Seat and seat belts
When the lever or pedal is used, the seatback will Pull the band and fold the seatback forward.
tilt forward and at the same time the entire seat will CAUTION
move forward. To return the seat, slide the entire
seat rearward and then raise the seatback rearward l Switch off seat heaters when not in use.
to lock the seat in position. l Operate in the high position for quick heat-
ing. Once the seat is warm, set the heater
to low to keep it warm. Slight variations
WARNING in seat temperature may be felt while us-
ing the heated seats. This is caused by the
l Do not drive the vehicle with the seatback operation of the heater’s internal thermo-
folded forward. The seat is not retained stat and does not indicate a malfunction.
position if it is not kept in an upright posi- l If the following types of persons use the
2 tion, so serious injuries could be suffered
in the event of hard braking or a collision.
heated seats, they might become too hot
or receive minor burns (red skin, heat blis-
ters, etc.):
• Children, elderly or ill people
Heated seats*
CAUTION E00401100784
• People with sensitive skin
• Excessively tired people
The heated seats can be operated with the ignition
l The reclining mechanism of the seatback switch in the “ON” position. • People under the influence of alcohol
is spring loaded, causing it to return to or sleep inducing medication (cold
the vertical position when the lock lever medicine, etc.)
is operated. When using the lever, sit l Do not place heavy objects on the seat or
close to the seatback or hold it with your stick pins, needles, or other pointed ob-
hand. jects into it.
l Use a foot to operate the pedal (2). l Do not use a blanket, cushion, or other ma-
terial with high heat insulation properties
on the seat while using the heater; this
Folding the seatback forward (Single might cause the heater element to overheat
cab, passenger’s seat)* l When cleaning the seat, do not use ben-
E00410400031 zene, kerosene, petrol, alcohol, or other or-
To access the onboard tool kit, fold forward the seat- ganic solvents; these might damage the
back of the passenger’s seat. surface of the seat and also the heater ele-
Refer to “Tools, jack and jack handle” on page ment.
6-07. l If water or any other liquid is spilled on
1 (HI)- Heater high (for quick heating).
the seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before
2- Heater off. attempting to use the heater.
3 (LO)- Heater low (to keep the seat warm). l Turn the heater off immediately if it ap-
pears to be malfunctioning during use.
The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while the
heater is on.
2-06
Seat and seat belts
Rear seat* Securely retain the seat cushion by hooking the re-
taining band (A) onto the head restraint (B) of the
NOTE
E00401300148 l Do not stand or sit on the armrest. It could
When a person is sitting in the middle seating posi- rear seat. break.
tion of the rear seat, adjust the head restraint to l The top surface of the armrest contains a cup
height at which it lock in position. Refer to “Head holder for rear seat occupants.
restraints” on page 2-08. Refer to “Cup holder” on page 5-44.
Folding the seatback forward (Double
cab)
E00401600242
Pull up the band on the top of the seatback and fold
it forward.
2
Armrest (Double cab)

E00401700605
To use the armrest, fold it down.
To return to the original position, push it backward
(into the seatback) until it is level with the seat.
Confirm that the seatback locks securely when it is

returned.
Folding up the seat cushion (Club cab)*

E00411300024
The right and left seat cushions can be folded up
separately.
To fold the seat cushions up, raise the seat cushions.
2-07
Seat and seat belts
Head restraints To raise the head restraint, move it upward. To low-

er the restraint, move it downward while pushing
To install
E00403300995 Confirm that the head restraint is facing the correct
the height adjusting knob (A) in the direction of the direction, and then insert it into the seatback while
arrow. After adjustment, push the head restraint pressing the height adjusting knob (A) in the direc-
WARNING downward and make sure that it is locked. tion indicated by the arrow.
l Driving without the head restraints in
place can cause you and your passengers
serious injury or death in an accident. To
reduce the risk of injury in an accident, al-
ways make sure the head restraints are in-
stalled and properly positioned when the
2 seat is occupied.
l Never place a cushion or similar device
on the seatback. This can adversely affect
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the
restraint.
To adjust height To remove

Adjust the head restraint height so that the centre Lift the head restraint with the height adjusting CAUTION
of the restraint is as close as possible to eye level to knob (A) pushed in.
reduce the chances of injury in the event of colli- l Confirm that the height adjusting knob
(A) is correctly adjusted as shown in the
sion. Any person too tall for the restraint to reach illustration, and also lift the head re-
their seated eye level, should adjust the restraint as straints to ensure that they do not come
high as possible. out of the seatback.
2-08
Seat and seat belts
Seat belts WARNING

E00404800825
To protect you and your passengers in the event of
an accident, it is most important that the seat belts
l To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury
in an accident, including the deploying
are worn correctly while driving. driver’s airbag, adjust the driver’s seat
A seat belt for a front seat equipped with an airbag as far back as possible while maintaining
has a pretensioner system. These belts are used the a position that still allows good visibility
same way as a conventional seat belt. and good control of the steering wheel,
Refer to “Seat belt pretensioner system and force the brake and accelerator, and vehicle con-
limiter system” on page 2-12 . trols.
l Never hold a child in your arms or on
WARNING
your lap when riding in this vehicle, even
if you are wearing your seat belt. To do 2
CAUTION l Always place the shoulder belt over your
so risks severe or fatal injury to the child
in a collision or sudden stop.
shoulder and across your chest. Never
l If your vehicle is equipped with the rear
put it behind you or under your arm. l Always adjust the seat belt to a snug fit.
seat head restraint, the head restraints
for the front and rear seats differ in size. l One seat belt should be used by only one
When installing head restraints, make person. Doing otherwise can be dangerous.
sure the front and rear head restraints l The seat belt will provide its wearer with
are fitted in their respective seats. maximum protection if the recliner seat-
back is placed in fully upright position.
When the seatback is reclined, there is
greater risk that the passenger will slide
under the belt, especially in a forward im-
pact accident, and may be injured by the
belt or by striking the instrument panel
or seatbacks.
l Seat belts should always be worn by ev-
ery adult who drives or rides in this vehi-
cle, and by all children who are tall
enough to wear seat belts properly. 3-point type seat belt (with emergency
l Remove any twists when using the belt.
locking mechanism)
l No modifications or additions should be E00404901126
made by the user which will either pre- This type of belt requires no length adjustment.
vent the seat belt adjusting devices from Once worn, the belt adjusts itself to the movement
operating to remove slack, or prevent the of the wearer, but in the event of a sudden or strong
seat belt assembly from being adjusted to shock, the belt automatically locks to hold the wear-
remove slack. er’s body.
2-09
Seat and seat belts
NOTE NOTE
l You can check if the belt locks by pulling it WARNING l For the front passenger seat, the warning func-
forward quickly. l The seat belts must not be twisted when tion works only while a person is sitting on
worn. the seat.
To fasten
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding
the latch plate. 3. Pull the belt slightly to adjust slackness as de-
sired.
NOTE To unfasten
l When the seat belts cannot be pulled out in a Hold the latch plate and push the button on the buck-
locked condition, pull the belts once forceful-
le.
2 ly and then return them. After that, pull the
belts out slowly once again.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle until a

“click” is heard.
When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion, the warning lamp will come on and a tone
will sound for about 6 seconds. If the front seat belt
remains unfastened approximately 1 minute later,
the warning lamp will flash and the tone sound in-
termittently (each 12 times) when the vehicle is driv-
en. If the passenger subsequently unfastens the seat
belt while driving, the warning lamp and tone will
NOTE issue further warnings. And if the seat belt remains
l As the belt retracts automatically, keep hold- unfastened, the warning lamp and tone will issue
ing the latch plate while retracting so that the further warnings each time the vehicle starts mov-
belt stows slowly. Failure to do this could ing from a stop. When the seat belt is fastened, the
damage the vehicle. warnings will stop.
WARNING
l Never wear the lap portion of the belt Seat belt reminder/warning lamp
E00409800790
across your abdomen. During accidents it A tone and warning lamp are used to remind the
can press sharply against the abdomen driver and front passenger to fasten the seat belt.
and increase the risk of injury.
2-10
Seat and seat belts
WARNING WARNING Pregnant women restraint

E00405600064
l In order to reduce the risk of serious or fa- l When adjusting the seat belt anchor, set
tal injury in an accident, always wear it at a position that is sufficiently high so
your own seat belt. Do not allow anyone that the belt will make full contact with WARNING
to ride in your vehicle unless he or she is your shoulder but will not touch your neck.
also seated and wearing a seat belt. Chil- l Seat belts work for everyone, including
pregnant women. Pregnant women
dren should additionally be restrained in should use the available seat belts. This
a secure child restraint system. Lap belts*
E00405100128 will reduce the likelihood of injury to
The lap belts should be adjusted by holding the belt both the woman and the unborn child.
NOTE and latch plate at right angles to each other, and The lap belt should be worn across the
l When luggage is placed on the front passen- then pulling the belt as shown in the illustration to thighs and as snug against the hips as pos-
sible, but not across the waist. Consult
2
ger seat, a sensor in the seat cushion may, de- a snug fit around the occupant.
pending on the weight and position of the lug- your doctor if you have any additional
gage, cause the warning tone to sound and questions or concerns.
the warning lamp to come on (Double cab).
Adjustable seat belt anchor (front

seats)*
E00405000299
The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted.
Move the seat belt anchor down with the lock knob
(A) depressed. To move the anchor up, slide it with-
out depressing the lock knob (A).
Anchor down Anchor up 1- Tighten

2- Loosen
While holding the latch plate, insert the latch plate

into the buckle until a “click” is heard.
2-11
Seat and seat belts
Seat belt pretensioner system and WARNING

Refer to “SRS warning lamp” on page 2-38.
force limiter system* Force limiter system

E00405700283 l To obtain the best results from your pre- E00406000078
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat equipped tensioner seat belt, make sure you have ad- In the event of a collision, each force limiter sys-
with an airbag has a pretensioner seat belt. justed your seat correctly and wear your tem will effectively absorb the load applied to the
seat belt properly. seat belt so as to minimize the impact to the passen-
Pretensioner system ger.
E00405801089
The pretensioner system will retract their respec-
tive seat belts instantaneously, thus maximizing the CAUTION
seat belt’s effectiveness, if there is a frontal impact
severe enough to injure the driver and/or front pas-
l Installation of audio equipment or re-
2 senger and the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
pairs in the vicinity of the pretensioner
seat belts or floor console must be per-
“START” position. formed in line with MITSUBISHI
The seat belt pretensioner includes the following MOTORS guidelines. It is important to
components: do so because the work could affect the
pretensioner systems.
l If you need to scrap the vehicle, please con-
sult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ized Service Point. It is important to do
so because unexpected activation of the
pretensioner seat belts could cause inju-
ries.
NOTE
l The pretensioner seat belts will be activated
if the vehicle suffers a severe frontal impact,
even if the seat belts are not worn.
1- Front impact sensors
2- Seat belt pretensioners
l The pretensioner seat belts are designed to
work only once. After the pretensioner seat
3- Airbag control unit belts have been activated, we recommend
you have them replaced by a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
SRS warning lamp

E00405900126
This warning lamp is shared by the SRS airbags
and the pretensioner seat belts.
2-12
Seat and seat belts
Child restraint Caution for installing the child re-

E00406401297 straint on vehicles with a front passen- Front passenger’s airbag ON
When transporting children in your vehicle, some
type of child restraint system should always be
ger airbag
E00406500190
used according to the size of the child. This is re- The label shown here is attached on vehicles with a
quired by law in most countries. front passenger airbag.
The regulations concerning driving with children in
the front seat may differ from country to country.
You are advised to comply with the relevant regula-
tions.
WARNING 2
NOTE
l When possible, put children in the rear l If you have a rearward facing child restraint
seat. Accident statistics indicate that chil- system that cannot be fitted to any seat other
dren of all sizes and ages are safer when than the front passenger seat, be sure to turn
properly restrained in the rear seat rath- OFF the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
er than in the front seat. (Double cab and switch before using it. (Refer to “To turn an
Club cab) airbag off” on page 2-30.)
l Holding a child in your arms is no substi-
tute for a restraint system. Failure to use
a proper restraint system can result in se-
vere or fatal injury to the child. Front passenger’s airbag OFF
l Each child restraint device or fixing is to
be used only by one child.
l When attaching a child restraint to the
rear seat, place the front seatbacks in the WARNING
upright position.
Otherwise, the child could be seriously in-
l Extreme Hazard!
Do not use a rearward facing child re-
jured in the event of hard braking or a col- straint on a seat protected by an airbag in
lision. (Double cab and Club cab) front of it!
l A REARWARD FACING CHILD RE-
STRAINT must NOT be used in the front
passenger seat if the front passenger’s air-
bag has not been deactivated. The force
of an inflating airbag could kill or cause
serious injuries to the child.
2-13
Seat and seat belts
Instruction:
WARNING l For small infants, an infant carrier should be WARNING
used. For small children whose height when
l A FORWARD FACING CHILD RE-
seated allows the shoulder belt to lie in con-
l When the child restraint system is not in
STRAINT should not be used in the front use, keep your child restraint system se-
passenger seat whenever possible; if used tact with the face or the throat, a child seat cured with the seat belt or remove it from
in the front passenger seat, adjust the should be used. the vehicle in order to prevent it from be-
seat to the most rearward position. l The child restraint system should be appropri- ing thrown around inside the vehicle dur-
ate for the child’s weight and height and prop- ing an accident.
erly fit in the vehicle.
l Before purchasing a child restraint system,
try installing it in the seat to make sure there NOTE
is a good fit. Because of the location of the l Depending on the seating position in the ve-
2 seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat hicle and the child restraint system that you
cushion, it may be difficult to securely install have, the child restraint can be attached us-
some manufacturer’s child restraint systems. ing one of the following two locations:
If the child restraint system can be pulled for- • To the lower anchorage in the rear seat
ward or to either side easily on the seat cush- ONLY if the child restraint has ISOFIX
ion after the seat belt has been tightened, mountings (Double cab, See page 2-25).
choose another manufacturer’s child restraint • To the seat belt (See page 2-26).
system.
Older children
WARNING
E00406700235
Infants and small children Children who have outgrown the child restraint sys-
E00406600768
When transporting infants and small children in tem should be seated in the rear seat and wear com-
l When installing a child restraint system, bination lap shoulder belt.
your vehicle, follow the instruction given below. refer to the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the restraint system. Fail- The lap portion of the belt should be snug and posi-
ure to do so can result in severe or fatal tioned low on the abdomen so that it is below the
injury to the child. top of the hip-bone. Otherwise, the belt could in-
trude into the child’s abdomen during an accident
l After installation, push and pull the child
and cause injury.
restraint system back and forth, and side
to side, to see that it is properly secured.
If the child restraint system is not instal-
led securely, it may cause injury to the WARNING
child or other occupants in the case of ac- l Children who are not buckled up can be
cident or sudden stops. thrown out of the vehicle in an accident.
2-14
Seat and seat belts
WARNING
l Children who are not buckled up can
strike other people in the vehicle in an ac-
cident.
l A child should never be left unattended
in your vehicle. When you leave the vehi-
cle, take the child with you.
2-15
Seat and seat belts
Suitability for various ISOFIX positions

E00411400269
Vehicle ISOFIX positions

Mass group Size class Fixture
Front passenger Rear outboard Rear centre
Carrycot F ISO/L1 X X X
G ISO/L2 X X X
X X X
0 - Up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X X
2 X X X
0+ - Up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 X IL*2 X
D ISO/R2 X X X
C ISO/R3 X X X
X X X
I -9 to 18 kg D ISO/R2 X X X
C ISO/R3 X X X
B ISO/F2 X IUF X
B1 ISO/F2X X IUF, IL*1 X
A ISO/F3 X IUF X
X X X
II -15 to 25 kg X X X
III -22 to 36 kg X X X
Key of letters to be inserted in the table above:
l IUF- Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
l IL- Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems given in the following list (MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine parts).
l X- ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.
2-16
Seat and seat belts
IL (Genuine part information)
Genuine part No. ECE No.

*1 MZ313045 E1-04301133
MZ314393 (Child restraint system),
*2 E1-04301146
MZ314394 (ISOFIX base)
NOTE
l MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement.
For further information, please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
2
2-17
Seat and seat belts
Suitability for various seating positions

E00406800874
Single cab (Separate seat)
Seating position
Mass group Front passenger
Activated airbag Deactivated airbag*1
0 - Up to 10 kg X U
0+ - Up to 13 kg X U, L*2
2 I -9 to 18 kg UF, L*3, L*4 U, L*3, L*4

II -15 to 25 kg UF, L*5 U, L*5
III -22 to 36 kg UF, L*5 U, L*5
*1: With front passenger’s airbag deactivated by means of front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.
l U- Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
l UF- Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
l L- Suitable for particular child restraints in the following list (MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine parts).
l X- Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.
L (Genuine part information)
Genuine parts No. ECE No.

*2 MZ312807 E1-04301146
*3 MZ314451 E1-04301203
*4 MZ313045 E1-04301133
*5 MZ314250 E1-04301169
2-18
Seat and seat belts
CAUTION
l When installing a child restraint system, prevent the head restraint from touching the child restraint system by removing it or adjusting its height.
NOTE
l There is no applicable MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts to the Mass Group “0-Up to 10 kg”.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement.
Single cab (Bench seat) 2

Seating position
Front centre
0 - Up to 10 kg X U X
0+ - Up to 13 kg X U, L*2 X
I -9 to 18 kg UF, L*3, L*4 U, L*3, L*4 X
II -15 to 25 kg UF, L*5 U, L*5 X
III -22 to 36 kg UF, L*5 U, L*5 X
2-19
Seat and seat belts

*2 MZ312807 E1-04301146
*3 MZ314451 E1-04301203
*4 MZ313045 E1-04301133
*5 MZ314250 E1-04301169
2 CAUTION
NOTE
Club cab
Seating position
Rear outboard
0 - Up to 10 kg X U X
0+ - Up to 13 kg X U, L*2 L*2
I -9 to 18 kg UF, L*3, L*4 U, L*3, L*4 L*3, L*4
II -15 to 25 kg UF, L*5 U, L*5 X
III -22 to 36 kg UF, L*5 U, L*5 X
2-20
Seat and seat belts


*2 MZ312807 E1-04301146
*3 MZ314451 E1-04301203 2
*4 MZ313045 E1-04301133
*5 MZ314250 E1-04301169
CAUTION
NOTE
2-21
Seat and seat belts
Double cab
Seating position
Rear outboard Rear centre
0 - Up to 10 kg X U U X
0+ - Up to 13 kg X U, L*2 U, L*2 X
I -9 to 18 kg UF, L*3, L*4 U, L*3, L*4 U, L*3, L*4 L*4
2 II -15 to 25 kg UF, L*5 U, L*5 U, L*5 L*5

III -22 to 36 kg UF, L*5 U, L*5 U, L*5 L*5

*2 MZ312807 E1-04301146
*3 MZ314451 E1-04301203
*4 MZ313045 E1-04301133
*5 MZ314250 E1-04301169
CAUTION
2-22
Seat and seat belts
NOTE
2-23
Seat and seat belts
Child restraint anchorage points (Dou- Tether anchorage strap installation 3. Tip the armrest forward. Open the fastener
ble cab)* (B) that is located in the space where the arm-
E00406900354 rest was stowed.
WARNING
Anchorage locations
There are 2 child restraint anchorage points on the l Child restraint anchorages are designed
floor, located behind the rear seat. These are for se- to withstand only those loads imposed by
curing a child restraint system tether strap to each correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
of the 2 rear seating positions in your vehicle. circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-
ing other items or equipment to the vehicle.
2 1. Remove the head restraint from the location

in which you wish to install a child restraint.
2. Drop the child restraint’s tether strap (A)
down the back of the rear seatback.
4. Put your hand in the opening of the fastener,
attach the tether strap’s hook (C) to the tether
anchorage (D), and securely tighten the teth-
er strap.
*: Rear of the vehicle
CAUTION
l The anchorages are only applicable for
child restraints fitted in the rear seat.
2-24
Seat and seat belts
Installing a child restraint system to It is not necessary to retain the child restraint sys- 1. Push the child restraint system’s connectors
the lower anchorage (ISOFIX child re- tem using the vehicle’s seat belts. into the lower anchorages (A) in accordance
with the instructions provided by the child re-
straint mountings)* straint system’s manufacturer.
E00408900114
Your vehicle’s second seat is fitted with lower an-
chorages for attaching a child restraint system with
ISOFIX mountings.
2
A- Child restraint system connectors
To install
If your child restraint system requires the use
of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in ac-
WARNING cordance with the following procedures.
Child restraint system with ISOFIX l If there is any foreign material in or
around the connectors, remove it before 2. Remove the head restraint from the location
mountings in which you wish to install a child restraint.
E00409000369 installing the child restraint system. Also,
The child restraint system is designed only for make sure the seat belt is away from, not 3. Drop the child restraint’s tether strap (B)
seats that incorporate lower anchorages. Retain the looped through or otherwise interfering down the back of the rear seatback.
child restraint system using the lower anchorages. with, the child restraint system. If foreign
matter is not removed and/or the seat
belt interferes with the child restraint sys-
tem, the child restraint system will not be
secured properly and could move for-
ward in the event of sudden braking or a
collision, seriously injuring the child and
possibly other vehicle occupants.
l When the vehicle is moving do not adjust
the seat where the child restraint system
is installed.
2-25
Seat and seat belts
4. Tip the armrest forward. Open the fastener To remove

(C) that’s located in the space where the arm- Remove the child restraint in accordance with the WARNING
rest was stowed. instructions provided by the child restraint sys-
tem’s manufacturer.
l For some types of child restraint, the lock-
ing clip (A) should be used to help avoid
personal injury during a collision or sud-
Installing a child restraint system to a den manoeuvre.
3-point type seat belt (with emergency It must be fitted and used in accordance
locking mechanism) with the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
E00408700516
structions.
The locking clip must be removed when
Single cab and Club cab the child restraint is removed.
2
5. Put your hand in the opening of the fastener, Front passenger seat
attach the tether strap’s hook (D) to the teth-
er anchorage (E), and securely tighten the teth- Double cab
er strap.
Front passenger seat
Installation:
1. Fasten the seat belt to secure the child re-
straint system.
Make sure you hear a “click” when you in-
sert the latch plate in the buckle.
2. Remove all slack by using the locking clip.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in all direc-
6. Push and pull the child restraint system in all tions to be sure it is secure.
directions to be sure it is firmly secured.
2-26
Seat and seat belts
Seat belt inspection Supplemental restraint system WARNING

E00406300475
l Check the belts for cuts, worn or frayed web- (SRS) - airbag* • Seat belts help keep the driver and pas-
E00407201797
bing and for cracked or deformed metallic The information written in this Supplemental Re- sengers properly positioned, which re-
parts. Replace the belt assembly if defective. straint System (SRS) section contains important duces injury risk in all collisions, and
l A dirty belt should be cleaned with neutral de- points concerning the driver, front passenger, side reduces the risk of serious or fatal in-
tergent in warm water. After rinsing in water, and curtain airbags. juries when the airbags inflate.
let it dry in the shade. Do not attempt to The SRS driver and front passenger airbags are de- During sudden braking just before a
bleach or re-dye the belts because this affects collision, an unrestrained or improper-
signed to supplement the primary protection of the
their characteristics. ly restrained driver or passengers can
driver and front passenger side seat belt systems by
providing those occupants with protection against move forward into direct contact with
WARNING head and chest injuries in certain moderate-to-se-

vere frontal collisions.
or within close proximity to the airbag
which may then deploy during the col- 2
lision.
l We recommend you have all seat belt as- The initial stage of airbag inflation is
semblies including retractors and attach- The SRS side airbag is designed to supplement the
ing hardware inspected after any colli- properly worn seat belts and provide the driver and the most forceful which could cause se-
sion. We recommend that seat belt assem- front passenger with protection against chest injury rious or fatal injuries if the occupant
blies in use during a collision be replaced in certain moderate-to-severe side impact collisions. contacts it at this stage.
unless the collision was minor and the • Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in
belts show no damage and continue to op- The SRS curtain airbags are designed to supple- roll-overs, rear impact collisions, and
erate properly. ment the properly worn seat belts and provide the in lower-speed frontal collisions, be-
driver and passengers with protection against head cause driver’s and passenger’s air-
l Do not attempt to repair or replace any
bags are not designed to inflate in
part of the seat belt assemblies; we recom- injuries in certain moderate-to-severe side impact
mend you to have this work done by a collisions. those situations.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized • Seat belts reduce the risk of being
Service Point. Incorrect repair or replace- The SRS is NOT a substitute for the seat belts; for thrown from your vehicle in a colli-
ment could reduce the effectiveness of the maximum protection in all types of crashes and ac- sion or roll-over.
belts and could result in serious injury in cidents, seat belts should ALWAYS be worn by ev- l IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP-
the event of a collision. eryone who drives or rides in this vehicle. ERLY SEATED.
A driver or front passenger too close to
l Once the pretensioner has activated, it
the steering wheel or instrument panel
cannot be re-used.
It must be replaced together with the re- WARNING during airbag deployment can be killed
or seriously injured.
tractor.
l IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO AL- Airbags inflate very fast, and with great
WAYS PROPERLY WEAR YOUR force.
SEAT BELT, EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG: If the driver and front passenger are not
properly seated and restrained, the air-
2-27
Seat and seat belts
WARNING WARNING Front passenger’s airbag ON

bags may not protect you properly, and l Infants and small children should never
could cause serious or fatal injuries when be unrestrained, stand up against the in-
it inflates. strument panel or be held in your arms
• Before driving, adjust the driver’s or on your lap. They could be seriously in-
seat as far back as possible while still jured or killed in a collision, including
maintaining complete control of the ve- when the airbag inflates. They should be
hicle. properly seated in an appropriate child re-
• Before driving, adjust the front passen- straint system. See the “Child restraint”
ger seat as far back as possible. section of this owner’s manual.
2 • Make sure all vehicle occupants are al-
ways properly restrained using the
available seat belts.
NOTE
• With seat belts properly fastened, the l If you have a rearward facing child restraint
driver and passengers should sit well system that cannot be fitted to any seat other
back and upright without leaning than the front passenger seat, be sure to turn
against the window or door. OFF the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
switch before using it. (Refer to “To turn an
l Do not sit on the edge of the seat, or lean
airbag off” on page 2-30.)
head or chest close to the steering wheel
or instrument panel.
Do not put feet or legs on or against the
instrument panel. Front passenger’s airbag OFF
WARNING
l A REARWARD FACING CHILD RE-
STRAINT must NOT be used in the front
passenger seat if the front passenger’s air-
bag has not been deactivated. The force
of an inflating airbag could kill or cause
serious injuries to the child.
2-28
Seat and seat belts
Caution for installing the child re- How the Supplemental Restraint Sys-
WARNING straint on vehicles with a front passen- tem works
lA FORWARD FACING CHILD RE- ger airbag E00407301352
The SRS includes the following components:
STRAINT should not be used in the front E00408800272
passenger seat whenever possible; if used The label shown here is attached on vehicles with a
in the front passenger seat, adjust the front passenger airbag.
seat to the most rearward position. Fail-
ure to do so could kill or cause serious in-
juries to the child.
1- Airbag module (Driver)

2- Front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp
3- Airbag module (Passenger)
4- Front impact sensors
5- Airbag control unit
6- Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch
WARNING
l Older children should be seated, properly
wearing the seat belt, with an appropri-
WARNING
ate booster seat if needed. l Extreme Hazard!
Do not use a rearward facing child re-
straint on a seat protected by an airbag in
front of it!
7- Side airbag modules

8- Side impact sensors
9- Curtain airbag modules
2-29
Seat and seat belts
The airbags will operate only when the ignition The front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is lo-
switch is in the “ON” or “START” position. cated in the glove box. WARNING
When the airbag control unit detect an impact of suf- • Always remove the key from the front
ficient frontal or side force, it sends an ignition sig- passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch af-
nal to the airbag modules to ignite materials in the ter operating that switch. Failure to
inflator and generate gas and inflate the airbags. do so could lead to improper position
The airbags deployment produces a sudden, loud of the front passenger’s airbag ON-
noise, and releases some smoke and powder, but OFF switch.
these conditions are not injurious, and do not indi-
cate a fire in the vehicle. People with respiratory
problems may feel some temporary irritation from To turn an airbag off
chemicals used to produce the deployment; open E00410600219
2 the windows after airbag deployment, if safe to do To turn an airbag off, follow these steps:
1. Insert the key into the key opening of the ap-
so.
The airbags deflate very rapidly after deployment, propriate front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
so there is little danger of obscured vision. switch, and turn that airbag ON-OFF switch
The time required from the sensors detecting an im- to the “OFF” position.
pact to deflation of the airbags after deployment is WARNING 2. Remove the key from the key opening of the
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.
shorter than a blink of an eye.
l To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury: 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, and
• Always remove the key from the igni- turn the ignition to the “ON” position.
tion switch before operating a front
CAUTION passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.
Failure to do so could adversely affect
l Airbags inflate at an extremely rapid
the airbag performance.
speed. In certain situations, contact with
inflating airbags can result in abrasions, • Wait at least 60 seconds to operate the
light cuts, bruises, and the like. front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
switch after turning the ignition
switch from “ON” position to
Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF “LOCK” position.
switch The SRS airbag system is designed to
E00410100184 retain enough voltage to deploy the air-
The front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch can bag.
be used to disable the front passenger’s airbag. If
you have a rearward facing child restraint system
that cannot be fitted to any seat other than the front The front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp
passenger seat, be sure to turn OFF the front passen- will stay on to show that the front passenger’s air-
ger’s airbag ON-OFF switch before using it. (Refer bag is not operational. (“Front passenger’s airbag
to “To turn an airbag off” on page 2-30.) OFF indication lamp” on page 2-31)
2-30
Seat and seat belts
That airbag will remain OFF, and will NOT de- 3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, and Front passenger’s airbag OFF indica-
ploy, until it is turned ON again. turn the ignition to the “ON” position. tion lamp
E00410200257
The front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp
WARNING is located in the instrument panel.
l To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury:
• If the indication lamp does not come
on when the front passenger’s airbag
ON-OFF switch is turned OFF, do not
fit a rearward facing child restraint
system to the front passenger seat.
• Do not turn OFF the front passen-
ger’s airbag ON-OFF switch except
2
when a rearward facing child re-
straint system is fitted to the front pas-
senger seat. The front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp
goes off to show that the front passenger’s airbag is
To turn an airbag on operational.
E00410700106 When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch
To turn an airbag on, follow these steps: That airbag will remain ON, and will be ready to is turned OFF, the indication lamp will stay on to
1. Insert the key into the key opening of the ap- deploy, until it is again turned OFF. show that the front passenger’s airbag is not opera-
propriate front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF tional.
switch, and turn that airbag ON-OFF switch When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch
to “ON” position.
2. Remove the key from the key opening of that
WARNING is turned ON, the indication lamp goes off to show
that the front passenger’s airbag is operational.
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch. l To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury:
• Turn ON the front passenger’s airbag
ON-OFF switch immediately after re-
moving a rearward facing child re- WARNING
straint system from the front passen- l If the indication lamp behaves in any of
ger seat. the following ways, there may be a fault
• If the indication lamp remains on in the airbag system.
when the front passenger’s airbag Have the vehicle inspected at a
ON-OFF switch is turned ON, do not MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
allow anyone to sit on the front passen- Service Point as soon as possible.
ger seat.
2-31
Seat and seat belts
The driver’s airbag and the front passenger’s air-

WARNING WARNING bag are designed to inflate at the same time even if
the passenger seat is not occupied.
• The indication lamp does not come on l Do not fit any accessory that makes the in-
when the front passenger’s airbag ON- dication lamp impossible to see, and do
OFF switch is turned OFF. not cover the indication lamp with a stick-
• The indication lamp stays on when the er. You would not be able to verify the sta-
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF tus of the passenger airbag system.
switch is turned ON.
Driver’s and passenger’s front airbag
system
2 E00407400330
The driver’s airbag is located under the padded cov-
er in the middle of the steering wheel. The front pas-
senger’s airbag is contained in the instrument panel
above the glove box.
Deployment of front airbags
E00407501354
The front airbags ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY
when…
Head-on collision with a solid wall at speed of Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded
approximately 25 km/h (16 mph) or higher area between the arrows
2-32
Seat and seat belts
The front airbags are designed to deploy when the The front airbags MAY NOT DEPLOY when… Because the front airbags do not protect the occu-
vehicle suffers a moderate to severe frontal impact. With certain types of frontal collisions, the vehi- pant in all types of frontal collisions, be sure to al-
A typical condition is shown in the illustration. cle’s body structure is designed to absorb the shock ways properly wear your seat belts.
to help protect the occupants from harm. (The vehi-
The front airbags will deploy if the severity of im- cle body’s front area may deform significantly as it Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow objects
pact is above the designed threshold level, compa- absorbs the impact.) Under such circumstances, the
rable to an approximately 25 km/h (16 mph) colli- front airbags may not deploy irrespective of the de-
sion when impacting straight into a solid wall that formation and damage to the vehicle body. Exam-
does not move or deform. If the severity of the im- ples of some typical conditions are shown in the il-
pact is below the above threshold level, the front air- lustration.
bags may not deploy. However, this threshold Examples of some typical conditions are shown in
speed will be considerably higher if the vehicle the illustration.
strikes an object that absorbs the impact by either 2
deforming or moving (for example, another station- Vehicle slides under the rear body of a truck
ary vehicle, pole or a guard rail).
Because frontal collisions can easily move you out

of position, it is important to always properly wear
your seat belts. Your seat belts will help keep you
in a safe distance from the steering wheel and in-
strument panel during the initial stages of airbag de-
ployment. The initial stage of airbag inflation is the Oblique frontal impacts
most forceful, and can possibly cause serious or fa-
tal injuries. Moreover, the seat belts in your vehicle
are your primary means of protection in a collision.
The SRS airbags are designed to provide additional
protection. Therefore, for your safety and the safe-
ty of all occupants, be sure to always properly wear
your seat belts.
The front airbags ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DE-

PLOY when…
The front airbags are not designed to deploy in con-
ditions where they cannot typically provide protec-
tion to the occupant. Such conditions are shown in
the illustration.
2-33
Seat and seat belts
Because the front airbags do not protect the occu- Because the front airbags may deploy in certain
pant in all types of collisions, be sure to always prop- types of unexpected impacts as shown in the illus- WARNING
erly wear your seat belts. tration that can easily move you out of position, it
is important to always properly wear your seat l Do not attach anything to the steering
wheel padded cover, such as trim materi-
belts. Your seat belts will help keep you a safe dis- al, badges, etc. It might strike and injure
Rear end collisions
tance from the steering wheel and instrument panel an occupant if the airbag inflates.
during the initial stages of airbag deployment. The
initial stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful l Do not set anything on, or attach any-
thing to, the instrument panel above the
and can possibly cause serious or fatal injuries if glove box. It might strike and injure an oc-
you contact it at this stage. cupant if the airbag inflates.
2 Side collisions
Collision with an elevated median/island or kerb
Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole

Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
WARNING
l Do not attach accessories to, or put them
Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the ground in front of, the windscreen. These objects
could restrict the airbag inflation, or
strike and injure an occupant if the air-
The front airbags MAY DEPLOY when… bags inflate.
The front airbags may deploy if the bottom of the l Do not put packages, pets or other ob-
vehicle suffers a moderate-to-severe impact (under- jects between the airbags and the driver
carriage damage). or front passenger. It could affect airbag
Examples of some typical conditions are shown in performance, or could cause injury when
the illustration. the airbag inflates.
2-34
Seat and seat belts
The label shown here is attached to the seatbacks Deployment of side airbags and cur-
WARNING with a side airbag. tain airbags
l Right after the airbag inflation, several E00407701011
airbag system components will be hot. Do

not touch them; you could be burned. The side airbags and curtain airbags ARE DE-
l The airbag system is designed to work on- SIGNED TO DEPLOY when…
ly once. Once the airbags have deployed, The side airbags and curtain airbags are designed
they will not work again. They must to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate-to-
promptly be replaced, and we recom- severe side impact to the middle of the passenger
mend you to have the entire airbag sys- compartment.
tem inspected by a MITSUBISHI The typical condition is shown in the illustration.
2
Side airbag system
E00407600374
The side airbags (A) are contained in the driver and Curtain airbag system
front passenger seatbacks. E00409100474
The side airbag is designed to inflate only on the The curtain airbags are contained in the front pil-
side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no lars and roof side rail. The curtain airbag is de-
passenger in the front seat. signed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle that
is impacted, even with no passenger in the front
seat or rear seat.
The seat belts in your vehicle are your primary

means of protection in a collision. The SRS side air-
bags and curtain airbags are designed to provide ad-
ditional protection. Therefore, for your safety and
the safety of all occupants, be sure to always prop-
erly wear your seat belts.
2-35
Seat and seat belts
The side airbags and curtain airbags MAY NOT Because the side airbags and curtain airbags do not Oblique side impacts
DEPLOY when… protect the occupant in all types of side collisions,
With certain types of side collisions, the vehicle’s be sure to always properly wear your seat belts.
body structure is designed to absorb the shock to
help protect the occupants from harm. (The vehicle Side impacts in an area away from the passenger
body’s side area may deform significantly as it ab- compartment
sorbs the impact.) Under such circumstances, the
side airbags and curtain airbags may not deploy ir-
respective of the deformation and damage to the ve-
hicle body.
Examples of some typical conditions are shown in Vehicle rolls onto its side
2 the illustration. or roof
Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle collides with the

side of vehicle
Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object
2-36
Seat and seat belts
The side airbags and curtain airbags ARE NOT

DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when… WARNING
The side airbags and curtain airbags are not de- l The side airbags and curtain airbags in-
signed to deploy in conditions where they cannot flate with great force. The driver and
usually provide protection to the occupant. Typical front passenger should not put their arms
conditions are shown in the illustration. out the window, and should not lean
against the door, in order to reduce the
Head-on collisions risk of serious or possible fatal injury
from the deploying side airbag and cur-
tain airbag.
2
WARNING
l Do not allow any rear seat occupant to
hold onto the seatback of either front
seat, in order to reduce risk of injury
Rear end collisions from the deploying side airbag. Special
care should be taken with children.
l Do not place any objects near or in front
of the seatback of either front seat. They
could interfere with proper side airbag in-
flation, and also could cause injury if
thrown free by side airbag deployment.
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags do not WARNING l Do not place stickers, labels or additional
trim on the seatback of either front seat.
protect the occupant in all types of collisions, be
sure to always properly wear your seat belts. l Do not allow a child to kneel on the pas- They could interfere with proper side air-
senger seat facing the passenger’s side bag inflation.
door, since the side airbags and curtain l Do not install seat covers on seats with
WARNING airbags inflate with great force.
Otherwise, the child may be killed or seri-
side airbags. Do not re-cover seats that
have side airbags. This could interfere
l The side airbags and curtain airbags are ously injured. with proper side airbag inflation.
designed to supplement the driver and pas-
senger seat belts in certain side impacts.
Seat belts should always be worn proper-
ly, and the driver and passenger should
sit well back and upright without leaning
against the window or door.
2-37
Seat and seat belts
SRS warning lamp

WARNING WARNING E00407801201
There is a Supplemental Restraint System (“SRS”)
l Do not attach a microphone (A) or any l Do not put a hanger or any heavy or poin-
warning lamp on the instrument panel. The system
other device or object around the part ted object on the coat hook.
checks itself and the lamp tells you if there is a prob-
where the curtain airbags (B) activate If the curtain airbag was activated, any
lem. When the ignition switch is turned to the
such as on the windscreen, side door such item could be propelled away with
“ON” or “START” position, the warning lamp
glass, front and rear pillars and roof side great force and could prevent the curtain
should illuminate for several seconds and then
or assist grips. When the curtain airbags airbag from inflating correctly. Hang
should go out. This means the system is ready. If
inflate, the microphone or other device or clothes directly on the coat hook (without
an SRS airbag or pretensioner seat belt is not oper-
object will be hurled with great force or using a hanger).
ating properly, the warning lamp comes on and
the curtain airbags may not activate cor- Make sure there are no heavy or sharp ob-
stays on.
2 rectly, resulting in death or serious injury. jects in the pockets of clothes that you
hang on the coat hook.
The SRS warning lamp is shared by the SRS airbag
and the seat belt pretensioner system.
l Do not allow a child to lean against or
close to the front door even if the child is
seated in a child restraint system.
The child’s head should also not be
leaned against or be close to the area of
the seat where the side airbag and cur-
tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if
the side airbag and curtain airbag inflate.
Failure to follow all of these instructions
could lead to serious or fatal injury to the
child.
l We recommend work around and on the
side airbags and curtain airbags system
to be done by MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point. Improper
work could result in inadvertent deploy-
ment of a side airbags and curtain air-
WARNING
bags, or could render a side airbags and l If any of the following conditions occur,
curtain airbags inoperative; either situa- the SRS and/or seat belt pretensioners
tion could result in serious injury. are not working properly, and we recom-
mend you to have it inspected by a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point immediately.
2-38
Seat and seat belts
WARNING WARNING
• The SRS warning lamp does not illu- l On vehicles equipped with side airbags,
minate when you start the vehicle. do not modify your front seats, centre pil-
• The SRS warning lamp does not go lar and centre console.
out after several seconds. It can adversely affect SRS performance
• The SRS warning lamp illuminates and lead to possible injury.
while driving. Also, if you have found any tear or open
seam in the seat fabric at the portion near
the side airbag, we recommend you to
SRS servicing have the seat inspected.
2
E00407901244
l On vehicles with the curtain airbags, if
you have found any scratch, crack or dam-
age to the portion of the front and rear pil-
WARNING lars and roof side rail, we recommend
l We recommend any maintenance per- you to have the SRS inspected by a
formed on or near the components of the MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
SRS to be performed by a MITSUBISHI Service Point.
Improper work on the SRS components
or wiring could result in inadvertent de- NOTE
ployment of the airbags, or could render l When you transfer ownership of the vehicle
the SRS inoperative; either situation to some other person, we urge you to alert
could result in serious injury. the new owner that it is equipped with the
SRS and refer the new owner to the applica-
l Do not modify your steering wheel, seat
ble section in this owner’s manual.
belt retractor or any other SRS compo-
nents. For example, replacement of the l If you junk or scrap the vehicle, we urge you
steering wheel, or modifications to the to first take the vehicle to a MITSUBISHI
front bumper or body structure can ad- MOTORS Authorized Service Point so that
versely affect SRS performance and lead the SRS can be rendered safe.
to possible injury.
l If your vehicle has sustained any damage,
we recommend you to have the SRS in-
spected to ensure it is in proper working
order.
2-39
Instruments and controls
Instruments...................................................................................3-02
Indication and warning lamps.......................................................3-06
Indication lamps...........................................................................3-07
Warning lamps..............................................................................3-08
Centre information display*.........................................................3-10
Combination headlamps and dipper switch..................................3-30
Headlamp levelling switch*.........................................................3-32
Turn-signals lever.........................................................................3-33
Hazard warning flasher switch.....................................................3-34
Front fog lamp switch*.................................................................3-34
Rear fog lamp switch....................................................................3-35 3
Wiper and washer switch..............................................................3-36
Rear window demister switch.......................................................3-40
Horn switch...................................................................................3-40
Instruments
E00500100876
Type A Type B
1- Tachometer 4- Odometer/Tripmeter
2- Speedometer 5- Tripmeter reset button/Daytime dipper button*
3- Fuel gauge 6- Water temperature gauge
3-02
Speedometer Tachometer Odometer/Tripmeter

E00500200880 E00500300780 E00500601113
The tachometer indicates the engine speed (r/min). When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
Indication for km/h The tachometer can help you obtain more economi- odometer and tripmeter indications are given.
The speedometer indicates the vehicle’s speed in cal driving and also warns you of excessive engine
kilometers per hour (km/h). speeds.
Type 1 Type 2
3
A- Odometer
B- Tripmeter
C- Reset button
Indication for km/h and mph
The speedometer indicates the vehicle’s speed in
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour
CAUTION Odometer
The odometer indicates the total distance the vehi-
(km/h). l When driving, watch the tachometer to cle has travelled.
make sure that the engine speed indica-
tion does not rise into the red zone (exces- Tripmeter
sive engine rpm). The tripmeter indicates the distance travelled dur-
ing a particular trip or period.
There are two tripmeter displays: TRIP and
.
TRIP can be used to measure the distance trav-
elled since the current trip began. At the same time,
TRIP can be used to measure the distance from
an intermediate location.
3-03
Every time the reset button (C) is pressed lightly NOTE Fuel lid mark
(less than 1 second), the tripmeter display changes l Display TRIP and each have a maxi- The fuel lid mark (A) indicates that the fuel tank fill-
(between TRIP and ). mum distance of 999.9 km (999.9 miles). er door is located on the left side of the vehicle (Re-
l When disconnecting the battery terminal for fer to “Filling the fuel tank” on page 02).
Type 1 a long time, the memory of tripmeter display Low fuel warning lamp
TRIP and are cleared, and the dis- E00508100739
play returns to “0”. The warning lamp (A) comes on when the fuel lev-
el is getting low (approx. 11 litres) with the igni-
Fuel gauge tion switch in the “ON” position. Refuel as soon as
E00500700902 possible.
The fuel gauge indicates the fuel level in the fuel
tank when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
3
Type 2
NOTE
F- Full
E- Empty
l On inclines or curves, due to the movement
of fuel in the tank, the low fuel warning lamp
may indicate incorrectly.
NOTE
To reset the tripmeter
To return the display to “0”, press the reset button l When the engine on diesel-powered vehicles
fails to operate due to running out of fuel, it
(C) for more than 1 second. Only the currently dis-
may sometimes be difficult to start after refu-
played value will be reset. If TRIP is dis- eling. This is due to air entering the fuel sys-
played, for example, only TRIP will be reset. tem. Therefore, air must be bled from the sys-
tem. (Refer to “Bleeding the fuel system” on
page 6-05.)
3-04
Water temperature gauge Turn the dial to adjust the illumination (meter, mul-
E00500800479 ti centre display, audio system’s control panel, heat-
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine er control panel, etc.) to the desired brightness.
coolant temperature when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position.
1- To reduce brightness 3
2- To increase brightness
CAUTION
l If the indication needle enters the H zone
while the engine is running, it indicates
that the engine is possibly overheating. Im-
mediately park your vehicle in a safe
place and make the necessary correc-
tions. (Refer to “Engine overheating” on
page 6-04.)
While driving, care should always be tak-
en to maintain the normal operating tem-
perature.
Daytime dipper button (meter illumi-

nation control)*
E00508800273
The rheostat can be adjusted while the headlamps
or tail lamps turn on.
3-05
Indication and warning lamps

E00501502002
Type 1 Type 2
1. CRUISE indication lamp* ® p. 4-49 13. Fuel filter indication lamp ® p. 3-07
2. Turn-signal indication lamps/Hazard warning indication lamps ® p. 3-07 14. Charge warning lamp ® p. 3-09
3. High-beam indication lamp ® p. 3-07 15. A/T (automatic transmission) fluid temperature warning lamp (vehicles
4. Front fog lamp indication lamp* ® p. 3-07 with A/T) ® p. 4-18
5. Rear fog lamp indication lamp ® p. 3-07 16. Overdrive off indication lamp (vehicles with 4A/T) ® p. 4-18
6. Seat belt reminder/warning lamp ® p. 2-10 17. Selector lever position indicator (vehicles with A/T) ® p. 4-16, 4-23
7. Low fuel warning lamp ® p. 3-04 18. Brake warning lamp ® p. 3-08
8. 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp* ® p. 4-27, 4-32 19. Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC) OFF indication
9. Rear differential lock indication lamp* ® p. 4-34 lamp* ® p. 4-47
10. Check engine warning lamp ® p. 3-08 20. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning lamp* ® p. 4-44
11. Diesel preheat indication lamp ® p. 3-07 21. Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC) indication lamp* ® p. 4-47
12. Oil pressure warning lamp ® p. 3-09 22. Door ajar warning lamp ® p. 3-09
23. Supplement Restraint System (SRS) warning lamp ® p. 2-38
3-06
Indication lamps Diesel preheat indication lamp

E00502300250
l When the engine is warm, the die-
sel preheat indication lamp does
E00501600012
This indication lamp illuminates when not come on even if the ignition
Turn-signal indication lamps/ the ignition switch is placed in the “ON” switch is placed in the “ON” posi-
Hazard warning indication position. As the glow plug becomes hot, tion.
the lamp goes out and the engine can be
lamps started.
E00501700185
These indication lamps blink on and off
when a turn-signal lamp is operating. Fuel filter indication lamp
CAUTION E00509900170
This indication lamp illuminates when
NOTE l If the diesel preheat indication the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
l If the blinking is too fast, the lamp comes on after the engine position and goes off after the engine
cause may be a blown lamp bulb is started, the engine speed may has started. If it lights up while the en-
or a faulty turn-signal connection. not rise above the idling speed gine is running, it indicates that water
because of fuel freezing. In this has accumulated inside the fuel filter; if
When the hazard warning lamp switch is case, keep the engine idling for this happens, remove the water from the
fuel filter.
3
pressed, all turn-signal lamps will flash about ten minutes, then turn
on and off continuously. off the ignition switch and im- Refer to “Removal of water from the
mediately turn it on again to fuel filter” on page 6-06.
confirm that the diesel preheat When the lamp goes out, you can re-
High-beam indication lamp indication lamp is off. sume driving. If it either does not go out
E00501800115
or comes on from time to time, we rec-
This indication lamp illuminates when
ommend you to have the vehicle inspec-
the high-beam is used. NOTE ted.
l If the engine is cold, the diesel pre-
Front fog lamp indication heat indication lamp is on for a lon-
lamp* ger time.
E00501900347 l When the engine has not been star-
This indication lamp illuminates while ted within about 5 seconds after
the front fog lamps are on. the diesel preheat indication lamp
went out, return the ignition
Rear fog lamp indication lamp switch to the “LOCK” position.
E00502000114 Then, turn the switch to the “ON”
This indication lamp illuminates while position to preheat the engine
the rear fog lamp is on. again.
3-07
Warning lamps CAUTION Check engine warning lamp

E00502600657
E00502400017
This lamp is a part of an onboard diag-
• The brake warning lamp
Brake warning lamp does not illuminate when
nostic system which monitors the emis-
E00502501637 sions, engine and automatic transmission
This lamp illuminates when the ignition the parking brake is applied
control systems.
switch is turned to the “ON” position, or does not turn off when
If a problem is detected in one of these
and goes off after a few seconds. the parking brake is re-
systems, this lamp illuminates.
Always make sure that the lamp goes off leased.
Although your vehicle will usually be
before driving. • The ABS warning lamp and
drivable and not need towing, we recom-
With the ignition switch in the “ON” po- brake warning lamp illumi-
mend you to have the system checked as
sition, the brake warning lamp illuminate at the same time.
soon as possible.
nates under the following conditions: For details, refer to “ABS
This lamp will also illuminate for a few
l When the parking brake lever has warning lamp” on page
seconds when the ignition switch is
been engaged. 4-44. (vehicles with anti-lock
turned to the “ON” position. If it does
l When the brake fluid level in the brake system)
3 reservoir falls to a low level. • The brake warning lamp re-
mains illuminated during
not go off after a few seconds, we recom-
mend you to have the vehicle checked.
l When the brake force distribution
function is not operating correctly. driving.
(vehicles with anti-lock brake sys- l The vehicle should be brought
CAUTION
tem) to a halt in the following man-
ner when brake performance l Prolonged driving with this
has deteriorated. lamp on may cause further dam-
CAUTION • Depress the brake pedal
harder than usual.
age to the emission control sys-
tem. It could also affect fuel
l In the situations listed below, Even if the brake pedal economy and drivability.
brake performance may be com- moves down to the very end
promised or the vehicle may be-
l If the lamp does not illuminate
of its possible stroke, keep it when the ignition switch is
come unstable if brakes are ap- pressed down hard. turned to the “ON” position,
plied suddenly; consequently, • Should the brakes fail, use we recommend you to have the
avoid driving at high speeds or engine braking to reduce system checked.
applying the brakes suddenly. your speed and carefully
Furthermore, immediately the pull the parking brake lever
vehicle should be brought to a to park your vehicle.
stop in a safe location and to Depress the brake pedal to
have it checked. operate the stop lamp to
alert the vehicles behind you.
3-08
Charge warning lamp

CAUTION E00502700821 CAUTION
This lamp illuminates when the ignition
l If the lamp illuminates while
switch is turned to the “ON” position, l If this lamp illuminates when
the engine is running, avoid the engine oil level is not low,
and goes off after the engine has started.
driving at high speeds and we have it inspected.
recommend you to have the sys- l This warning lamp does not in-
tem checked. dicate the amount of oil in the
During vehicle operation with CAUTION crankcase. This must be deter-
the lamp illuminated, the vehi- l If the lamp comes on while the mined by checking the oil level
cle may not accelerate when engine is running, the probable on the dipstick, while the en-
you depress the accelerator ped- cause is as shown below. gine is switched off.
al. Park the vehicle immediately at l If you continue driving with
When the vehicle is stationary a safe place and we recommend low engine oil level or with this
with the lamp illuminated, you you to have it checked. warning lamp illuminated, en-
must depress the brake pedal • Broken drive belt or abnor- gine seizure may occur.
more firmly than usual since
the engine idling speed is high-
mality in the charging sys- 3
tem. A broken drive belt cau-
er than usual and the vehicle ses poor braking efficiency. NOTE
with an A/T has a stronger ten- Depress the brake pedal l The oil pressure warning lamp
dency to creep forward. harder than usual to park should not be treated as an indica-
the vehicle in a safe place. tion of the engine’s oil level. The
oil level must be checked using
NOTE the dipstick.
l The engine electronic control mod-
ule accommodating the onboard di- Oil pressure warning lamp
agnostic system has various fault E00502800620
data (especially about the exhaust This lamp illuminates when the ignition Door ajar warning lamp
E00503300475
emission) stored. switch is turned to the “ON” position, This lamp illuminates when a door is ei-
This data will be erased if a bat- and goes off after the engine has started. ther open or not completely closed.
tery cable is disconnected which If it illuminates while the engine is run- If the vehicle speed reaches approximate-
will make a rapid diagnosis diffi- ning, the oil pressure is too low. ly 8 km/h (5 mph) with a door open or
cult. Do not disconnect a battery If the warning lamp illuminates while incompletely closed, the warning lamp
cable when the check engine warn- the engine is running, turn the engine off flashes 16 times and a buzzer simultane-
ing lamp is ON. and have it inspected. ously sounds 16 times as a warning.
3-09
CAUTION Centre information display* When the ignition switch is turned to “ACC” posi-
tion, the screen switches on automatically.
E00517800181
l Before moving your vehicle,

check that the warning lamp is NOTE
OFF. WARNING l Placing a cellular phone in the monitor’s
small storage compartment may weaken the
l When operating the system for a pro-
phone’s reception. This does not indicate a
NOTE longed period, make sure the vehicle is
parked in a well ventilated area to avoid fault with the system.
l It is possible to change the buzzer the accumulation of toxic fumes inside l Use of wireless devices such as transceivers
setting for either of the following or a cellular phone near the monitor may
and outside of the passenger compartment.
types of operation. For further in- make the following condition on the display.
formation, we recommend you to This does not indicate a fault with the system.
consult a MITSUBISHI • The screen goes dark temporarily.
MOTORS Authorized Service CAUTION • The compass may not show the correct di-
Point. rection.
l The driver should not operate the display
3 • No buzzer operation (buzzer
disabled)
while the vehicle is in motion. l Depending on the angle of view, you may
see reddish horizontal lines on the monitor.
• Continuous buzzer operation l When operating the system, stop the vehi-
The lines are a characteristic of the vacuum
cle in a safe area.
fluorescent display (VFD) used in the moni-
tor. They do not indicate a fault.
3-10
3
1- Clock ® p. 3-19
Indicates the time.
2- Electronic compass
This display shows the direction of the vehicle.
3- Frozen road warning ® p. 3-16
Gives an indication when the outside temperature is 3 °C or lower.
4- Outside temperature ® p. 3-16
5- Centre information display indications
Indicates details of each display.
6- “INFO” button
Used to select various kinds of information for display.
7- Function buttons
Press this button to select options shown in the display.
8- “ADJ” button
Used for adjusting the clock and for selecting settings displays.
9- Display for function buttons
This display shows the options available for each function button.
3-11
Adjusting the time Automatic mode (MITSUBISHI genuine audio) Changing the information display
E00518000063 The automatic adjustment mode can set the local E00517900124
time automatically by using the signal from the lo- Every time the “INFO” button is pressed lightly,
cal RDS stations. In this mode, “CT” (A) (Clock the display can be changed to the following:
Time: sent with the RDS signal) is shown in the au-
dio display.
NOTE
l Automatic clock adjustment does not take
place while a settings display is shown.
Manual mode
The manual mode is also available in case the auto-
matic mode shows the incorrect time when the ad-
jacent local RDS stations are located in a different
3 Following modes are available for clock adjustment: time zone. Refer to “Radio data system (RDS)” on
page 5-18.
l For vehicles with MITSUBISHI genuine au- It is possible to manually adjust the time.
dio:
“Automatic mode” and “Manual mode” Refer to “Changing the clock settings” on page
3-19.
l Except for vehicles with MITSUBISHI genu-
ine audio:
“Manual mode” only
3-12
1- Audio information ® p. 5-13

2- Average fuel consumption ® p. 3-14
3- Driving range ® p. 3-14
4- Average speed ® p. 3-15
5- Outside temperature ® p. 3-16
6- Altimeter ® p. 3-16
7- Barometer ® p. 3-17
8- Calendar ® p. 3-18
9- Clock-only ® p. 3-18
10- Blank ® p. 3-18
3-13
Average fuel consumption l When the average fuel consumption cannot l When you turn the ignition switch to the
E00518200166 be calculated, “--.-” will be shown. “ON” position about 4 hours (or more) after
The average fuel consumption during the period
since the last reset is shown in (A) and the momen-
l The average and momentary fuel consump- turning it from the “ON” position to the
tion change depending on the driving condi- “ACC” or “LOCK” position in the auto reset
tary fuel consumption in (C). The average value of tion (road condition, driving behavior, etc.). mode, the average fuel consumption indica-
the fuel consumption is graphed every 5 minutes The indications may differ from the actual tion will automatically be reset.
and the data for up to 4 hours are shown in (B). fuel consumption. Therefore, it is recommen-
When you press the “MANUAL” function button ded to use the indications as reference.
in the auto reset mode, the mode will be changed to Driving range
the manual reset mode. When you press the “AU-
l The unit indication can be changed to your de- E00518300095
sired setting {km/L, L/100 km, mpg (UK This value (A) shows the distance (in km or miles)
TO” function button in the manual reset mode, the GALLON), or mpg (US GALLON)}. that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the fuel
mode will be changed to the auto reset mode. Refer to “User customization” on page 3-24. tank. The driving range is graphed every 5 minutes
and the data for up to 4 hours are shown in (B).
Resetting the average fuel consumption
Auto reset mode
Press the “RESET” function button to reset the aver-
age fuel consumption indication.
3
Manual reset mode
NOTE
l When the driving range is 50 km (30 miles)
or less, the display shows “----”.
NOTE When it is 3,000 km (2,000 miles) or more,
NOTE l The average fuel consumption can be reset “3,000 km” or “2,000 miles” will be shown.
separately for the auto reset mode and for the
l When you turn the ignition switch to the
manual reset mode.
l When the driving range cannot be measured,
“ON” position after turning it from the “ON” the display shows “----”.
position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position
in the manual reset mode, the auto reset
mode will automatically be selected.
3-14
l The driving range is shown based on the ac- NOTE NOTE

cumulated fuel consumption data, however, l Pressing the “RESET” function button will l When you turn the ignition switch to the
may be changed depending on the driving con- not reset the indication (C). “ON” position after turning it from the “ON”
dition (road condition, driving behavior, l It is possible to set the display unit to km or position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position
etc.). If the battery terminals are disconnec- miles. in the manual reset mode, the auto reset
ted, the accumulated fuel consumption data Refer to “User customization” on page 3-24. mode will automatically be selected.
will be erased. It is recommended to use the l When the average speed cannot be calcula-
indication as reference. ted, “---” will be shown.
Average speed
l When the vehicle is fueled, the driving range E00518400126 l The average and momentary speed change de-
will be updated. However, if the amount of The average speed during the period since the last pending on the driving condition (road condi-
fueling is small, the indication may not be cor- reset is shown in (A) and the momentary speed in tion, driving behavior, etc.). The indications
rect. Therefore, fill up the tank as much as (C). The average value of the vehicle speed is graph- may differ from the actual speed. Therefore,
possible in case of fueling. ed every 5 minutes and the data for up to 4 hours it is recommended to use the indications as
l When the vehicle is stopped on a steep slope, are shown in (B). reference.
the value of the driving range may increase. When you press the “MANUAL” function button l The unit indication can be changed to your de-
This is caused by the fuel movement inside
the tank on the slope and is not deemed as a
in the auto reset mode, the mode will be changed to
the manual reset mode. When you press the “AU-
sired setting (km/h or mph).
Refer to “User customization” on page 3-24.
3
failure. TO” function button in the manual reset mode, the
mode will be changed to the auto reset mode. Resetting the average speed
Resetting the driving range Press the “RESET” function button to reset the aver-
Press the “RESET” function button to reset the driv- age vehicle speed.
ing range plotted in graph. Auto reset mode
Manual reset mode
3-15
NOTE Resetting the outside temperatur When the outside air temperature drops below
l The average speed can be reset separately for Press the “RESET” function button to reset the about 3 °C (37 °F), the alarm sounds and the out-
the auto reset mode and for the manual reset graph of the outside temperature. side air temperature warning symbol (A) flashes
mode. for about 10 seconds.
l When you turn the ignition switch to the
“ON” position about 4 hours (or more) after
turning it from the “ON” position to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position in the auto reset
mode, the average speed indication will auto-
matically be reset.
Outside temperature
E00518500097
The outside temperature is graphed every 5 mi-
nutes and the data for up to 4 hours are shown in
3 (A). The current outside temperature is shown in (B).
NOTE
l Depending on factors such as the driving con- CAUTION
ditions, the displayed temperature may vary
from the actual outside temperature. l There is a danger the road might be icy,
l It is possible to set the display unit to °C or °F. even when this symbol is not flashing, so
Refer to “User customization” on page 3-24. please take care when driving.
Frozen road warning
This shows the temperature outside the vehicle. Altimeter
E00518600069
The current elevation in units of 100 m (400 ft) is
shown in (A). The elevation is graphed every
5 minutes and the data for up to 4 hours are shown
in (B).
3-16
To adjust the elevation NOTE Barometer

It is possible to adjust the currently indicated eleva- l The elevation is determined from changes in
E00518700044
tion using the following function buttons: This display shows the atmospheric pressure at the
atmospheric pressure. Depending on weather
present location in (A). The atmospheric pressure
conditions, the indicated elevation may differ
values are graphed every 5 minutes and the data for
from the actual elevation. Variations in atmos-
up to 4 hours are shown in (B).
pheric pressure can cause different elevations
to be shown even in the same location. This
behavior does not indicate a fault. Use the in-
dication as a guide only.
Resetting the elevation
Press the “RESET” function button to reset the ele-
vation plotted in graph.
3
“+”- Adjustment of elevation
The elevation increases by 100 m
(400 ft) every time you lightly push Resetting the atmospheric pressure
the “+” button. Press the “RESET” function button to reset the at-
If you continue pressing the button mospheric pressure plotted in graph.
for about 2 seconds or more, the ele-
vation indication is fast-forwarded.
Then the setting is changed to the el-
evation selected.
“-”- Adjustment of elevation NOTE
The elevation decreases by 100 m
(400 ft) every time you lightly push l Pressing the “RESET” function button will
not reset the indication (C).
the “-” button.
If you continue pressing the button l It is possible to set the display unit to m or ft.
for about 2 seconds or more, the ele-
vation indication is fast-forwarded.
Then the setting is changed to the el-
evation selected.
3-17
NOTE Refer to “User customization” on page 3-24. Selecting settings displays

l Pressing the “RESET” function button will E00519100090
Every time the “ADJ” button is pressed lightly, the
not reset the indication (C).
display can be changed to the following:
l It is possible to set the display unit to hPa,
mb, kPa, or inHg.
CAUTION
Calendar l The driver should not operate the display
E00518800032
while the vehicle is in motion.
The date is shown. The calendar pattern can be
changed to your desired setting. l When operating the system, stop the vehi-
cle in a safe area.
Refer to “Changing the calendar setting” on page
3-23.
3 Blank
E00519000015
The whole display can be turned into blank. In this
case, buttons remain illuminated.
1- Changing the clock settings ® p. 3-19

2- Adjusting the display brightness ® p. 3-20
3- Correcting the compass ® p. 3-21
Clock-only
E00518900033 4- Changing the calendar setting ® p. 3-23
Only the clock is shown. The time notation can be 5- User customization ® p. 3-24
changed to your desired setting. (12 hour/24 hour) 6- Adjusting the barometer ® p. 3-28
NOTE
l If you operate the audio system, the audio dis-
play pops up.
3-18
Changing the clock settings “H”- Adjust “hour”.

E00519200121
The indication increases by one hour, ev-
1. Press the “ADJ” button to select the clock set-
ery time you lightly press the “H” func-
ting display.
tion button. If you continue pressing the
button for about 2 seconds or more, the
indication is fast-forwarded, and then the
setting is changed to the hour selected.
“M”- Adjust “minute”.
The indication increases by one minute,
every time you lightly press the “M” func-
tion button. If you continue pressing the
button for about 2 seconds or more, the
indication is fast-forwarded, and then the
setting is changed to the minute selected.
“SET”- To reset the minutes to zero.
The time is adjusted as described below
3
by pressing the function button “SET”.
2. It is possible to adjust the clock using the func-
tion buttons. l 10:30-11:29 · · · · change to 11:00
l 11:30-12:29 · · · · change to 12:00
In this occasion, the display flashes twice
and then the setting is changed.
3. After making the adjustment, press the “IN-

FO” button to select the information display.
3-19
Adjusting the display brightness 2. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se- “+”- To make the display brighter
E00519300034 lect the setting you wish to adjust (daytime The display becomes brighter by one
The display brightness can be adjusted at 13 levels or nighttime). Then press the “SELECT” func- step, every time you lightly press the
for both daytime and nighttime. tion button. “+” function button. If you continue press-
l BRIGHTNESS FOR DAY TIME ing the button for about 2 seconds or
The display brightness is adjusted when the
more, the indication is fast-forwarded.
light switch is in the “OFF” position.
l BRIGHTNESS FOR NIGHT TIME “-”- To make the display darker
The display brightness is adjusted when the The display becomes darker by one step,
light switch is in the “ ” or “ ” position. every time you lightly press the
“-” function button. If you continue press-
1. Press the “ADJ” button to show the bright- ing the button for about 2 seconds or
ness adjusting display. more, the indication is fast-forwarded.
“SET”- To set the brightness
Press function button “SET” to set the
3 new brightness. The display will flash
twice.
3. Use the function buttons to adjust the bright-
ness. NOTE
l If you next wish to adjust the other adjust-
ment setting (daytime or nighttime), press
the “ADJ” button or “BACK” function button.
4. After adjustment, press the “INFO” button to

select the information display.
3-20
NOTE l Do not install ski racks, antennas, etc. which 1. Press the function button for “SELECT”.
l As the display brightness can be adjusted in are attached to the vehicle by means of a mag-
the center information display only, the bright- net. They affect the operation of the compass.
ness inside the meter cannot be changed.
Setting the declination
The declination is the difference between true
Correcting the compass north (the direction of the geographic north pole)
E00519400178
This compass shows the direction of the vehicle by and where a compass needle points to. Since the dec-
the 8 azimuth system. lination varies from place to place, it needs to be
set for each region. Otherwise the compass will not
show the correct direction.
Set the declination by the following steps:
2. Press the function button for “←” or “→” to

set the desired declination. 3
Pressing “←” or “→” for more than 1 sec-
ond makes the value change rapidly.
NOTE
l This system uses the earth’s magnetic field,
and so may not show the correct direction de-
pending on the traffic condition or in the fol- NOTE
lowing places where the earth’s magnetic l The default declination setting is 0 degrees.
field is disrupted. In accordance with the illustration, set the dec-
• Car parks located in buildings and tunnels lination setting to the declination contour near-
• Expressways and underground cables est to a region where you drive the vehicle.
• Area over the subway l The declination can be set at intervals of
• Transforming station 1 degrees, from 28 degrees west (W28) to
• Areas along the railroad 28 degrees east (E28).
In these cases, the correct direction will be
displayed once the vehicle returns to a place With a settings display showing, press the “ADJ”
where the earth’s magnetic field is stable. button and select “COMPASS VARIANCE”.
3-21
3. When the declination adjustment has been NOTE 3. Turn the vehicle slowly through 360 degrees
completed, press the “SET” function button. l If your vehicle has a sunroof, keep the sun- in a safe, open area with no buildings and oth-
roof closed when calibrating the compass. er vehicles.
Having the sunroof open when calibrating
the compass could render the compass un-
able to correctly show directions.
With a settings display showing, press the “ADJ”

button and select “COMPASS CALIBRATION”.
1. Press the function button for “SELECT”.
3 Setting the compass

The compass is usually calibrated automatically
when the vehicle is moving. At times when com- NOTE
plete calibration is not possible, no compass indica- l Ifyou wish to stop calibrating the compass
tions are given. Manually set the compass using the part-way through the procedure, press the “IN-
following procedure. FO” button or “ADJ” button.
2. Press the function button for “SELECT”.
3-22
NOTE Date setting

l The “Completed the calibration”. message 1. Press the “ADJ” button to select the calendar
may be displayed even if you terminate the setting display.
turn before it is complete and return to the ve-
hicle’s original direction. The compass may
not be properly calibrated in this case, so you
must turn the vehicle through at least
360 degrees.
4. The compass setting will finish automatical-

ly and the words “COMPASS CALIBRA-
TION COMPLETE” will appear on the
screen.
“→”- Select “YEAR”, “MONTH”, “DAY”
you wish to change.
“YEAR”, “MONTH”, and “DAY” are
changed over by turns every time you 3
2. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se- lightly press the “→” function button.
lect “CALENDAR ADJUST”. Then press “+”- Change “YEAR”, “MONTH”, “DAY”
the “SELECT” function button. you have selected.
The indication is changed to your de-
sired date every time you lightly press
the “+” function button.
If you continue pressing the button for
about 2 seconds or more, the indication
is forwarded.
Changing the calendar setting “SET”- Determine the date.

E00519500036 Press the “SET” function button. Then
The date and the calendar indication patterns can the display flashes twice and the setting
be changed. is changed.
NOTE
3. Use the function buttons to set the calendar. l The year changes in the following sequence:
2009 → 2010 → … 2099 → 2009.
l You can return to the previous display by
pressing the “BACK” function button.
3-23
4. After setting the date, press the “INFO” but- 2. Press function button “←” or “→” to select
ton to return to the information display. your desired indication pattern.
Type 1
NOTE
Type 2 l You can return to the previous display by
3 Changing the calendar pattern
1. Press the “ADJ” button to select the calendar
setting display. Press the “←” or “→” func- 4. After setting the calendar pattern, press the
tion button to select “CALENDAR PAT- “INFO” button to return to the information
TERN SELECT”. Then press the “SELECT” display.
function button.
Type 3
3. Press the function button “SET”. The display

will flash twice, and the indication pattern
will be updated.
User customization
E00519600154
You can set the indication of unit, language, and
the time notation.
In addition, you can return these settings to the fac-
tory default settings.
3-24
Selecting the item to set Changing display units 2. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se-
1. Press the “ADJ” button to select the user cus- It is possible to change the display units for the fuel lect “km/L”. Then press the “SET” function
tomization display. consumption, driving range, average speed, outside button. The display will flash twice, and the
temperature, elevation, and atmospheric pressure display unit will be updated to the selected
as shown below. one.
km/L → L/100 km → mpg

FUEL ECONOMY (UK GALLON) → mpg
(US GALLON)
RANGE km → miles
SPEED km/h → mph
OUTSIDE TEM-
°C → °F
PERATURE
ELEVATION m → ft
3
BAROMETER hPa → mb → kPa → inHg
2. Press the function button “←” or “→” to se-
lect the item you wish to set.
l “UNIT”: Changing the unit l Changing the display unit for fuel consump- NOTE
l “LANGUAGE”: Changing the language tion l You can return to the previous display by
l “12h ↔ 24h”: Changing the time format
1. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se-
l “DEFAULT”: Resetting to factory settings lect “FUEL ECONOMY”. Then press the 3. After setting, press the “INFO” button to re-
Push the function button “SELECT”. The set- “SELECT” function button. turn to the information display.
ting display for your selected item will appear.
3-25
Changing the language 2. After setting the language, press the “INFO” 12-hour 24-hour
It is possible to set the display language of the cen- button to return to the information display.
tre information display to English, Spanish,
French, German, Portuguese or Italian.
l To change the display language to English
1. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se-

lect “ENGLISH”. Then press the “SET” func-
tion button. The display will flash twice, and
then the setting is completed to the language
selected.
NOTE
3 Changing the time notation
It is possible set the time notation to 12-hour or
24-hour. 2. After setting the time notation, press the “IN-
1. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se- FO” button to return to the information dis-
lect “12h TIME NOTATION” or “24h TIME play.
NOTATION”. Then press the “SET” func-
tion button. The display will flash twice, and
the display time notation will be updated to
the selected one.
NOTE
Returning display items to their factory settings

You can return to the setting of each item to the fac-
tory default settings.
3-26
NOTE 2. Press the “←” function button to select 4. Once more press the “←” function button to
l The factory settings are as follows: “YES”. select “YES”.
• Fuel consumption: L/100 km (62 mph)
• Driving range: km
• Average speed: km/h
• Outside temperature: °C
• Elevation: m
• Atmospheric pressure: hPa
• Display language: English
• Time notation: 12-hour
1. Push the “SELECT” function button.
3. Press the “SELECT” function button. 5. Press the “SET” function button. 3
6. The display shown below will appear, and

the display items will return to their factory
settings.
3-27
To adjust the barometer

1. Press the “ADJ” button to select the barome-
ter adjustment display.
NOTE “+”- To adjust the barometer

l If the battery terminals are disconnected, the Each gentle press of the “+” function but-
settings for the date and time may be erased.
3 If this happens, please set the date and time
ton will increase the indicated barometer
by 2 hPa. If you continue pressing the but-
again. 2. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se- ton for about 2 seconds or longer, the in-
lect the “BAROMETER ADJUST” display. dication is fast-forwarded.
Adjusting the barometer Then press the “SELECT” function button. “-”- To adjust the barometer
E00524400033
It is possible to adjust the barometer indication and Each gentle press of the “-” function but-
return it to the factory setting. ton will decrease the indicated barometer
by 2 hPa. If you continue pressing the but-
ton for about 2 seconds or longer, the in-
NOTE dication is fast-forwarded.
l It is not necessary to adjust the barometer be- “SET”- To set the barometer
cause it has been adjusted at the factory.
However, if you wish, adjust it using an accu- Press the “SET” function button. The dis-
rate barometer. play will flash twice, and the new setting
will be established.
NOTE
3. Adjust the barometer by pressing the func-
tion buttons.
3-28
4. After setting the barometer adjust, press the 2. Press the “SET” function button. The display 3. After setting the barometer default, press the
“INFO” button to return to the information will flash twice and the barometer indication “INFO” button to return to the information
display. will return to the factory settings. display.
Resetting to the factory setting

3
1. Press the “ADJ” button to select the barome- NOTE Care of the monitor
ter adjustment display. l Although the barometer value is changed to E00519700012
the factory setting, a barometer unit you have If the monitor becomes covered in fingerprints or
Press the “←” or “→” function button to se-
selected is unchanged. otherwise dirty, clean it with a soft and dry cloth.
lect the “BAROMETER DEFAULT” dis-
play. Then press the “SELECT” function but- l You can return to the previous display by
ton. pressing the “BACK” function button. NOTE
l Don’t use a wet cloth or abrasive cleaner as
this may cause damage.
3-29
Combination headlamps and Type 1 OFF All lamps off

Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps.
dipper switch With the ignition switch in the “ON” po-
E00506001728 sition, headlamps, position, tail, licence
plate, and instrument panel lamps turn
Headlamps AUTO on and off automatically in accordance
with outside light level. All lamps turn
NOTE off automatically when the ignition
switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
l Do not leave the headlamps and other lamps
on for a long time while the engine is station- Position, tail, licence plate and instru-
ary (not running). A run-down battery could ment panel lamps on
result.
Headlamps and other lamps go on
l When it rains or when the vehicle has been
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes be-
comes foggy. This is the same phenomenon
NOTE
3 as when window glass mists up on a humid
day, and does not indicate a functional prob-
OFF All lamps off
l The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con-
lem. When the lamp is switched on, the heat Position, tail, licence plate and instrument trol can be adjusted.
will remove the fog. However, if water gath- panel lamps on For further information, we recommend you
ers inside the lamp, we recommend you to to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
Headlamps and other lamps go on ized Service Point.
have it checked.
l When the headlamps are turned off by the au-
Type 2 tomatic on/off control with the ignition
Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps. switch in the “ON” position, the front fog
lamps (if so equipped) and rear fog lamp also
go off. When the headlamps are subsequent-
ly turned back on by the automatic on/off con-
trol, the front fog lamps also come on but the
rear fog lamp stays off. If you wish to turn
the rear fog lamp back on, operate the switch
again.
l Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automat-
ic on/off control by affixing a sticker or label
to the windscreen.
3-30
l If the key is turned to the “LOCK” or Lamp monitor buzzer

“ACC” position or removed from the igni- E00506100184
tion switch and the driver’s door is opened If the driver’s door is opened when the ignition key
within 3 minutes while the lamp switch in is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or removed
the “ ” position, a buzzer will sound to from the ignition switch while the lamps are on, a
warn the driver that the lamps have not been buzzer will sound to remind the driver to turn off
turned off, and these lamps will automatical- the lamps. When the lamp auto-cutout function
ly turn off. acts, the buzzer will stop automatically. When this
function does not act, turn off the lamp switch to
stop the buzzer.
NOTE
l The lamp auto-cutout will not function when Dipper (High/Low beam change)
the lamp switch is in the “ ” position. E00506200286
l If the lamps do not turn on or off with the l When the ignition key has been turned to ei- When the lamp switch is in the “ ” position, the
switch in the “AUTO” position, manually op- ther the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or re- beam changes from high to low (or low to high)
erate the switch and we recommend you to moved from the ignition switch with the each time the lever is pulled to (1). While the high-
have your vehicle checked. lamp switch in the “ ” position, and the beam is on, the high-beam indication lamp in the in- 3
lamp switch is returned to the “OFF” posi- strument cluster will also illuminate.
[Vehicles with Daytime Running Lamp] tion within approximately 3 minutes, the auto-
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position cutout function will not be activated.
and the lamp switch is set to the “OFF” position,
the low beam of the headlamps, tail lamps, etc., When you want to keep the lamps on
will illuminate. l Turn the switch in the “OFF” position to
switch off all lamps while the ignition key is
Lamps (headlamps, fog lamp, etc.) au- in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or re-
to-cutout function move it from the ignition switch.
l If the key is turned to the “LOCK” or l Turn on the lamps with the switch in the
“ACC” position or removed from the igni- “ ” or “ ” position again, then the
tion switch and the lamps will stay on for lamps will remain on.
about 3 minutes without opening the driver’s
door while the lamp switch in the “ ” posi- NOTE
tion, the lamps automatically turn off. l It is possible to alter the auto-cutout function Headlamp flasher
such that: E00506300157
• Auto-cutout function is never activated. The high-beams flash when the lever is pulled slight-
For details, we recommend you to consult a ly (2), and will go off when it is released.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service When the high-beam is on, the high-beam indica-
Point. tion lamp in the instrument cluster will also illumi-
nate.
3-31
NOTE Headlamp levelling switch* Single cab

l The high-beams can also flash when the E00506400800
lamp switch is in the “OFF” position. The angle of the headlamp beam varies depending
l If you turn the lamps off with the headlamps on the load carried by the vehicle. Vehicle condi-
set to high-beam illumination, the headlamps The headlamp levelling switch can be used to ad- tion
are automatically returned to their low-beam just the headlamp illumination distance (when the
setting when the lamp switch is next turned lower beam is illuminated) so that the headlamps’
to the “ ” position. glare does not distract other drivers. Switch position “0” “2”
Set the switch (referring to the following table) to
the appropriate position according to the number of ●: 1 person
people and the load in the vehicle. : Full luggage loading
Switch position 0- Driver only

Switch position 2- Driver + Full luggage load-
3 ing
Club cab
Vehicle condi-
tion
“2” or “3” or
Switch position “0”
“4”
CAUTION
●: 1 person
l Always perform adjustments before driv-
ing. : Full luggage loading
Do not attempt to adjust while driving, as
it could cause an accident.
NOTE
l When adjusting the beam position, first put
the dial in the “0” position (the highest beam
position).
3-32
Switch position 0- Driver only Switch position 0- Driver only Turn-signals lever
E00506501273
Switch position 2- Driver + Full luggage load- Switch position 2- Driver + Full luggage load- The turn-signal lamps flash when the lever is oper-
ing ing ated (with the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
{Vehicles for Russia, Ka- {Vehicles for Russia, Ka- tion). At the same time, the turn-signal indication
zakhstan and Ukraine with zakhstan and Ukraine with lamps flash.
heavy duty suspension} heavy duty suspension}
Switch position 3- Driver + Full luggage load- Switch position 3- Driver + Full luggage load-
ing ing
{Vehicles for Russia, Ka- {Vehicles for Russia, Ka-
zakhstan and Ukraine with- zakhstan and Ukraine with-
out heavy duty suspension} out heavy duty suspension}
{Except for vehicles for {Except for vehicles for
Russia, Kazakhstan and Uk- Russia, Kazakhstan and Uk-
raine with heavy duty sus- raine with heavy duty sus-
pension} pension} 3
Switch position 4- Driver + Full luggage load- Switch position 4- Driver + Full luggage load-
ing ing
{Except for vehicles for {Except for vehicles for 1- Turn-signals
Russia, Kazakhstan and Uk- Russia, Kazakhstan and Uk- When making a normal turn, use position
raine without heavy duty raine without heavy duty (1). The lever will return automatically when
suspension} suspension} cornering is completed.
There are times when the lever will not re-
Double cab turn after cornering. This occurs when the
steering wheel is turned only slightly.
In such cases, return the lever by hand.
Vehicle condi- 2- Lane-change signals
tion When changing lanes, use position (2). It
will return to the neutral position when re-
leased.
“2” or “3” or
Switch position “0”
“4”
NOTE
●: 1 person l If the lamp flashes unusually quickly, the
bulb in a turn-signal lamp may have burned
: Full luggage loading out. We recommend you to have the vehicle
inspected.
3-33
l It is possible to activate the following func-

tions. For further information, we recom-
Hazard warning flasher switch Front fog lamp switch*
E00506600903 E00506800934
mend you to consult a MITSUBISHI Use the hazard warning flasher switch when the ve- The front fog lamps can be used only when the head-
MOTORS Authorized Service Point. hicle has to be parked on the road for any emergency. lamps or tail lamps are on. Turn the knob once in
• Flashing of the turn-signal lamps and the The hazard warning flashers can always be operat- the “ON” direction to turn on the front fog lamps.
indication lamp in the instrument cluster ed, regardless of the position of the ignition key. The indication lamp in the instrument cluster will
when the lever is operated with the igni- also come on. To turn the front fog lamps off, turn
tion switch in the “ACC” position Push the switch to turn on the hazard warning flash- the knob once in the “OFF” direction. While the
• Flashing of the turn-signal lamps and the ers; push the switch again to turn them off. rear fog lamp is on, turn the knob twice in the
indication lamp in the instrument cluster When this switch is operated, all turn-signal lamps “OFF” direction to turn the front fog lamps off.
three times when you move the lever to flash continuously, as do the turn-signal indication The knob will automatically return to its original po-
(2) slightly then release it lamps in the instrument cluster. sition when you release it.
• The time required to operate the lever for
the 3-flash function can be adjusted.
NOTE NOTE
l If the lamps are kept flashing for a long time, l The front fog lamps are automatically turned
the battery will be discharged, resulting in off when the headlamps or tail lamps are
hard engine starting or no start condition. turned off. To turn the front fog lamps on
l If the lamp flashes unusually quickly, the again, turn the knob in the “ON” direction af-
bulb in a turn-signal lamp may have burned ter turning on the headlamps or tail lamps.
out. l Do not use fog lamps except in conditions of
We recommend you to have the vehicle in- fog, otherwise excessive lamp glare may tem-
spected. porarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.
3-34
l In case of vehicles with Daytime Running

Lamp, the front fog lamp can be operated
Rear fog lamp switch NOTE
E00506900313 l The rear fog lamp is automatically turned off
even if the lamp switch is set to the “OFF” The rear fog lamp illuminates only when the head- when the headlamps and front fog lamps (if
position, because the low beam of the headlamps or front fog lamps (if so equipped) are on. so equipped) are turned off.
lamps, tail lamps, etc. illuminate when the ig- An indication lamp in the instrument cluster comes l To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn the
nition key is at the “ON” position. on when the rear fog lamp is turned on. knob once in the “ON” direction after turn-
ing on the headlamps. (Vehicles without
[Vehicles without front fog lamps] front fog lamps)
Turn the knob once in the “ON” direction to turn l To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn the
on the rear fog lamp. To turn the rear fog lamp off, knob twice in the “ON” direction after turn-
turn the knob once in the “OFF” direction. The ing on the headlamps. (Vehicles with front
knob will automatically return to its original posi- fog lamps)
tion when you release it. l In case of vehicles with Daytime Running
Lamp, the rear fog lamp can be operated
[Vehicles with front fog lamps] even if the lamp switch is set to the “OFF”
Turn the knob once in the “ON” direction to turn
on the front fog lamps. Turn the knob once more in
position, because the low beam of the head-
lamps, tail lamps, etc. illuminate when the ig-
3
the “ON” direction to turn on the rear fog lamp. To nition key is at the “ON” position.
turn the rear fog lamp off, turn the knob once in the
“OFF” direction. Turn the knob once more in the
“OFF” direction to turn off the front fog lamps.
The knob will automatically return to its original po-
sition when you release it.
3-35
Wiper and washer switch MIST- Misting function Misting function

E00507101191 The wipers will operate once. Move the lever in the direction of the arrow and re-
lease, to operate the wipers once.
OFF- Off Use this function when you are driving in mist or
CAUTION INT- Speed sensitive intermittent operation drizzle.
Interval between wipers varies in accord- If the lever is held in the upward position (MIST),
l If the washer is used in cold weather, the ance with vehicle speed. the wipers continue operating until the lever is re-
washer fluid sprayed against the glass leased.
may freeze, which may hinder visibility. LO- Slow
Warm the glass with the defroster or rear HI- Fast
window demister before using the washer.
To adjust intermittent intervals
With the lever in the “INT” (speed-sensitive) posi-
Windscreen wipers tion, the intermittent intervals can be adjusted by
E00516900303
turning the knob (A).
3 Except for vehicles equipped with rain sensor
The windscreen wipers can be operated with the ig-
nition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
If the blades are frozen to the windscreen, do not
operate the wipers until the ice has melted and the
blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be
damaged.
Vehicles with rain sensor
E00526400369
The windscreen wipers can be operated with the ig-
nition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
1- Fast
2- Slow
NOTE
l The speed-sensitive-operation function of the
windscreen wipers can be deactivated.
For further information, we recommend you
to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ized Service Point.
3-36
If the blades are frozen to the windscreen, do not Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the wind-
operate the wipers until the ice has melted and the screen is dirty and the weather is dry. CAUTION
blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be Wiper operation under these conditions can scratch
damaged. the windscreen and damage the wipers. l With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
tion and the lever in the “AUTO” posi-
tion, the wipers may automatically oper-
ate in the situations described below.
If your hands get trapped, you could suf-
fer injuries or the wipers could malfunc-
tion. Be sure to turn the ignition switch to
the “OFF” position or move the lever to
the “OFF” position to deactivate the rain
sensor.
• When cleaning the outside surface of
the windscreen, if you touch the rain
sensor.
• When cleaning the outside surface of
the windscreen, if you wipe with a
3
cloth the rain sensor.
MIST- Misting function • When using an automatic car wash.
The wipers will operate once. • A physical shock is applied to the wind-
OFF- Off screen.
• A physical shock is applied to the rain
AUTO- Auto-wiper control sensor.
Rain sensor
The wipers will automatically operate
depending on the degree of wetness on NOTE
the windscreen. l To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this
LO- Slow operation of the wipers does not take place
when the vehicle is stationary and the ambi-
HI- Fast ent temperature is about 0 °C or lower.
Rain sensor
l Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker
or label to the windscreen. Also, do not put
Can only be used when the ignition switch is in the any water-repellent coating on the wind-
“ON” position. screen. The rain sensor would not be able to
If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the rain detect the extent of rain, and the wipers
sensor (A) will detect the extent of rain (or snow, might stop working normally.
other moisture, dust, etc.) and the wipers will oper-
ate automatically.
l In the following cases, the rain sensor may
be malfunctioning.
3-37
Have the vehicle inspected at a To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor If the lever is held in the upward position (MIST),
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service With the lever in the “AUTO” (rain sensor) posi- the wipers continue operating until the lever is re-
Point. tion, it is possible to adjust the sensitivity of the leased.
• When the wipers operate at a constant in- rain sensor by turning the knob (A).
terval despite changes in the extent of rain.
• When the wipers do not operate even
though it is raining.
l The wipers may automatically operate when
things such as insects or foreign objects are
affixed to the windscreen on top of the rain
sensor or when the windscreen is frozen. Ob-
jects affixed to the windscreen will stop the
wipers when the wipers cannot remove them.
To make the wipers operate again, place the
lever in the “LO” or “HI” position.
3 Also, the wipers may operate automatically
due to strong direct sunlight or electromag-
netic wave. To stop the wipers, place the lev- The wipers will operate once if the lever is moved
er in the “OFF” position. "+"- Higher sensitivity to rain to the “AUTO” position and the knob (A) is turned
l Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author- in the “+” direction when the ignition switch is
ized Service Point when replacing the wind- "-"- Lower sensitivity to rain “ON” position.
screen or reinforcing the glass around the sen-
sor. NOTE
l It is possible to activate the following func-
tions. For further information, we recom-
mend you to consult a MITSUBISHI
• Automatic operation (rain droplet sensi-
tive) can be changed to intermittent oper-
ation (vehicle-speed sensitive).
• Automatic operation (rain droplet sensi-
tive) can be changed to intermittent oper-
ation (except vehicle-speed sensitive).
Misting function
Move the lever in the direction of the arrow and re- Windscreen washer
lease, to operate the wipers once. E00507200805
Use this function when you are driving in mist or The windscreen washer can be operated with the ig-
drizzle. nition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
3-38
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the wind- l It is possible to cause the wipers never to op- Precautions to observe when using wip-
screen by pulling the lever towards you. The wip- erate when washer fluid is sprayed. For fur- ers and washers
ers operate automatically several times while the ther information, we recommend you to con- E00507600014
washer fluid is being sprayed. sult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized l If the moving wipers become blocked by ice
On a vehicle equipped with a headlamp washer, the Service Point. or other deposits on the glass, the motor may
headlamp washer operates together with the wind- burn out even if the wiper switch is turned to
screen washer the first time the windscreen washer OFF. If obstruction occurs, park your vehicle
is used if the headlamps are on.
Headlamp washer switch*
E00510100273 in a safe place, turn off the ignition, and
The headlamp washer can be operated when the ig- clean the deposits from the glass so that the
nition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position and wipers operate smoothly.
the headlamps are on. l Do not use the wipers when the glass is dry.
They may scratch the glass surface and the
Push the button once and the washer fluid will be blades wear out prematurely.
sprayed on to the headlamps. l Before using the wipers in cold weather,
check that the wiper blades are not frozen on-
to the glass. The motor may burn out if the
wipers are used with the blades frozen onto
3
the glass.
l Avoid using the washer continuously for
more than 20 seconds. Do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.
Otherwise, the motor may burn out.
l Periodically check the level of washer fluid
CAUTION in the reservoir and refill if required.
During cold weather, add a recommended
l If the washer is used in cold weather, the washer solution that will not freeze in the
washer fluid sprayed against the glass
may freeze resulting in poor visibility. washer reservoir. Failure to do so could re-
Heat the glass with the defroster or demis- sult in loss of washer function and frost dam-
ter before using the washer. NOTE age to the system components.
l If the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position and the headlamps are on,
NOTE the headlamp washer operates together with
l It is possible to spray washer fluid without ac- the windscreen washer the first time the wind-
tivating the wipers. To do so, hold the lever screen washer lever is pulled.
in the pulled position and turn the ignition
switch to the “ON” or “ACC” position.
3-39
Rear window demister switch NOTE Horn switch

E00507900961 l If your vehicle is equipped with heated mir- E00508000608
The rear window demister switch can be operated rors, these operate in conjunction with the de- Press the steering wheel on or around the “ ” mark.
with the ignition switch in the “ON” position. mister. Refer to “Heated mirror” on page
Push the switch to turn on the rear window demis- 4-11.
Type 1
ter. It will be turned off automatically in about 20 l The demister switch is not to melt snow but
minutes. To turn off the demister within about 20 to clear mist. Remove snow before use of the
minutes, push the switch again. demister switch.
The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while the l To avoid unnecessary discharge of the bat-
demister is on. tery, do not use the rear window demister dur-
ing starting of the engine or when the engine
is not running. Turn the demister off immedi-
Type 1
ately after the window is clear.
l When cleaning the inside of the rear win-
dow, use a soft cloth and wipe gently along
3 the heater wires, being careful not to damage
the wires.
l Do not allow objects to touch the inside of Type 2
the rear window glass, or damaged or broken
wires may result.
Type 2
3-40
Starting and driving
Economical driving.......................................................................4-02
Driving, alcohol and drugs...........................................................4-02
Safe driving techniques................................................................4-03
Running-in recommendations.......................................................4-04
Parking brake................................................................................4-07
Parking..........................................................................................4-08
Steering wheel height adjustment.................................................4-09
Inside rear-view mirror.................................................................4-09
Outside rear-view mirrors.............................................................4-10
Ignition switch..............................................................................4-11
Steering wheel lock......................................................................4-12
Starting..........................................................................................4-13
Manual transmission.....................................................................4-14
Automatic transmission 4A/T.......................................................4-16
Automatic transmission Sports Mode 5A/T.................................4-20
4
Easy select 4WD*.........................................................................4-25
Super select 4WD*.......................................................................4-29
Rear differential lock*..................................................................4-34
4-wheel drive operation................................................................4-38
Inspection and maintenance following rough road oper-
ation..........................................................................................4-40
Cautions on handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles..........................4-40
Limited-slip differential*..............................................................4-42
Braking.........................................................................................4-42
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)*...................................................4-43
Power steering system..................................................................4-45
Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC)*.............................4-46
Cruise control*.............................................................................4-48
Cargo loads...................................................................................4-52
Trailer towing...............................................................................4-53
Economical driving Speed Driving, alcohol and drugs

E00600100620 The higher the vehicle speed, the more fuel con- E00600200012
For economical driving, there are some technical re- sumed. Avoid driving at full speed. Even a slight re- Driving after drinking alcohol is one of the most fre-
quirements that have to be met. The prerequisite lease of the accelerator pedal will save a significant quent causes of accidents.
for low fuel consumption is a properly adjusted en- amount of fuel. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired even
gine. In order to achieve longer life of the vehicle with blood alcohol levels far below the legal mini-
and the most economical operation, we recommend Tyre inflation pressure mum. If you have been drinking, don’t drive. Ride
you to have the vehicle checked at regular intervals Check the tyre inflation pressures at regular inter- with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab or
in accordance with the service standards. vals. Low tyre inflation pressure increases road re- a friend, or use public transportation.
Fuel economy and generation of exhaust gas and sistance and fuel consumption. In addition, low Drinking coffee or taking a cold shower will not
noise are highly influenced by personal driving hab- tyre pressures adversely affect tyre wear and driv- make you sober.
its as well as the particular operating conditions. ing stability. Similarly, prescription and nonprescription drugs af-
The following points should be observed in order fect your alertness, perception and reaction time.
to minimize wear of brakes, tyres and engine as Load Consult with your doctor or pharmacist before driv-
well as to reduce environmental pollution. ing while under the influence of any of these medi-
Do not drive with unnecessary articles in the cargo
cations.
area. Especially during city driving where frequent
Starting starting and stopping is necessary, the increased
Avoid rapid acceleration and sudden starts; such op- weight of the vehicle will greatly affect fuel con-
eration will result in higher fuel consumption. WARNING
4 sumption.
l NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.
Shifting Cold engine starting Your perceptions are less accurate, your
Shift only at an appropriate speed and engine Starting of a cold engine consumes more fuel. reflexes are slower and your judgment is
speed. Always use the highest gear possible. Unnecessary fuel consumption is also caused by impaired.
The transfer shift lever should be set to “2H” when keeping a hot engine running. After the engine is
driving 4WD vehicles on normal roads and express started, commence driving as soon as possible.
ways to obtain best possible fuel economy.
Air conditioning*
City traffic The use of the air conditioning will increase the
Frequent starting and stopping increases the aver- fuel consumption.
age fuel consumption. Use roads with smooth traf-
fic flow whenever possible. When driving on con-
gested roads, avoid use of a low gear at high en-
gine speeds.
Idling
The vehicle consumes fuel even during idling.
Avoid extended idling whenever possible.
4-02
Safe driving techniques Carrying children in the vehicle

E00600300491 l Never leave your vehicle unattended with the
Driving safety and protection against injury cannot key in the ignition and children inside the ve-
be fully ensured. However, we recommend that hicle. Children may play with the driving con-
you pay extra attention to the following: trols and this could lead to an accident.
l Make sure that infants and small children are
Seat belts properly restrained in accordance with the
Before starting the vehicle, make sure that you and laws and regulations, and for maximum pro-
your passengers have fastened your seat belts. tection in case of an accident.
l Prevent children from playing in the cargo
Floor mats area. It is quite dangerous to allow them to
play there while the vehicle is moving.
WARNING
l Keep floor mats clear of the pedals by cor-
rectly laying floor mats that are suitable
for the vehicle.
To prevent the floor mats from slipping
out position, securely retain them using 4
the hooks etc.
Note that laying a floor mat over a pedal
or laying one floor mat on top of another
can obstruct pedal operation and lead to
a serious accident.
4-03
Running-in recommendations
E00600402135
During the running-in period for the first 1,000 km (620 miles), it is advisable to drive your new vehicle using the following precautions as a guideline to aid long
life as well as future economy and performance.
l Do not race the engine at high speeds.
l Avoid rapid starting, accelerating, braking and prolonged high-speed running.
l Keep to the running-in speed limit shown below.
Please note that the legal speed limits displayed must be adhered to.
l Do not exceed loading limits.
l Refrain from towing a trailer.
Vehicles with manual transmission

Speed limit
Shift point Vehicles with easy select 4WD Vehicles with super select 4WD
2WD
2H, 4H 4L 2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc
4 1st gear 20 km/h (12 mph) 20 km/h (12 mph) 10 km/h (6 mph) 20 km/h (12 mph) 10 km/h (6 mph)
2nd gear 40 km/h (25 mph) 40 km/h (25 mph) 20 km/h (12 mph) 40 km/h (25 mph) 20 km/h (12 mph)
3rd gear 65 km/h (40 mph) 70 km/h (43 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph) 70 km/h (43 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph)
4th gear 95 km/h (59 mph) 100 km/h (62 mph) 55 km/h (34 mph) 100 km/h (62 mph) 50 km/h (30 mph)
4-04
Vehicles with automatic transmission

Vehicles with 4A/T
Speed limit
2WD
“L” (LOW) 25 km/h (16 mph) 25 km/h (16 mph) 15 km/h (9 mph) 25 km/h (16 mph) 15 km/h (9 mph)
“2” (SECOND) 65 km/h (40 mph) 65 km/h (40 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph) 65 km/h (40 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph)
“D” (DRIVE) *1 100 km/h (62 mph) 100 km/h (62 mph) 50 km/h (30 mph) 100 km/h (62 mph) 50 km/h (30 mph)
“D” (DRIVE) *2 140 km/h (87 mph) 140 km/h (87 mph) — 135 km/h (84 mph) —
*1: With overdrive switched OFF
*2: With overdrive switched ON
Vehicles with 5A/T
Shift point
Speed limit
4
2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc
1st gear 15 km/h (9 mph) 5 km/h (3 mph)
2nd gear 40 km/h (25 mph) 20 km/h (12 mph)
3rd gear 60 km/h (37 mph) 30 km/h (19 mph)
4th gear 85 km/h (53 mph) 45 km/h (28 mph)
5th gear 120 km/h (74 mph) —
NOTE
l On 4WD vehicles with automatic transmission, when the transfer shift lever is in “4LLc”, the transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear.
4-05
CAUTION
l On 4WD vehicles, the “4LLc” range gives maximum torque for low-speed driving on steep slopes, as well as sandy, muddy, and other difficult
surfaces. On vehicles with A/T, do not exceed speeds of approximately 70 km/h (43 mph) in “4LLc” range.
4-06
Parking brake Type 1 Type 2

E00600501562
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete To apply To apply
stop, fully engage the parking brake, and then
move the gearshift lever to 1st (on an uphill) or Re-
verse (on a downhill) position for vehicles with man-
ual transmission or set the selector lever to “P”
(PARK) position on automatic transmission vehi-
cles.
CAUTION
l Before driving, be sure that the parking
brake is fully released and brake warning
lamp is off.
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the 1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal,
parking brake, the brake will be overhea- then pull the lever up without pushing the but- 1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal,
ted, resulting in ineffective braking and ton at the end of hand grip. then pull the lever out.
possible brake failure. 4
l When you intend to apply the parking To release To release
brake, firmly press the brake pedal to
bring the vehicle to a complete stop be-
fore pulling the parking brake lever. Pull- LHD RHD
ing the parking brake lever with the vehi-
cle moving could make the rear wheels
lock up, thereby making the vehicle unsta-
ble. It could also make the parking brake
malfunction.
l If the brake warning lamp does not extin-
guish when the parking brake is fully re-
leased, the brake system may be an abnor-
mal.
Have your vehicle checked immediately.
For details, refer to “Brake warning 1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal,
lamp” on page 3-08. then pull the lever up slightly.
2- Push the button at the end of hand grip.
3- Lower the lever fully.
4-07
1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal,

then pull the lever out slightly and turn it
Parking Parking with the engine running
E00600601202 Never leave the engine running while you take a
clockwise (LHD) or anticlockwise (RHD). short sleep/rest. Also, never leave the engine run-
Parking on a hill ning in a closed or poorly ventilated place.
LHD RHD To prevent the vehicle from rolling, follow these
procedures:
WARNING
Parking on a downhill slope
Turn the front wheels towards the kerb and move l Leaving the engine running risks injury
the vehicle forward until the kerb side wheel gently or death from accidentally moving the
touches the kerb. gearshift lever (on M/T vehicles) or the se-
Set the parking brake and place the gearshift lever lector lever (on A/T vehicles) or the accu-
into the “R” (Reverse) position (with M/T) or the mulation of toxic exhaust fumes in the pas-
selector lever into the “P” (PARK) position (with senger compartment.
A/T).
If necessary, apply chocks to wheels. Where you park
Your front bumper can be damaged if you scrape it
2- Push in the lever completely. Parking on an uphill slope over kerbs or parking stop blocks. Be careful when
Turn the front wheels away from the kerb and travelling up or down steep slopes where your bump-
4 move the vehicle back until the kerb side wheel gen- er can scrape the road.
tly touches the kerb.
Set the parking brake and place the gearshift lever
into the 1st position (with M/T) or the selector lever WARNING
into the “P” (PARK) position (with A/T).
If necessary, apply chocks to wheels. l Do not park your vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as dry grass
or leaves can come in contact with a hot
NOTE exhaust, since a fire could occur.
l If your vehicle is equipped with A/T, be sure
to apply the parking brake before moving the
selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position. If
When leaving the vehicle
you move the selector lever to the “P” Always remove the key from the ignition switch
(PARK) position before applying the parking and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unatten-
brake, it may be difficult to disengage the se- ded.
lector lever from the “P” (PARK) position Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit area.
when next you drive the vehicle, requiring ap-
plication of a strong force to the selector lev-
er to move from the “P” (PARK) position.
4-08
Steering wheel height adjustment Inside rear-view mirror To reduce the glare
E00600700219 E00600800106 The lever (A) at the bottom of the mirror can be
To adjust the steering wheel height, release the tilt Adjust the rear-view mirror only after making any used to adjust the mirror to reduce the glare from
lock lever while holding the steering wheel by seat adjustments so you have a clear view to the the headlamps of vehicles behind you during night
hand, and raise or lower the steering wheel to the rear of the vehicle. driving.
desired height.
After adjustment, securely lock the lever by pulling
it upward. WARNING
l Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view
mirror while driving. This can be danger-
ous.
Always adjust the mirror before driving.
Adjust the rear-view mirror to maximize the view

through the rear window.
To adjust the vertical mirror position 1- Normal

It is possible to move the mirror up and down to ad-
just its position.
2- Anti-glare 4
1- Locked
2- Release
WARNING
l After adjusting to the desired height,
check to be sure that the lever is locked.
l Do not attempt to adjust the steering
wheel while you are driving the vehicle.
l When releasing the tilt lock lever, move it
to the release position (2) and hold the
steering wheel by hand to prevent it fall-
ing to the lowest position.
4-09
Outside rear-view mirrors Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mir- 1-

2-
Up
Down
E00600900149 rors*
To adjust the mirror position The electric remote-controlled outside rear-view 3- Right
E00601000482 mirrors can be operated when the ignition switch is 4- Left
in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
To fold the mirror
WARNING Push the switch (A) on the same side as the mirror E00601100467
whose adjustment is desired. The outside mirror can be folded in towards the
l Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view
side window to prevent damage when parking in
mirrors while driving. This can be danger-
narrow areas.
ous. Type 1
Always adjust the mirrors before driving.
l Your vehicle is equipped with convex
type mirrors.
Please take into consideration, that ob-
jects you see in the mirror will look small-
er and farther away compared to a nor-
mal flat mirror. Type 2
Do not use this mirror to estimate dis-
4 tance of following vehicles when changing
lanes.
Manual outside rear-view mirrors*

Adjust the mirror surface by hands as indicated by
the arrows. Mirror retractor switch*
The mirror retractor switch can be operated with
L- Left outside mirror adjustment the ignition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
R- Right outside mirror adjustment
NOTE
l After adjustment, lightly push the switch on
the opposite side to return it to the neutral po-
sition.
Press the switch (B) to the left, right, up or down to

adjust the mirror position.
4-10
Push the switch to fold the mirrors inward, and

push the switch again to return them to extended po-
The indication lamp (D) will illuminate while the
demister is on. The heater will be turned off auto-
Ignition switch
E00601401874
sition. matically in about 20 minutes.
Type 1
Type 2
LOCK
NOTE The engine is stopped and the steering wheel
l It is also possible to fold and return the mir- locked. The key can only be inserted and removed
rors by hand. when the switch in this position. 4
l When freezing has occurred and mirrors fail
to operate as intended, please refrain from re- ACC
peated pushing of the retractor switch as this The engine is stopped, but the electrical devices
action can result in burn-out of the mirror mo- such as the radio and cigarette lighter can be operat-
tor circuits. ed.
Heated mirror* ON
E00601200253 The engine is running, and all the vehicle’s electri-
When the rear window demister switch (C) is press- cal devices can be operated.
ed, the outside rear-view mirrors are demisted or de-
frosted. Current will flow through the heater ele- START
ment inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or The starter motor operates. After the engine has star-
condensation. ted, release the key and it will automatically return
to the “ON” position.
4-11
NOTE
CAUTION Steering wheel lock
l If your vehicle is equipped with the Daytime E00601500227
Running Lamp, when the ignition switch is l Do not remove the ignition key from the
in the “ON”, the headlamp low beams etc. ignition switch while driving. The steer-
are turned on. ing wheel will be locked, causing loss of
Refer to “Headlamps” on page 3-30. control.
l Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic l If the engine is stopped while driving, the
immobilizer. brake servomechanism will cease to func-
To start the engine, the ID code which the tion and braking efficiency will deterio-
transponder inside the key sends must match rate. Also, the power steering system will
the one registered in the immobilizer comput- not function and it will require greater
er. manual effort to operate the steering.
Refer to “Electronic immobilizer” on page l Do not leave the key in the “ON” position
1-03. for a long time when the engine is not run-
ning, doing so will cause the battery to be
To remove the key discharged.
Push the key in at the “ACC” position and keep it To lock
l Do not turn the key to the “START” posi-
Remove the key at the “LOCK” position.
depressed until it is turned to the “LOCK” position tion when the engine is running, doing so
and remove it. Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.
4 could damage the starter motor.
To unlock
Turn the key to the “ACC” position while moving
the steering wheel slightly.
CAUTION
l Remove the key when leaving the vehicle.
NOTE
l If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft
lock may sometimes make it difficult to turn
the key from “LOCK” to “ACC”. Firmly
turn the steering wheel to the left or to the
right as you turn the key.
4-12
Starting CAUTION
On vehicles with automatic transmission,
make sure the selector lever in the “P”
E00601600404
(PARK) position.
l Never attempt to start the engine by push-
Tips for starting ing or pulling the vehicle. Especially the
l Do not operate the starter motor continuous- automatic transmission, since the struc- Vehicles with manual Vehicles with automatic
ly for anything longer than 10 seconds; do- ture is different from a manual transmis- transmission transmission
ing so could run down the battery. If the en- sion, it is not possible to start the engine
gine does not start, turn the ignition switch by using this technique. Never attempt
back to “LOCK” position, wait a few sec- this or it could damage the automatic
onds, and then try again. transmission.
Trying repeatedly with the starter motor still l Do not run the engine at high rpm or
turning will damage the starter mechanism. drive the vehicle at high speed until the en-
l If the engine cannot be started because the gine has had a chance to warm up.
battery is weak or dead, refer to the “Emer- l Release the ignition key as soon as the en-
gency starting” section for instructions on gine starts to avoid damaging the starter
starting the engine. motor.
l The engine is well warmed up if the coolant l Do not stop the engine immediately after
NOTE
temperature gauge needle starts to move (the high-speed or uphill driving. First allow
engine speed decreases). Extended warming- l On vehicles with automatic transmission, the
up operation will result in excessive fuel con-
the engine to idle to give the turbocharg-
er a chance to cool down.
engine will not start if the selector lever is in
any position other than “P” (PARK) or “N”
4
sumption.
(NEUTRAL) position.
Starting the engine For safety, start the engine with the selector
WARNING 1.
E00601701792
Insert the ignition key and fasten the seat belt.
lever in the “P” (PARK) position because in
this position the rear wheels are locked in
l Never run the engine in a closed or poor- 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied. place.
ly ventilated area any longer than is nee- 3. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
ded to move your vehicle in or out of the 4. On vehicles with manual transmission, place 5. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position.
area. Carbon monoxide gases are odour- the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi- The diesel preheat indication lamp will first
less and can be fatal. tion and depress the clutch pedal all the way. illuminate, and then after a short time go out,
indicating that preheating is completed.
NOTE
l If the engine is cold, the diesel preheat indi-
cation lamp is on for a longer time.
4-13
l When the engine has not been started within

about 5 seconds after the diesel preheat indi-
Manual transmission CAUTION
E00602000199
cation lamp went out, return the ignition key The shift pattern is shown on the gearshift lever
to the “LOCK” position. Then, turn the key knob. Be sure to always fully depress the clutch ped-
l If the clutch is engaged suddenly while
the engine revolution is high, an extreme-
to the “ON” position to preheat the engine al before attempting to shift the lever. ly large load will be applied instantaneous-
again. ly to the power train, possibly leading to
l When the engine is warm, the diesel preheat the breakage of that component. Please en-
indication lamp does not come on even if the sure, therefore, that the clutch pedal is al-
ignition key is placed in the “ON” position. ways applied in a slow yet firm manner.
Start the engine by turning the ignition key Your vehicle has a special feature to pro-
right to the “START” position. tect the power train from damage; the en-
gine is controlled in such a way that exces-
sive increase in engine revolution is pre-
6. Operate the accelerator pedal as described be- vented in situations where the accelerator
low in accordance with the atmospheric tem- pedal is depressed while the gearshift lev-
perature and/or engine condition and then er is in the 1st position and the clutch ped-
start the engine. al has been depressed.
l When the atmospheric temperature is
moderate or the engine is warm, start the
4 engine without depressing the accelerator
CAUTION NOTE
pedal. l If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the
l When the atmospheric temperature is low l Do not move the gearshift lever into re- clutch pedal again; the shift will then be eas-
and the engine is cold, start the engine verse while the vehicle is moving for- ier to make.
while depressing the accelerator pedal. ward; doing so will damage the transmis- l To shift into reverse from 5th gear, move the
sion. gearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position,
Fuel injection amount learning process l Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal and then shift it into reverse.
E00616000028 while driving as this will cause premature
To keep exhaust emissions and engine noise low, clutch wear or damage.
the engine very occasionally performs a learning Changing gears
E00610600136
process for the fuel injection amount. Always take care to change the gear with the vehi-
The engine sounds slightly different from usual cle speed matched to the engine speed. Proper shift-
while the learning process is taking place. The ing will prolong engine life.
change in the engine sound does not indicate a fault. Avoid shifting down at high speed, as this may
cause excessive engine speed (the tachometer nee-
dle into the red zone) and damage the engine.
4-14
Possible driving speed

E00610801151
Speed limit
2WD
1st gear 30 km/h (19 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph) 15 km/h (9 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph) 15 km/h (9 mph)
2nd gear 60 km/h (37 mph) 65 km/h (40 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph) 65 km/h (40 mph) 30 km/h (19 mph)
3rd gear 100 km/h (62 mph) 105 km/h (65 mph) 55 km/h (34 mph) 105 km/h (65 mph) 55 km/h (34 mph)
5th gear is an overdrive ratio and its use reduces engine speed below that of the 4th gear. Use 5 th gear whenever vehicle speed allows, for maximum fuel economy.
4-15
Automatic transmission 4A/T LHD RHD

WARNING
E00603200619
l Always depress the brake pedal when

NOTE shifting the selector lever into a gear
l During running-in period or immediately af- from the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEU-
ter reconnection of the battery cable, there TRAL) position.
may be a case where gear shifts are not made When beginning to drive, do not shift the
smoothly. This does not indicate a faulty trans- selector lever from the “P” (PARK) or
mission. “N” (NEUTRAL) position while depress-
Gear shifts will become smooth after the trans- ing the accelerator pedal, doing so is dan-
mission has been shifted several times by the gerous because the vehicle will “jump” for-
electronic control system. ward or backward.
Lock button must be pushed to move
Selector lever operation the selector lever. Selector lever position indicator
E00603300968 E00603500797
The transmission has 4 forward gears and 1 reverse Lock button need not be pushed to When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-
gear. move the selector lever. sition, the currently position of the selector lever is
The individual gears are selected automatically, de- indicated by the indicator (A) shown on the instru-
4 pending on the position of the gear selector lever, ment cluster {i.e. “P” (PARK), “R” (REVERSE),
the speed of the vehicle and the position of the ac-
celerator pedal.
WARNING “N” (NEUTRAL), “D” (DRIVE), “2” (SECOND)
or “L” (LOW)}.
The selector lever has 6 positions, and is equipped l If the lock button is always pushed to op-
with a lock button (A) to avoid inadvertent selec- erate the selector lever, the selector lever
tion of the wrong gear. may be accidentally shifted into the fol-
lowing position:
LHD: “P”, “R”, “2” or “L”
RHD: “P”, “R” or “L”
Be sure not to push the lock button when
performing the operations indicated by
in the illustration.
4-16
Selector lever positions

E00603800615 WARNING WARNING
“P” PARK l Always keep your right foot on the brake l This position can be used for maximum
pedal when the vehicle is in “N” (NEU- engine braking.
This position locks the transmission to prevent the
TRAL) position, or when shifting into or Be very careful not to shift into “L”
vehicle from moving. The engine can be started in
out of “N” (NEUTRAL) position, to mini- (LOW) position suddenly. Sudden engine
this position.
mize the risk of loss of control. braking may cause the tyres to skid. To
avoid erroneous operation, move the selec-
“R” REVERSE
“D” DRIVE tor lever firmly into each position and
This position is to back up.
This position is for normal driving. The transmis- briefly hold it there.
sion automatically selects a suitable gear for your Select this position according to the road
conditions and vehicle speed.
CAUTION speed and acceleration.
l Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R” NOTE

(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is
in motion to avoid transmission damage.
CAUTION l The A/T has a control function that prevents
l Never shift into the “D” (DRIVE) posi- over-revving. As a result, it may not perform
tion from the “R” (REVERSE) position a shift when the selector lever is moved from
“N” NEUTRAL the “D” (DRIVE) position to the “2” (SEC-
while the vehicle is in motion to avoid
At this position the transmission is disengaged. It is
the same as the neutral position on a manual trans-
transmission damage. OND) position or from the “2” (SECOND) 4
position to the “L” (LOW) position.
mission, and should be used when the vehicle is sta-
tionary for an extended length of time during driv- “2” SECOND
ing, such as in a traffic jam. This position is for extra power when driving up Overdrive control switch
E00604000089
moderately steep hills, and for engine braking
when descending moderately steep gradients. The overdrive control switch can be used while the
selector lever is in the “D” (DRIVE) position.
WARNING “L” LOW
During normal driving
l Never move the selector lever to the “N” This position is for driving up very steep hills and
(NEUTRAL) position while driving. A se- for engine braking at low speeds when descending Press the overdrive control switch to turn the over-
rious accident could occur since you steep gradients. drive function on. The transmission will shift auto-
could accidentally move the selector lever matically among the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears, ena-
into the “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) bling fuel-efficient, economical driving.
position or you will lose engine braking.
l On a gradient the engine should be star-
ted in the “P” (PARK) position, not in the
“N” (NEUTRAL) position.
4-17
During hilly roads driving When a malfunction occurs in the au-

Press the overdrive control switch to turn the over- tomatic transmission CAUTION
drive function off. The transmission will shift auto- E00615100019
l The selector lever position indicator warn-
matically among the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd gears, and When the selector lever position indicator blinks ing function does not operate with the se-
light engine braking will be available on downhill E00615200166
lector lever in the “P” (PARK), “R” (RE-
roads. When the selector lever position indicator blinks
while you are driving, there could be a malfunction VERSE) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
in the automatic transmission system.
When the A/T (automatic transmission) fluid tem-
perature warning lamp comes on
E00615300037
The automatic transmission fluid temperature warn-
ing lamp comes on when the automatic transmis-
sion fluid temperature becomes abnormally high
with the ignition switch “ON” position.
Normally the warning lamp comes on when the ig-
nition switch is turned to the “ON” position, and
then will go out after a few seconds.
4
Overdrive OFF indication lamp
E00614600017
or or
When the overdrive control switch is in the OFF po-
sition, the overdrive OFF indication lamp in the me-
ter cluster comes on.
CAUTION
l If the selector lever position indicator
blinks while you are driving, it is likely
that a safety device is operating because
of a malfunction in the automatic trans-
mission. We recommend you to have
your vehicle inspected as soon as possible.
4-18
CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION

l If the warning lamp comes on, reduce the l To prevent sudden acceleration, never l Never hold the vehicle stationary on a hill
engine speed and stop the vehicle in a safe race the engine when shifting from the using the accelerator pedal (without us-
area. “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position. ing the brake pedal). Always apply the
Then set the selector lever to “P” (PARK) l Operating the accelerator pedal while the parking brake and/or service brakes.
position and idle the engine until the warn- other foot is resting on the brake pedal l Unexpected acceleration may occur if the
ing lamp goes off. will affect braking efficiency and may selector lever is in a position other than
When the warning lamp goes off, resume cause premature wear of brake pads. “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
normal driving. Do not race the engine with brake pedal Prior to moving off after having stopped
If the warning lamp does not go off, we pressed. the vehicle, make sure that the selector lev-
recommend you to have your vehicle in- This can damage the transmission. er is in “D” (DRIVE) position.
spected. l Use the selector lever in the correct shift
position in accordance with driving condi-
tions. Parking
Operation of the automatic transmis- Never coast downhill backward with the
E00604700246
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete
sion “D” (DRIVE) position or coast forward stop, fully engage the parking brake, and then
E00604200515 with the “R” (REVERSE) position. move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position.
The engine stops and the brake pedal ef-
fort or the steering wheel handling weight
If you are going to leave the vehicle unattended, al- 4
CAUTION increasing could lead to an accident.
ways switch off the engine and remove the ignition
key.
l Before selecting a gear with the engine
running and the vehicle stationary, fully Passing acceleration NOTE
depress the brake pedal to prevent the ve- E00604500127
hicle from creeping. To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) posi- l On a slope, be sure to apply the parking
brake before moving the selector lever to the
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as tion (when passing another vehicle), push the accel-
“P” (PARK) position. If you move the selec-
the gear is engaged, especially when the erator to the floor. The automatic transmission will
tor lever to the “P” (PARK) position before
engine speed is high, at fast idle or with automatically downshift.
applying the parking brake, it may be diffi-
the air conditioning operating, the brakes cult to disengage the selector lever from the
should only be released when you are Waiting
E00604600128 “P” (PARK) position when next you drive
ready to drive away. For short waiting periods, such as at traffic signals, the vehicle, requiring application of a strong
l Depress the brake pedal with the right the vehicle can be left in gear and held stationary force to the selector lever to move from the
foot at all times. with the service brake. “P” (PARK) position.
Using the left foot could cause driver move- For longer waiting periods with the engine running,
ment delay in case of an emergency. the selector lever should be placed in the “N” (NEU-
TRAL) position.
4-19
When the automatic transmission makes no speed Automatic transmission Sports NOTE
change l For information on manual gate operation,
E00604800478 Mode 5A/T please refer to “Sports mode” on page 4-22.
If the transmission does not change speeds while E00603200576
driving, or your vehicle does not pick up enough

speed when starting on an uphill slope, it may be In the main gate, selector lever has 4 positions, and
NOTE
that there is something unusual happening in the is equipped with a lock button (A) to avoid inadver-
l During running-in period or immediately af- tent selection of the wrong gear.
transmission, causing a safety device to activate. ter reconnection of the battery cable, there
We recommend you to have your checked as soon may be a case where gear shifts are not made
as possible. smoothly. This does not indicate a faulty trans-
mission.
NOTE Gear shifts will become smooth after the trans-
l When the selector lever position indicator in mission has been shifted several times by the
the instrument panel blinks, it means that electronic control system.
there is an abnormal condition in the trans-
mission. Refer to “When the selector lever po- Selector lever operation
sition indicator blinks” on page 4-18. E00603300867
The transmission has 5 forward gears and 1 reverse
gear.
4 The individual gears are selected automatically, de-
pending on the position of the gear selector lever,
the speed of the vehicle and the position of the ac-
celerator pedal.
The selector lever has 2 gates; the main gate (1)
and the manual gate (2).
The lock button must be pushed to move the

selector lever.
The lock button need not be pushed to move
the selector lever.
4-20
Selector lever position indicator “N” NEUTRAL

WARNING E00603500726 At this position the transmission is disengaged. It is
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po- the same as the neutral position on a M/T, and
l If the lock button is always pushed to op- sition, the currently position of the selector lever is should only be used when the vehicle is stationary
erate the selector lever, the lever may be
indicated by the indicator (A) shown on the instru- for an extended length of time during driving, such
accidentally shifted into the “P” (PARK)
ment cluster {i.e. “P” (PARK), “R” (REVERSE), as in a traffic jam.
or “R” (REVERSE) position. Be sure not
“N” (NEUTRAL), “D” (DRIVE)}.
to push the lock button when performing
the operations indicated by in the illus-
tration. WARNING
l Always depress the brake pedal when l Never move the selector lever to the “N”
shifting the selector lever into a gear (NEUTRAL) position while driving. A se-
from the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEU- rious accident could occur since you
TRAL) position. could accidentally move the lever into the
When beginning to drive, do not shift the “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position
selector lever from the “P” (PARK) or or you will lose engine braking.
“N” (NEUTRAL) position while depress- l On a gradient the engine should be star-
ing the accelerator pedal, doing so is dan- ted in the “P” (PARK) position, not in the
gerous because the vehicle will “jump” for- “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
ward or backward. l Always keep your right foot on the brake
pedal when shifting into or out of “N”
4
Selector lever positions (Main gate) (NEUTRAL), to minimize the risk of loss
E00603800585 of control.
“P” PARK “D” DRIVE

This position locks the transmission to prevent the This position is for normal driving. The transmis-
vehicle from moving. The engine can be started in sion automatically selects a suitable gear ratio for
this position. your speed and acceleration.
“R” REVERSE
This position is to back up. CAUTION
l Never shift into the “D” (DRIVE) posi-
CAUTION tion from the “R” (REVERSE) position
while the vehicle is in motion to avoid
l Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R” transmission damage.
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is
in motion to avoid a transmission damage.
4-21
Sports mode l In sports mode, downward shifts are made au-

E00603901088 CAUTION tomatically when the vehicle slows down.
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automati-
sports mode is selected by gently pushing the selec- l In sports mode, the driver must execute
cally selected.
upward shifts in accordance with prevail-
tor lever from the “D” (DRIVE) position into the l When driving away on a slippery road, push
ing road conditions, taking care to keep
manual gate (A). To return to “D” range operation, the selector lever forward into the “+ (SHIFT
the engine speed below the red zone.
gently push the selector lever back into the main UP)” position. This causes the transmission
gate (B). l By rapidly moving the selector lever back-
ward (SHIFT DOWN) twice, it is possible to shift into the 2nd gear which is better for
to skip one gear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2nd smooth driving away on a slippery road.
In sports mode, gear shifts can be made rapidly sim- Push the selector lever to the “- (SHIFT
ply by moving the selector lever backward and for- or 5th to 3rd. Since sudden engine braking
and/or rapid acceleration can cause a loss DOWN)” side to shift back to the 1st gear.
ward. In contrast to a manual transmission, the
sports mode allows gear shifts with the accelerator of traction, downshifts must be made care-
pedal depressed. fully in accordance with the vehicle’s Sports mode indicator
speed. E00612300355
In sports mode, the currently selected position is in-
dicated by the indicator (A) shown on the instru-
NOTE ment panel.
l The upward shift may be made automatically
4 SHIFT UP in sports mode when the engine revolutions
rises and approaches the tachometer’s red
zone (the red-coloured part of the tachometer
dial).
l In sports mode, only the 5 forward gears can
be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle,
SHIFT DOWN move the selector lever to the “R” (RE-
VERSE) or “P” (PARK) position as required.
+ (SHIFT UP) l To maintain good running performance, the
Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear. transmission may refuse to perform an up-
shift when the selector lever is moved to the
- (SHIFT DOWN) “+ (SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehicle
Pull the lever backward once to shift down one speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of the
gear. engine, the transmission may refuse to per-
form a downshift when the lever is moved to
the “- (SHIFT DOWN)” position at certain
vehicle speeds.
4-22
When a malfunction occurs in the au-

tomatic transmission CAUTION CAUTION
E00615100152
When the selector lever position indicator blinks
l The selector lever position indicator warn- l If the lamp comes on, reduce the engine
ing function does not operate with the se- speed and stop the vehicle in a safe area.
E00615200179
When the selector lever position indicator blinks lector lever in the “P” (PARK), “R” (RE- Then set the selector lever to the “P”
while you are driving, there could be a malfunction VERSE) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position. (PARK) position and idle the engine until
in the automatic transmission system. the warning lamp goes off. When the warn-
ing lamp goes off, resume normal driving.
When the A/T (automatic transmission) fluid tem- If the warning lamp does not go off, we
perature warning lamp comes on recommend you to have your vehicle in-
E00615300141
The automatic transmission fluid temperature warn- spected.
ing lamp comes on when the automatic transmis-
sion fluid temperature becomes abnormally high. Operation of the automatic transmis-
Normally the warning lamp comes on when the ig-
nition switch is turned to the “ON” position, and sion
E00604200528
then will go out after a few seconds.
CAUTION
l Before selecting a gear with the engine
4
running and the vehicle stationary, fully
or through
depress the brake pedal to prevent the ve-
hicle from creeping.
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as
the gear is engaged, especially when the
engine speed is high, at fast idle or with
the air conditioning operating, the brakes
CAUTION should only be released when you are
ready to drive away.
l If the selector lever position indicator l Depress the brake pedal with the right
blinks while you are driving, it is likely foot at all times.
that a safety device is operating because Using the left foot could cause driver move-
of a malfunction in the automatic trans- ment delay in case of an emergency.
mission. We recommend you to have l To prevent sudden acceleration, never
your vehicle inspected as soon as possible. race the engine when shifting from the
“P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
4-23
For longer waiting periods with the engine running, NOTE

CAUTION place the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) po- l On a slope, be sure to apply the parking
sition.. brake before moving the selector lever to the
l Operating the accelerator pedal while the
other foot is resting on the brake pedal “P” (PARK) position. If you move the selec-
will affect braking efficiency and may tor lever to the “P” (PARK) position before
cause premature wear of brake pads. CAUTION applying the parking brake, it may be diffi-
l Use the selector lever in the correct shift cult to disengage the selector lever from the
position in accordance with driving condi-
l Never hold the vehicle stationary on a hill
“P” (PARK) position when next you drive
using the accelerator pedal (without us-
tions. the vehicle, requiring application of a strong
ing the brake pedal). Always apply the
Never coast downhill backward with the force to the selector lever to move from the
parking brake and/or service brakes.
driving shift position {“D” (DRIVE) or “P” (PARK) position.
sports mode} or coast forward with the
l Unexpected acceleration may occur if the
selector lever is in a position other than
“R” (REVERSE) position. “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL). Prior When the automatic transmission makes no speed
The engine stops and the brake pedal ef- to moving off after having stopped the ve- change
fort or the steering wheel handling weight hicle, make sure that the selector lever is E00604800683
increasing could lead to an accident. in the “D” (DRIVE) position. If the transmission does not change speeds while
l Do not race the engine with brake pedal driving, or your vehicle does not pick up enough
pressed when the vehicle is stationary. speed when starting on an uphill slope, it may be
Parking that there is something unusual happening in the
4 This can damage the automatic transmis-
sion. E00604700262
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete
transmission, causing a safety device to activate.
We recommend you to have your checked as soon
stop, fully engage the parking brake, and then as possible.
Passing acceleration move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position. 1. If your vehicle has difficulty moving uphill,
E00604500329 If you are going to leave the vehicle unattended, al- shift the selector lever into 2nd gear of the
To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) posi- ways switch off the engine and remove the ignition
tion, push the accelerator to the floor. The automat- “Sports mode”.
key. This method might not work depending on
ic transmission will automatically downshift.
the type of transmission malfunction.
2. Once the vehicle is moving on a level road,
NOTE move the selector lever back to “D” (DRIVE).
l In “Sports mode”, downshifts do not take
place when the accelerator is depressed all
the way to the floor. NOTE
l When the selector lever position indicator in
the instrument panel blinks, it means that
Waiting there is an abnormal condition in the trans-
E00604600304
For short waiting periods, such as at traffic signals, mission. Refer to “When the selector lever po-
the vehicle can be left in gear and held stationary sition indicator blinks” on page 4-18.
with the service brake.
4-24
Easy select 4WD* Transfer shift lever position and 2WD/ NOTE
E00614700119 4WD operation indication lamp l On vehicles with automatic transmission,
Shifting to rear-wheel drive or 4-wheel drive can E00614800080 when the transfer shift lever is in “4L”, the
be made by operating the transfer shift lever (A). transmission will not shift into the overdrive
Shift the transfer shift lever to an appropriate posi- 2WD/4WD gear.
Transfer shift lever Driving con-
tion according to the road surface conditions. In ad- operation in-
position ditions
dition, the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp indication lamp
dicates the transfer shift lever shifting state. Refer
to “2WD/4WD operation indication lamp” on page
CAUTION
When driv- l The “4L” range gives maximum torque
4-27. Rear-wheel
2H ing on dry for lowspeed driving on steep slopes, as
drive
paved road. well as sandy, muddy, and other difficult
Vehicles with manual transmission surfaces. On vehicles with automatic
transmission, do not exceed speeds of ap-
When driv-
proximately 70 km/h (43 mph) in “4L”
ing on rough,
4-wheel range.
4H sand or snow
drive
covered l Do not drive your vehicle in the “4H” or
“4L” on dry paved roads and highways.
roads.
Doing so may result in excessive tyre
Vehicles with automatic transmission When driv- wear, increased fuel consumption, and
possible noise generation. It may also in-
4
ing up or
down steep crease the differential oil temperature,
hills, on which may damage the drive system. Fur-
rough or ther, the drive train will be subjected to
Low range 4- excessive loading, resulting in oil leakage,
4L muddy roads
wheel drive component seizure, or other serious prob-
(especially
when in- lems. On dry paved roads and highways,
creased tor- drive the vehicle in “2H” only.
que is re-
quired).
: Illuminate
: Remain off
4-25
Transfer shift lever operation The transfer shift lever should be positioned in ac-
E00614900111 cordance with the following operating conditions:
The shift pattern is shown on the transfer shift lev-
er knob.
Procedure
To shift from To
4 2H 4H
Vehicles with manual transmission Vehicles with automatic transmission
The transfer shift lever can be operated while the vehicle
The transfer shift lever can be operated while the vehicle is
is either moving or stationary.
either moving or stationary.
When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the selector lever
When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the gearshift lever
to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position before operating the
to the “N” (Neutral) position before operating the transfer
transfer shift lever.
4H 2H shift lever.
When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can be
steered straight ahead, shift the selector lever to the “D”
steered straight ahead, release the accelerator pedal before
(DRIVE) position, and release the accelerator pedal be-
operating the transfer shift lever.
fore operating the transfer shift lever.
4H 4L Stop the vehicle, shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEU-
TRAL) position, and operate the transfer shift lever.
Stop the vehicle, depress the clutch pedal to the floor and If operation is made with the selector lever placed in any
4L 4H operate the transfer shift lever. other position than “N” (NEUTRAL) position, a gear
noise may be generated, with a possible failure to shift in-
to a proper gear.
4-26
NOTE 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp Except for vehicles for Russia and Ukraine
l Shifting of the transfer shift lever between E00615000092
“2H” ↔ “4H”
“2H” ↔ “4H” should only be done at speeds
below 100 km/h (62 mph). Transfer shift lever posi- 2WD/4WD operation
l During driving, never attempt to shift from tion indication lamp
“4H” to “4L”.
l When shifting from “2H” to “4H” in cold
weather while the vehicle is in motion, the
transmission gear may make some noise. In
cold weather, try to shift the gear while the
vehicle is stopped.
l There may be a case that the transfer shift lev- 2H
er feels heavy when it is moved from “4H”
to “2H” with the steering wheel in turned po-
sition.
This is normal and not any indication of trou-
ble. When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp shows
the shifting condition. The 2WD/4WD operation in-
CAUTION dication lamp comes on at each transfer shift lever
position as follows:
4
l Do not operate the transfer shift lever
while the rear wheels of the vehicle are
slipping on snow or ice.
Drive mode switching
in progress
4H
: Blink
4-27
: Illuminate Vehicles for Russia and Ukraine NOTE

: Remain off
“2H” ↔ “4H” l When the transfer shift lever is shifted be-
tween 2H ↔ 4H, the 2WD/4WD operation in-
NOTE Transfer shift 2WD/4WD operation indication dication lamp does not switch to illuminate
lever position lamp or remain off while the selection is in proc-
l The 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp
ess. Take the following precautions when the
blinks while the selection is in process. Take
indication lamp is remains on or off.
the following precautions when the indica-
• Keep the steering wheel in the straight
tion lamp is blinking or remains off.
ahead position while making range selec-
• Keep the steering wheel in the straight
tions. If you attempt to drive forward
ahead position while making range selec-
2H with the steering wheel turned, gear rat-
tling may occur and the desired range
with the steering wheel turned, gear rat-
may not actually be selected.
• When the transfer shift lever is shifted be-
may not actually be selected.
tween “2H” ↔ “4H” while the vehicle is
• If the 2WD/4WD operation indication
stopped, the 2WD/4WD operation indica-
lamp continues blinking after a “2H” ↔
tion lamp does not switch to illuminate or
“4H” selection has been made with the ve-
remain off while the selection is in proc-
hicle moving, hold the steering wheel in
ess. Drive slowly and normally after con-
4 the straight ahead position and slowly de-
press the accelerator pedal several times.
firming that the lamp is switched.
Drive mode • Do not move the selector lever while the
switching in 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp is
progress switched.
• If the 2WD/4WD operation indication
lamp does not switch after a “2H” ↔
“4H” selection has been made with the ve-
hicle moving, hold the steering wheel in
the straight ahead position and slowly de-
press the accelerator pedal several times.
4H
: Illuminate
: Remain off
4-28
“4H” ↔ “4L” NOTE Super select 4WD*

Transfer shift lever posi- 2WD/4WD operation
l The 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp E00605700197
will go out momentarily during shifting proc- Shifting to rear-wheel drive or 4-wheel drive can
tion indication lamp ess from “4H” to “4L” or vice versa, as the be made by operating the transfer shift lever (A).
transfer shift lever passes through the neutral Shift the transfer shift lever to an appropriate posi-
position. tion according to the road surface conditions. In ad-
Be sure to operate the transfer shift lever un- dition, the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp in-
til the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp dicates the transfer shift lever shifting state. Refer
illuminates again. to “2WD/4WD operation indication lamp” on page
l If, after a “4H” ↔ “4L” selection has been 4-32.
made, the 2WD/4WD operation indication
lamp remains off and the desired range is not Vehicles with manual transmission
4H actually selected, return the transfer shift lev-
er to its previous position. Place the steering
wheel in the straight ahead position, drive
the vehicle forward, and release the accelera-
tor pedal. Next, hold down the clutch pedal
(with manual transmission) or place the selec-
tor lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position
Drive mode switching (with automatic transmission) and make the Vehicles with automatic transmission 4
in progress range selection again.
4L
: Illuminate
: Remain off
4-29
Transfer shift lever position and 2WD/ : Illuminate Transfer shift lever operation
4WD operation indication lamp : Remain off E00605900173
The shift pattern is shown on the transfer shift lev-
E00605800228
er knob.
2WD/4WD NOTE
Transfer shift lever operation in- Driving con- l On vehicles with automatic transmission,
position dication ditions when the transfer shift lever is in “4LLc”, the
lamp transmission will not shift into the overdrive
gear.
When driv-
Rear-wheel
2H ing on dry
drive
paved road. CAUTION
The basic l The “4LLc” range gives maximum tor-
position for que for low-speed driving on steep slopes,
super select as well as sandy, muddy, and other diffi-
4WD. cult surfaces. On vehicles with automatic
Full-time 4- transmission, do not exceed speeds of ap-
4H When driv-
wheel drive proximately 70 km/h (43 mph) in “4LLc”
ing on dry The transfer shift lever should be positioned in ac-
range.
4 paved
slippery
or
l Do not drive your vehicle in the “4HLc”
cordance with the following operating conditions:
: Not push down the transfer shift lever
roads. or “4LLc” on dry paved roads and high-
ways. Doing so may result in excessive : Push down the transfer shift lever
Centre dif- When driv- tyre wear, increased fuel consumption,
ferential ing on and possible noise generation. It may also
4HLc lock engag- rough, sand increase the differential oil temperature,
ed 4-wheel or snow cov- which may damage the drive system. Fur-
drive ered roads. ther, the drive train will be subjected to
When driv- excessive loading, resulting in oil leakage,
ing up or component seizure, or other serious prob-
down steep lems. On dry paved roads and highways,
Low range hills, on drive the vehicle in “2H” or “4H” only.
centre differ- rough or
4LLc ential lock muddy
engaged 4- roads (espe-
wheel drive cially when
increased
torque is re-
quired).
4-30
Procedure
To shift from To
Vehicles with manual transmission Vehicles with automatic transmission
2H 4H The transfer shift lever can be operated while the vehicle
The transfer shift lever can be operated while the vehicle is
is either moving or stationary.
4H 2H or 4HLc either moving or stationary.
When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the selector lever
When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the gearshift lever
to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position before operating the
to the “N” (Neutral) position before operating the transfer
transfer shift lever.
shift lever.
4HLc 4H When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can be
steered straight ahead, shift the selector lever to the “D”
steered straight ahead, and release the accelerator pedal be-
(DRIVE) position, and release the accelerator pedal be-
4HLc 4LLc Stop the vehicle, shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEU-
Stop the vehicle, depress the clutch pedal to the floor and TRAL) position, and operate the transfer shift lever
operate the transfer shift lever while keeping the transfer while keeping the transfer shift lever pushed down.
shift lever pushed down. If operation is made with the selector lever placed in any
4LLc 4HLc Keep depressing the clutch pedal while the 2WD/4WD op- other position than “N” (NEUTRAL) position, a gear
eration indication lamp continues to blink. noise may be generated, with a possible failure to shift in-
to a proper gear. 4
NOTE l When the transfer shift lever is shifted from l There may be a case that the transfer shift lev-
l Shifting of the transfer shift lever between “4H” to “4HLc” while the vehicle is stopped, er feels heavy when it is moved from “2H”
“2H” ↔ “4H” should only be done at speeds the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp to “4H” with the steering wheel in turned po-
below 100 km/h (62 mph). blinks while the selection is in process. Drive sition.
l During driving, never attempt to shift from slowly and normally after confirming that This is normal and not any indication of trou-
“4HLc” to “4LLc”. the lamp is illuminated. (Refer to “2WD/ ble.
l When shifting from “2H” to “4H” in cold 4WD operation indication lamp” on page
weather while the vehicle is in motion, the 4-32.)
transmission gear may make some noise. In l Do not move the selector lever while the 2WD/ CAUTION
cold weather, try to shift the gear while the 4WD operation indication lamp is blinking.
vehicle is stopped. l The 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp l Do not operate the transfer shift lever
will go out momentarily during shifting proc- while the rear wheels of the vehicle are
ess from “4HLc” to “4LLc” or vice versa, as slipping on snow or ice.
the transfer shift lever passes through the neu-
tral position.
Be sure to operate the transfer shift lever un-
til the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp
illuminates again.
4-31
2WD/4WD operation indication lamp “2H” ↔ “4H” “4H” ↔ “4HLc”

E00625900036
Transfer shift lever posi- 2WD/4WD operation Transfer shift lever posi- 2WD/4WD operation
tion indication lamp tion indication lamp
2H 4H
A- Front wheel lamp

B- Centre differential lock lamp
C- Rear wheel lamp Drive mode switching
Drive mode switching in progress
in progress
4 When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp shows
the shifting condition. The 2WD/4WD operation in-
dication lamp comes on at each transfer shift lever
position as follows:
4HLc
4H
: Blink
: Blink : Illuminate
: Illuminate : Remain off
: Remain off
4-32
“4HLc” ↔ “4LLc” the following precautions when the indica- l When you move the transfer shift lever from
tion lamp is blinking or remains off. “4H” to “4HLc”, there may be a slight delay
Transfer shift lever posi- 2WD/4WD operation • Keep the steering wheel in the straight before the centre differential lock lamp illu-
tion indication lamp ahead position while making range selec- minates.
with the steering wheel turned, gear rat-
4HLc may not actually be selected.
• If you move the transfer shift lever from
“4H” to “4HLc” while the vehicle is sta-
tionary, keep your speed initially very
low when you subsequently make a stand-
ing start. Before driving at normal
speeds, confirm that the centre differen-
tial lock lamp has changed from blinking
to steady illumination.
Drive mode switching • If you move the transfer shift lever from
in progress “4HLc” to “4H” and the centre differen-
tial lock lamp does not stop blinking,
place the steering wheel in the straight
ahead position and slowly depress the ac-
4
celerator pedal several times.
• If you move the transfer shift lever from
“4H” to “2H” and the front wheel lamp
does not stop blinking, confirm safety
around the vehicle then accelerate, decel-
4LLc erate, and reverse until the front wheel
lamp goes off. When the front wheel
lamp goes off, you can then proceed to
: Blink drive the vehicle.
: Illuminate If you accelerate, decelerate, and reverse
but the front wheel lamp still does not
: Remain off
stop blinking, return the transfer shift lev-
er to “4H” then have your vehicle inspec-
NOTE ted.
l The 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp
blinks while the selection is in process. Take
4-33
Rear differential lock* 3. To deactivate the rear differential lock, press

the rear differential lock switch (2).
The rear differential lock indication
E00606200115 lamp
If one wheel starts to spin freely and the vehicle be- E00606300291
comes stuck and cannot be freed even using 4- When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-
wheel drive, the rear differential lock switch (A) sition, the rear differential lock indication lamp (A)
can be used to activate the rear differential lock for in the meter cluster illuminates for a few seconds
extra traction. then indicates the rear differential lock’s operating
status (activated or deactivated).
Easy select 4WD
CAUTION
4 l Operate the rear differential lock switch
after the wheels are stopped. Operating
the switch with the wheels turning may
Operating the rear differential lock cause the vehicle to dart in unexpected di-
1. Move the transfer shift lever to “4L” or “4H” rections. Super select 4WD
position (easy select 4WD), “4LLc” or
“4HLc” position (super select 4WD).
2. To activate the rear differential lock, press NOTE
the rear differential lock switch (1). l The rear differential lock does not operate
when the transfer shift lever is in “2H” posi-
tion (easy select 4WD), “2H” or “4H” posi-
tion (super select 4WD).
l When the rear differential is locked with the
transfer shift lever in “4L” or “4H” position
(easy select 4WD), “4LLc” or “4HLc” posi-
tion (super select 4WD) changing the shift
lever to “2H” position (easy select 4WD),
“2H” or “4H” position (super select 4WD)
makes the rear differential unlock automati-
cally.
4-34
NOTE Transfer shift Rear differential lock indication NOTE

l The 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp al- lever position lamp l The indication lamp blinks while the rear dif-
so illuminates for a few seconds when the ig- ferential lock is being switched between its
Easy select Super select
nition switch is turned to the “ON” position. activated and deactivated conditions. When
4WD 4WD
Refer to “2WD/4WD operation indication the switching operation is complete, the indi-
lamp” on pages 4-27, 4-32. cation lamp is either illuminated steadily or
The status of the rear differential lock (result- Rear differen- not illuminated.
ing from depression of the rear differential tial lock deacti- l On vehicles with the active stability & trac-
lock switch) is shown by blinking or steady vated tion control (ASTC) and anti-lock brake sys-
illumination of the rear differential lock indi- tem (ABS), the ASTC and ABS functions
cation lamp. are suspended while the rear differential lock
is activated. ASTC indication lamp, ASTC
OFF indication lamp and ABS warning lamp
are illuminated while these functions are sus-
pended. It dose not indicate a problem. When
the rear differential lock is disengaged, these
lamps go out and function again.
Switching in Refer to “ABS warning lamp” on page 4-44,
“ASTC indication lamp, ASTC OFF indica-
progress
tion lamp” on page 4-47. 4
l On vehicles with the anti-lock brake system
(ABS), the ABS function is suspended while
the rear differential lock is activated.
ABS warning lamp is illuminated while this
function is suspended.
Refer to “ABS warning lamp” on page 4-44.
Rear differen- l If the indication lamp continues blinking af-
tial lock activa- ter the switch has been pressed to deactivate
ted the rear differential lock, hold the steering
wheel in the straight ahead position then slow-
: Blink ly depress and release the accelerator pedal
: Illuminate (steady) several times.
: Remain off l If the indication lamp continues blinking af-
ter the switch has been pressed to activate
the rear differential lock, bear in mind the fol-
lowing instructions:
4-35
• If the vehicle speed is 12 km/h (7 mph) When one of the wheels has fallen in a ditch When getting out of snow
or higher, decelerate to a speed of 6 km/h When the vehicle is unable to get going because
(4 mph) or lower. The indication lamp one of the wheels is on the snow and the other on a
will illuminate steadily and the rear differ- paved road.
ential lock will be activated.
• If the vehicle speed is 12 km/h (7 mph)
or lower, turn the steering wheel from
side to side until the indication lamp illu-
minates steadily. If the vehicle is stuck in
soft ground, make sure the area around
the vehicle is clear then repeatedly at-
tempt to drive forward and backward.
The indication lamp will illuminate stead-
ily and the rear differential lock will be ac-
tivated.
When driving on rocky roads
When the vehicle is unable to move because one of
Examples of effective use of the rear the wheels is suspended in the air.
differential lock Examples of incorrect use of the rear
4 E00606400058
differential lock
E00606500059
CAUTION
l Use the rear differential lock only as an WARNING
emergency measure when the vehicle is
stuck and cannot be freed with the trans- l If the “4L” or “4H” position (easy select
fer shift lever in “4L” or “4H” position 4WD), “4LLc” or “4HLc” position (super
(easy select 4WD) or in “4LLc” or select 4WD) is selected along with the
“4HLc” position (super select 4WD). De- rear differential lock, the following phe-
activate the rear differential lock immedi- nomena appear and it is very dangerous.
ately after using it. Please be sure to release the rear differen-
tial lock on normal roads.
4-36
WARNING
• If the rear differential lock is used by
mistake when driving on a paved
road: With the rear differential lock
on, the power to drive the vehicle
straight ahead becomes very strong,
which may make it difficult to turn
the steering wheel.
WARNING
l If the rear differential lock is used by mis-
take except when making an emergency
escape on snow or frozen road: It be-
comes difficult to make a steady turn.
l In the case where the condition of the 4
road is different for the right tyre to
drive from the left tyre (such as one tyre
on a paved road and the other on ice), di-
rection of the vehicle may change abrupt-
WARNING ly when engine braking or accelerating.
Do not use the rear differential lock ex-
l If the rear differential lock is used by mis- cept when making an emergency escape
take when turning a curve or making a on a snow or frozen road, but drive with
right or left turn at a crossing or the like: 4WD.
The vehicle is unable to make a turn and
may go straight ahead.
4-37
4-wheel drive operation CAUTION Driving on sandy or muddy roads

E00606600920 Set the transfer shift lever to “4H” or “4L” position
By selecting 4-wheel drive, both axles of the vehi- (easy select 4WD), “4HLc” or “4LLc” position (su-
cle are rigidly connected with each other. This im-
l Selecting “4H” or “4L” position (easy se-
lect 4WD), “4HLc” or “4LLc” position (super select 4WD) and then gradually depress the ac-
proves the traction characteristics. When turning per select 4WD) to drive on dry paved celerator pedal for a smooth start. Keep the pres-
sharp corners or moving forward and backward re- road will increase the fuel consumption sure on the accelerator pedal as constant as possi-
peatedly, however, the drive line is stressed, which with possible noise generation and early ble, and drive at low speed.
is felt as a braking effect. A 4-wheel drive vehicle tyre wear.
can accelerate more quickly and smoothly. It may also increase the differential oil
However, note that the braking distance is not short-
er than that of a rear-wheel drive vehicle.
temperature, resulting in possible dam- CAUTION
age to the driving system.
When using 4-wheel drive on rough roads (snow, Further, the drive train will be subjected l Do not force the vehicle or drive reckless-
mud, sand, etc.), it is important to operate the vehi- ly on sandy surfaces. In comparison with
to excessive loading, possibly leading to
cle correctly. normal road surfaces, the engine and oth-
oil leakage, component seizure, or other
er drive-system components are put un-
serious faults.
der excessive strain when driving on such
NOTE a surface, and this could lead to accidents.
l The driving posture should be more upright Driving on snowy or icy roads l If any of following conditions occur while
and closer to the wheel than usual; adjust the Set the transfer shift lever to “4H” or “4L” position the vehicle is being driven, immediately
4 seat to a good position for easy steering and
pedal operation. Be sure to wear the seat belt.
(easy select 4WD), “4H” or “4HLc” position (su-
per select 4WD) in accordance with the road condi-
park your vehicle in a safe place and fol-
low these procedures:
l After driving on rough roads, check each tions, and then gradually depress the accelerator ped- • The needle in the temperature gauge
part of the vehicle and wash it thoroughly al for a smooth start. approaches the overheating zone.
with water. Refer to the “Vehicle care” sec- Refer to “Engine overheating” on
tion and “Inspection and maintenance follow- page 6-04.
ing rough road operation” on page 4-40. NOTE
• Automatic transmission fluid temper-
l The use of snow tyres and/or tyre chains is
ature warning lamp comes on.
Driving on dry paved road and highway recommended.
Refer to “When the A/T (automatic
Select “2H” position (easy select 4WD), “2H” or l Maintain a safe distance between vehicles,
transmission) fluid temperature warn-
“4H” position (super select 4WD) to drive on the avoid sudden braking, and use engine brak-
ing lamp comes on” on pages 4-18,
dry paved road. Especially on dry highway, never ing (downshifting).
4-23.
select the “4H” or “4L” position (easy select
4WD), “4HLc” or “4LLc” position (super select
4WD). CAUTION
l Avoid sudden braking, sudden accelera-
tion, and sharp turning; such operations
could cause skidding and spinouts.
4-38
l Driving over roads in coastal areas or roads

WARNING on which anti-skid preparations have been WARNING
spread can cause rust on the vehicle; wash
l When attempting to rock your vehicle out
the vehicle thoroughly as soon as possible af- l Avoid snaking down a sharp grade. De-
of a stuck position, be sure that the area scend the grade as straight as possible.
around the vehicle is clear of people and ter such use.
physical objects. The rocking motion may
cause the vehicle to suddenly launch for- Climbing sharp grades NOTE
ward or backward, causing injury or dam- Set the transfer shift lever to “4L” position (easy se- l When descending a sharp grade, if the brakes
age to nearby people or objects. lect 4WD), “4LLc” position (super select 4WD) to are applied suddenly because of an obstacle
maximize the engine torque. encountered, control of the vehicle could be
lost. Before descending the slope, walk down
NOTE it and confirm the path.
l Avoid sudden braking, acceleration, and turn- WARNING l Before descending a grade, it is necessary to
ing; such operations could result in the vehi- choose the appropriate gear. Avoid changing
cle becoming stuck. l Go straight up. Do not try to traverse gears or depressing the clutch while descend-
across a steep slope.
l If the vehicle becomes stuck in sandy or mud- ing the grade.
dy roads, it can often be moved a rocking mo- l If you begin to lose traction, ease off the
l MITSUBISHI MOTORS is not responsible
tion. Move the selector lever rhythmically be- accelerator pedal and gently turn the to the operator for any damage or injury
tween the “D” (DRIVE) and “R” (RE- steering wheel alternatively left and right caused or liability incurred by improper and
VERSE) position (with M/T, between 1st and
to regain adequate traction again. negligent operation of a vehicle. All techni- 4
Reverse), while applying slight pressure to ques of vehicle operation described herein de-
the accelerator pedal. NOTE pend on the skill and experience of the opera-
l It is recommended to start the vehicle with tor and other participating parties and any de-
parking brake partially, but not completely,
l Choose as smooth a slope as possible with
viation from the recommended operation in-
few stones or other obstacles.
applied by slightly pulling the parking brake structions above is at their own risk.
lever.
l Before attempting to drive up the slope, walk
up it to confirm that the vehicle can handle
After the vehicle has become free, do not for- the grade. Turning sharp corners
get to release the parking brake. When turning a sharp corner in “4H” or “4L” posi-
l If it is necessary to drive in extremely muddy
Descending sharp grades tion (easy select 4WD), “4HLc” or “4LLc” posi-
conditions, the use of tyre chains is recom- tion (super select 4WD) at low speed, a slight dif-
Set the transfer shift lever to “4L” position (easy se-
mended. Because the extent of muddy condi- ference in steering may be experienced similar to
lect 4WD), “4LLc” position (super select 4WD),
tions is difficult to judge and the vehicle as if the brakes were applied. This is called tight cor-
use the engine brake (downshifting) and descend
could become bogged down very deeply, op- ner braking and results from each of the 4 tyres be-
slowly.
eration should be at a low speed. If possible, ing at a different distance from the corner.
get out of the vehicle and check the condi- The phenomenon is peculiar to 4-wheel drive vehi-
tions ahead before proceeding. cles. If this occurs, either straighten the steering
wheel, or change to rear-wheel drive.
4-39
Crossing a stream Inspection and maintenance Cautions on handling of 4-wheel

4-wheel drive vehicles are not necessarily water-
proof. If the electrical circuits become wet, further following rough road operation drive vehicles
E00606700048 E00606800368
operation of the vehicle will be impossible; there- After operating the vehicle in rough road condi-
fore, avoid crossing streams unless absolutely nec-
essary. If crossing a stream is unavoidable, use the
tions, be sure to perform the following inspection Tyres and wheels
and maintenance procedures: Since the driving torque can be applied to the 4
following procedure:
1. Check depths of a stream and geographical
l Check that the vehicle has not been damaged wheels, the performance of the vehicle when oper-
by rocks, gravel, etc. ating in 4-wheel drive is greatly affected by the con-
features before attempting to cross a stream
and ford the stream where the water is as shal-
l Carefully wash the vehicle with water. dition of the tyres.
After washing, drive the vehicle slowly
low as practicable. while lightly depressing the brake pedal in or- Pay close attention to the tyres.
2. Set the transfer shift lever to “4L” position der to dry out the brakes. If the brakes still
(easy select 4WD), “4LLc” position (super se- l Install specified tyres on all wheels. Refer to
do not function properly, we recommend you “Tyres and wheels” on page 9-17.
lect 4WD). to have the brakes checked as soon as possible.
3. Drive slowly at a speed of approximately l Be sure to fit all 4 tyres and wheels of the
5 km/h (3 mph) to avoid splashing too much
l Remove the insects, dried grass, etc. clog- same size and type.
ging the radiator core. When replacement of any of the tyres or
water.
l After crossing a stream, be sure to have the wheels is necessary, replace all of them.
following items inspected at a MITSUBISHI l All tyres should be rotated whenever the
4 CAUTION
MOTORS Authorized Service Point and take
the necessary measures.
wear difference between the front and rear
tyres is recognizable.
• Check the brake system and, if necessary,
l Never cross a stream where the water is
have it serviced.
deep. Good vehicle performance cannot be expected if
Do not change gears while crossing the • Check the engine, transmission, transfer, there is a difference in wear between tyres. Refer to
stream. and differential oil or grease level and tur- “Tyre rotation” on page 8-13.
Frequent crossing of streams can adverse- bidity. If the oil or grease is milky, it indi-
cates water contamination. Replace it l Check the tyre inflation pressure regularly.
ly affect the life span of the vehicle; we rec-
ommend you to take the necessary meas- with new oil or grease.
ures to prepare, inspect, and repair the ve- • Grease the propeller shaft.
hicle. • Check the inside of the vehicle. If ingress
of water is found, dry the carpet etc.
• Inspect the headlamps. If the headlamp
After crossing a stream, apply the brakes to be sure bulb is flooded with water, we recom-
they are functioning properly. If the brakes are wet mend you to have it drained.
and not functioning properly, dry them out by driv-
ing slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal.
Inspect each part of the vehicle carefully.
4-40
Only when you cannot receive a towing service

CAUTION from a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- CAUTION
ice Point or commercial tow truck service, tow
l Always use tyres of the same size, same
your vehicle carefully in accordance with the in- l Be sure to shift the transfer shift lever to
type, and same brand, and which have no “2H” position and transport the vehicle
wear differences. Using tyres of different structions given in “Towing” on page 6-20 . with the driving wheels on a carriage
size, type, brands or degree of wear, will (Type A, C or D) as illustrated.
increase the differential oil temperature, Never try to tow with the transfer shift lev-
resulting in possible damage to the driver in “4H” or “4L” position (easy select
ing system. Further, the drive train will 4WD), “4H”, “4HLc” or “4LLc” position
be subjected to excessive loading, possibly (super select 4WD) and with the front or
leading to oil leakage, component seizure, rear wheels on the ground (Type A or B)
or other serious faults. as illustrated. This could result in dam-
age to the drivetrain, or unstable towing.
If you cannot shift the transfer shift lever
Towing to “2H” position or the transmission is
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have
malfunctioning or damaged, transport
it done by your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
the vehicle with all the wheels on a car-
ized Service Point or a commercial tow truck service.
riage (Type C or D) as illustrated.
In the following cases, transport the vehicle using a
tow truck.
Jacking up a 4-wheel drive vehicle
4
l The engine runs but the vehicle does not
move or abnormal noise is produced.
l Inspection of the vehicle’s underside reveals
that oil or some other fluid is leaking. WARNING
l Do not crank the engine while jacking up
the vehicle.
The tyre on the ground may turn and the
vehicle may roll off the jack.
Clutch operation
Quick or slight clutch engagement made while the
engine is running at high speed will cause damage
to the clutch and transmission because the tractive
force is very great.
Operate the pedal slowly and positively.
4-41
Limited-slip differential* Braking WARNING

E00606900037 E00607001494
A limited-slip differential is applied for the rear All the parts of the brake system are critical to safe-
wheel differential only. The features of this limited- ty. We recommend you to have the vehicle
l If the power assist is lost or if either
brake hydraulic system stops working
slip differential are described below: checked at regular intervals according to the serv- properly, have your vehicle checked im-
ice booklet. mediately.
Just as with a conventional differential, the wheel
on one side is allowed to turn at a different speed
from the wheel on the other side when the vehicle CAUTION Warning lamp
is cornering. The difference between the limited- The brake warning lamp illuminates to indicate a
slip differential and a conventional differential is l Avoid driving habits that cause heavy fault in the braking system. Refer to “Brake warn-
that if the wheel on one side of the vehicle loses trac- braking and never “ride” the brakes by ing lamp” on page 3-08.
tion, a greater amount of torque is applied to the resting your foot on the brake pedal
wheel on the other side to improve traction. while driving. When brakes are wet
It causes brake overheating and fade. Check the brake system while driving at a low
speed immediately after starting, especially when
NOTE
Brake system the brakes are wet, to confirm they work normally.
l Even if there is a difference in the amount of The service brake is divided into two brake cir- A film of water can be formed on the brake discs
traction the wheels can get, if both of them or brake drums and prevent normal braking after
cuits. And your vehicle is equipped with power
4 are spinning, the limited-slip differential will
not be effective. brakes. If one brake circuit fails, the other is availa- driving in heavy rain or through large puddles, or
after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry the
ble to stop the vehicle. If you should lose the pow-
er assist for some reason, the brakes will still work. brakes out by driving slowly while lightly depress-
ing the brake pedal.
CAUTION In these situations, even if the brake pedal moves
down to the very end of its possible stroke or re-
l Never start the engine while one of the sists being depressed, keep depressing the brake ped- When driving downhill
rear wheels is jacked up and the other in al down harder and further than usual; stop driving It is important to take advantage of the engine brak-
contact with the ground; doing so may as soon as possible and have the brake system re- ing by shifting to a lower shift position while driv-
cause the vehicle to jump forward. paired. ing on steep downhill roads in order to prevent the
l When attempting to extract the vehicle brakes from overheating.
from snow, mud, etc., and the engine is
run continuously at high speed, the limi- WARNING
ted-slip differential will be adversely af-
fected. l Do not turn off the engine while your ve-
hicle is in motion. If you turn off the en-
gine while driving, the power assistance
for the braking system will stop working
and your brakes will not work effectively.
4-42
WARNING Anti-lock brake system (ABS)* l Operation of ABS is not restricted to situa-
tions where brakes are applied suddenly.
E00607100775
Environmental conditions can have an effect on This system may also operate to prevent
l Do not leave any objects near the brake
braking. During sudden braking when there is wheel lock when you are driving over man-
pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; do-
ing so could prevent the full pedal stroke snow, ice, oil, water etc. on the road surface, a skid holes, steel road-work plates, or the vehicle
that would be necessary in an emergency. may occur. In this situation, steering control and is driven over steps or level differences in
Make sure that the pedal can be operated braking effectiveness is reduced and the stopping the road, road markings, or other surfaces
freely at all times. Make sure the floor distance is increased. The vehicle may also go into which are difficult for the wheels to grip.
mat is securely held in place. an uncontrolled spin. l When the ABS is activated, you may feel the
The ABS helps prevent the wheels from locking dur- brake pedal pulsation and hear a characteris-
ing braking, thus maintaining directional stability, tic noise. Also at this time, you may feel as if
Brake pads and linings ensuring controllability and providing optimum the pedal attempts to resist being depressed.
l Avoid hard braking situations. braking force. In this situation, to let the ABS work for
New brakes need to be broken-in by moder- you, just hold the brake pedal down more
ate use for the first 200 km (124 miles). Driving hints firmly. Do not pump the brake. This pump-
l The disc brakes are provided with a warning
l With ABS fitted, steering during sudden braking will result in reduced braking perform-
device which emits a shrieking metallic ing (when the ABS functions) differs slightly ance.
sound while braking if the brake pads have from when the brakes are not being applied.
reached their wear limit. Steer the vehicle carefully in these conditions.
If you hear this sound, have the brake pads re-
placed immediately. l Always maintain the same distance from the CAUTION 4
vehicle in front of you as you would for a ve-
hicle not equipped with ABS. l Even the ABS cannot prevent the natural
laws of physics from acting on the vehi-
Compared with vehicles not fitted with ABS,
WARNING your vehicle may require a longer stopping
cle. It cannot for instance avoid accidents
that may result from excessive speed on
l Driving with worn brake pads will make distance in the following cases: bends or following another vehicle too
it harder to stop, and can cause an acci- • Driving on gravel or snow-covered roads. closely or aquaplaning. It should remain
dent. • Driving with tyre chains installed. the driver’s task to observe safety precau-
• Driving on roads where the road surface tions to judge speeds and brake applica-
is pitted or has other differences in sur- tions correctly in such conditions.
face height.
• Driving on bumpy roads or other poor driv- l Be sure to use tyres of the same type and
size on 4 wheels.
ing surfaces. If tyre types or sizes are mixed, ABS may
not function normally.
4-43
If the warning lamp illuminates while

CAUTION CAUTION driving
l Never install a limited-slip differential, l If the warning lamp stays on or does not E00607300663
which is not a MITSUBISHI MOTORS illuminate when you start the vehicle, it in-
genuine part, as the ABS may not func- dicates that the ABS is not functioning If only the ABS warning lamp illuminates
tion normally. and that only the standard brake system l Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
We recommend you to consult a is in operation. (In this condition the stand- Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ard hydraulic brake system will still func- Restart the engine and check to see whether
Service Point. tion.) We recommend you to have your ve- the lamp goes out after a few minutes driv-
hicle inspected as soon as possible. ing; if it then remains off during driving,
there is no problem.
ABS warning lamp However, if the lamp does not go out, or if it
E00607201164 NOTE lights up again when the vehicle is driven,
The ABS warning lamp should illuminate when the we recommend you to have the vehicle
ignition switch is turned “ON”, and should go off
l On vehicles with the rear differential lock,
ABS and the active stability & traction con- checked as soon as possible.
in a few seconds. trol (ASTC) functions are suspended while l The ABS warning lamp can illuminate if the
the rear differential lock is activated. battery voltage is insufficient when the en-
ASTC indication lamp, Active Stability Con- gine is started. In this case, it does not indi-
trol function OFF indication lamp, ABS warn- cate an ABS fault.
4 ing lamp and brake warning lamp are illumi- Charge the battery by allowing the engine to
nated while these functions are suspended. idle for a while.
It does not indicate a problem. When the rear If the battery has been charged but the ABS
differential lock is disengaged, these lamps warning lamp continues to illuminate or illu-
go out and function again. minates intermittently, have the vehicle in-
Refer to “ASTC indication lamp, ASTC OFF spected.
indication lamp” on page 4-47.
l On vehicles with rear differential lock, ABS If the ABS warning lamp and brake warning
functionality is suspended while the rear dif- lamp illuminate at the same time
ferential lock is operating. l The ABS and brake force distribution func-
The ABS warning lamp is illuminated while tion may not work, so hard braking could
ABS functionality is suspended. It does not make the vehicle unstable.
indicate a problem. When the rear differen- Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
tial lock is disengaged, the ABS warning Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact a
lamp goes off and the ABS functions again. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Refer to “Rear differential lock” on page Point.
4-34.
4-44
NOTE Rear
Power steering system
l Immediately after the vehicle starts moving E00607400071
after engine start up, a whining sound of a mo- When the engine is stopped, the power steering sys-
tor will be heard from the engine compart- tem will not function and it will require greater man-
ment. If the brake pedal is depressed at that ual effort to operate the steering wheel. Keep this
moment, you can feel the brake pedal pulsat- in mind in particular when towing the vehicle. Nev-
ing. er turn off the engine while driving.
This pulsation is due to the self-diagnosis op- Periodically check the power steering fluid level.
eration of the ABS and does not indicate a
malfunction.
l After driving on snowy roads, remove any CAUTION
snow and ice which may have become ad-
hered to the wheel areas. l Do not hold the steering wheel in the fully
When doing this, be careful not to damage l The ABS becomes operative after the vehicle turned position (either left or right), for
has accelerated to a speed in excess of approx- longer than 10 seconds.
the wheel speed sensors (A) and cables loca- imately 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating
ted at each wheel on vehicles equipped with This can cause damage to the power steer-
when the vehicle decelerates to a speed being system.
an ABS. low approximately 7 km/h (4 mph).
Front
4
4-45
Active Stability & Traction l Some vibration will be felt in the vehicle
body and a whining sound of a motor will be
Active Stability Control function
E00616900056
Control (ASTC)* heard from the engine compartment when The Active Stability Control function is designed
E00616700344
the ASTC functions. This is a normal result to improve the vehicle’s stability by restraining its
The active stability & traction control (ASTC) tendency to slip sideways (for example, when round-
of the ASTC operation, and does not indicate
takes overall control of the anti-lock brake system, ing a curve in slippery conditions, or when the driv-
a malfunction.
traction control function and Active Stability Con- er takes rapid steering action to avoid an obstacle).
trol function to help maintain the vehicle’s control l The ASTC does not operate while the ABS
warning lamp is illuminated. It works by controlling the engine output and brake
and traction. Please read this section in conjunction on each wheel.
with the page on the anti-lock brake system, trac- l On vehicles with the rear differential lock,
the ASTC and ABS functions are suspended
tion control function and Active Stability Control while the rear differential lock is activated. NOTE
function. ASTC indication lamp, ASTC OFF indica-
tion lamp and ABS warning lamp are illumi-
l On vehicles with the rear differential lock,
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ® p. 4-43 the Active Stability Control function does
nated while these functions are suspended. It not operate when the rear differential lock is
Active Traction Control function ® p. 4-47 does not indicate a problem. When the rear
Active Stability Control function ® p. 4-46 activated.
differential lock is disengaged, these lamps
go out and function again.
Refer to “ABS warning lamp” on page 4-44,
CAUTION “ASTC indication lamp, ASTC OFF indica-
4 l Do not over-rely on the ASTC. This sys-
tion lamp” on page 4-47.
tem, like any other system, has limits and
cannot help you to maintain traction and Driving hints
control of the vehicle in all circumstan- E00616800039
ces. Reckless driving may lead to acci- When extricating the vehicle from mud, sand or
dents. Always drive carefully, taking into fresh snow, you may find that operation of the
account the traffic, road and environmen- ASTC prevents the engine speed from increasing
tal conditions. in response to depression of the accelerator pedal.
l Be sure to use the same specified type and If this happens and the vehicle remains stuck as a
size of tyre on all 4 wheels. Otherwise, the result, deactivate the ASC function by pressing the
ASTC may not work correctly. “ASC OFF” switch. The vehicle will then be easier
to extricate. (Brake control of the ATC function is
still working to prevent wheel spins when the ASC
NOTE function is deactivated by pressing the “ASC OFF”
l After your vehicle is driven a short distance switch.)
after starting the engine, a click is heard from
the engine compartment; however, this is on-
ly the sound of ASTC being checked.
4-46
“ASC OFF” switch Active Traction Control function indication lamp is illuminated when the Active
The Active Stability Control function is automati- E00617000025 Stability Control function is OFF.
cally activated when the ignition switch is turned to On slippery surfaces, active traction control func-
the “ON” position. You can deactivate the system tion prevents the drive wheels from excessive spin-
by pressing the “ASC OFF” switch when the vehi- ning, thus helping the vehicle to start moving from
cle speed is below about 40 km/h (25 mph). To re- a stop. It also provides sufficient driving force and
activate the Active Stability Control function, press steering performance as the vehicle turns at acceler-
the “ASC OFF” switch again. It is strongly recom- ated speeds.
mended that the Active Stability Control function
normally be kept activated.
CAUTION
Type 1
l When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
road, be sure to install snow tyres and
drive the vehicle at moderate speeds.
ASTC indication lamp, ASTC OFF in-

dication lamp CAUTION
Type 2
E00617100071
The Active Stability Control function and active
l When indication lamp blinks, Active
Stability Control function or active trac-
4
traction control function share the same indication tion control function is operating, which
lamp. means that the road is slippery or that
The indication lamps should illuminate when the ig- your vehicle’s wheels are slipping exces-
nition switch is turned to the “ON” position and sively. If this happens, drive slower with
should go off after a few seconds. less accelerator input.
If the indication lamps stay on or do not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po- l If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
tem while driving, the indication lamp
sition, we recommend you to have your vehicle in-
will illuminate.
spected as soon as possible.
In these cases, follow these procedures:
NOTE indication lamp blinks when the Active Stabili-
l If the vehicle speed increases to about ty Control function or active traction control func-
120 km/h (74 mph) with the Active Stability tion is operating.
Control function deactivated, the Active Sta-
bility Control function automatically starts op-
erating. To subsequently stop the Active Sta-
bility Control function, stop the vehicle and
press the “ASC OFF” switch again.
4-47
CAUTION Cruise control*

E00609100779
• If the temperature in the braking sys- Cruise control is an automatic speed control system
tem continues to increase due to con- that keeps a set speed. It can be activated at about
tinuous brake control on a slippery 40 km/h (25 mph) or more.
road surface, the indication lamp
will illuminate, and operation of the
Active Stability Control function and CAUTION
active traction control function will be
suspended to protect the brake sys-
l When you do not wish to drive at a set
speed, turn off the cruise control for safety.
tem. (Normal operation of the vehicle
will not be affected.) Park your vehi-
l Do not use cruise control when driving
conditions will not allow you to stay at
cle in a safe place. When the tempera- the same speed, such as in heavy traffic
ture in the braking system has come CAUTION or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
down, the indication lamp will go covered, wet, slippery, on a steep down-
off and the Active Stability Control l If the vehicle is towed with the ignition
hill slope.
switch in the “ON” position and only the
function and active traction control l On vehicles with manual transmission, do
front wheels or only the rear wheels
function will start operating again. not move the gearshift lever to the “N”
raised off the ground, the ASTC may op-
4 • If the indication lamp does not go
out even though the above procedure
erate, resulting in an accident. When tow- (Neutral) position while driving at a set
speed without depressing the clutch ped-
ing the vehicle with the front wheels
is followed, there could be a problem raised, keep the ignition switch in the al. The engine will run too fast and might
in the system. “LOCK” or “ACC” position. When tow- be damaged.
Stop the engine and start the engine ing the vehicle with the rear wheels
again and check whether the indi- raised, keep the ignition switch in the
cation lamp goes out. If the indication NOTE
“ACC” position.
lamp goes out, there is no abnormal Refer to “Towing” on page 6-20. l Cruise control may not be able to keep your
condition. speed on uphills or downhills.
If the indication lamp illuminates l Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.
even after your vehicle is driven a You may use the accelerator pedal if you
short distance after restarting the en- want to stay at your set speed.
gine, we recommend you to have your l Your speed may increase to more than the
vehicle checked as soon as possible. set speed on a steep downhill. You must use
the brake to control your speed. As a result,
the set speed driving is deactivated.
4-48
Cruise control switches To activate 2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired

E00624100103 E00609300771 speed, then press and release the “COAST
1. With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi- SET” switch (B) when the “CRUISE” indica-
tion, press the “ON OFF” switch (A) to turn tion lamp is illuminated. The vehicle will
on the cruise control. The “CRUISE” indica- then maintain the desired speed.
tion lamp in the meter cluster will come on.
A- “ON OFF” switch

Used to turn on and off the cruise control.
B- “COAST SET” switch

Used to reduce the set speed and to set the desired
NOTE 4
speed.
l When you release the “COAST SET”
switch, the vehicle speed will be set.
C- “ACC RES” switch
Used to increase the set speed and to return to the To increase the set speed
E00609400570
original set speed. NOTE There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.
l If the cruise control is on when the ignition
D- “CANCEL” switch switch is turned to the “LOCK” or “ACC” po- “ACC RES” switch
Used to deactivate the set speed driving. sition, cruise control will be on automatically Press and hold the “ACC RES” switch (C) while
the next time you start the engine. driving at the set speed, and your speed will then
NOTE The “CRUISE” indication lamp will also be gradually increase.
on.
l When operating the cruise control switches,
press the cruise control switches correctly. l If the battery voltage is insufficient, the mem-
The set speed driving may be deactivated au- ory data for the cruise control may be erased.
tomatically if two or more switches of the As a result, the “CRUISE” indication lamp
cruise control are pressed at the same time. may not come on when you restart the engine.
If this happens, press the “ON OFF” switch
once again to turn on the cruise control.
4-49
When you reach your desired speed, release the Accelerator pedal When you reach your desired speed, release the
switch. Your new cruising speed is now set. While driving at the set speed, use the accelerator switch. Your new cruising speed is now set.
pedal to reach your desired speed and then press
the “COAST SET” switch (B) and release the
switch momentarily to set a new desired cruising
speed.
To increase your speed in small amounts, press the To slow down your speed in small amounts, press
“ACC RES” switch for less than about 1 second the “COAST SET” switch for less than about 1 sec-
and release it. Each time you press the “ACC RES” ond and release it.
4 switch, your vehicle will go about 1.6 km/h
(1 mph) faster.
Each time you press the “COAST SET” switch,
your vehicle will slow down by about 1.6 km/h
To decrease the set speed
E00609500500 (1 mph).
There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed.
“COAST SET” switch

Press and hold the “COAST SET” switch (B) while
driving at the set speed, and your speed will slow
down gradually.
4-50
Brake pedal To temporarily increase or decrease To deactivate

While driving at the set speed, use the brake pedal, the speed E00609701088
which disengages the cruise control, then press the E00619500154 The set speed driving can be deactivated as follows:
“COAST SET” switch (B) and release the switch l Press the “ON OFF” switch (A). (Cruise con-
momentarily to set a new desired cruising speed. To temporarily increase the speed trol will be turned off.)
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would normal- l Press the “CANCEL” switch (D).
ly. When you release the pedal, you will return to l Depress the brake pedal.
your set speed.
4
The set speed driving is deactivated automatically
To temporarily decrease the speed
in any of the following ways.
Depress the brake pedal to decrease the speed. To
return to the previously set speed, press the “ACC l When you depress the clutch pedal (on vehi-
cles with M/T).
RES” switch (C).
Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page 4-52. l When your speed slows to about 15 km/h
(9 mph) or more below the set speed because
of a hill, etc.
l When your speed slows to about 40 km/h
(25 mph) or less.
l When the active stability & traction control
(ASTC) starts operating. (if so equipped)
Refer to “Active Stability & Traction Con-
trol (ASTC)” on page 4-46.
4-51
WARNING To resume the set speed

E00609800561
Cargo loads
E00609901123
If the set speed driving is deactivated by the condi-
l On vehicles with A/T, although, the set
tion described in “To deactivate” on page 4-51,
speed driving will be deactivated when Cargo loads precautions
you can resume the previously set speed by press-
shifting to the “N” (NEUTRAL) position,
ing the “ACC RES” switch (C) while driving at a
never move the selector lever to the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position while driving.
speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or higher.
CAUTION
You would have no engine braking and
could cause a serious accident. l When loading luggage, be careful to the
following.
• Stow cargo and luggage in the cargo
Also, the set speed driving may be deactivated as area whenever possible.
follows: • Distribute cargo or luggage evenly not
l When the engine speed rises and approaches to be unbalanced in weight.
the tachometer's red zone (the red-coloured • Do not place cargo or luggage on the
part of the tachometer dial). instrument panel.
Also, do not stack up cargo or luggage
on the front passenger’s seat or the
CAUTION rear seat.
4 l When the set speed driving is deactivated
Having the driver’s vision blocked,
and your cargo being thrown inside
automatically in any situation other than Under either of the following conditions, however, the cabin if you suddenly have to
those listed above, there may be a system using the switch does not allow you to resume the brake can cause a serious accident or
malfunction. previously set speed. In these situations, repeat the injury.
Press the “ON-OFF” switch to turn off speed setting procedure:
the cruise control and have it inspected l The “ON OFF” switch is pressed.
by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ized Service Point. l The ignition switch is turned OFF.
l “CRUISE” indication lamp is turned OFF.
4-52
Trailer towing Towing bar mounting specifications Single cab, Double cab
E00610000462 See the following table for fixing points (A) for the
In order to tow a trailer with your vehicle, when hav- towing bar.
ing a trailer towing device mounted that meets all
relevant regulations in your area, consult a
Club cab
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
The regulations concerning the towing of a trailer
may differ from country to country. You are ad-
vised to obey the regulations in each area.
CAUTION
l Danger of Accident!
A towing bar should be fitted according
to MITSUBISHI MOTORS guidelines.
NOTE
l If you are going to tow a trailer, pay careful
attention to the following points. 4
Maximum towable weight with brake
and maximum trailer-nose weight
Never exceed the maximum towable weight with
brake and the maximum trailer-nose weight as lis-
ted in the specifications.
(Refer to “Vehicle weight” on page 9-10.)
If you tow a trailer at an altitude of more than
1,000 m above sea-level, reduce your weight by
10 % of the gross combination weight for every in-
crease of 1,000 m above sea-level, as the engine out-
put is lowered owing to decrease in atmospheric
pressure.
4-53
Club cab Single cab, Double cab (Vehicles without long bed) Double cab (Vehicles with long bed)
1 30 mm 30 mm 30 mm
2 55 mm 55 mm 55 mm
3 115 mm 60 mm 60 mm
4 872 mm 812 mm 812 mm
5 20 mm 20 mm 20 mm
6 85 mm 85 mm 85 mm
7 699 - 712 mm 678 - 701 mm, 578 - 581 mm* 679 - 716 mm, 576 mm*
8 656 - 669 mm 638 - 658 mm, 537 - 541 mm* 639 - 673 mm, 536 mm*
9 626 - 639 mm 608 - 628 mm, 507 - 511 mm* 609 - 643 mm, 506 mm*
10 410 - 423 mm 399 - 412 mm, 287 - 291 mm* 394 - 418 mm, 304 mm*
11 486 - 499 mm 479 - 488 mm, 485 - 490 mm* 474 - 494 mm, 488 mm*
12 897 mm 897 mm 897 mm
4 13 1,251 mm 1,136 mm 1,316 mm
14 70 mm 70 mm 70 mm
15 502.5 mm 502.5 mm 502.5 mm
16 540.5 mm 540.5 mm 540.5 mm
Item 7, 8, 9, 10, 11: at kerb weight

*: 2WD vehicles with 15 inch tyres
NOTE Operating hints l To make full use of engine braking, change

l The values under item 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 are ap- l Do not let the clutch slip (vehicles with a M/ to a lower gear before descending a slope.
plicable to unladen vehicles. These values a only) and do not increase the engine speed l The body, brakes, clutch, and chassis will be
can also be varied depending on the tyre size, more than necessary when starting. under additional strain when towing a trailer.
optional equipment and suspension condi- l Be sure that the driving speed does not ex- l The heavier weight and higher rolling and air
tions. ceed the maximum speed for trailer operation. resistance will increase fuel consumption.
l To prevent shocks from the overrun brake, de-
press the brake pedal lightly at first and then
more strongly.
4-54
Additional precautions for vehicles equipped with

an automatic transmission
It is recommended the “2” (SECOND) position
(4A/T) or 2nd gear in sports mode (5A/T) on slopes
or at low speed. Use the “L” (LOW) position
(4A/T) or 1st gear in sports mode (5A/T) in moun-
tainous areas in order to make better use of engine
braking and to assist the brake system. However,
be sure that the speed does not exceed the maxi-
mum speed limit for the selected gear.
4-55
For pleasant driving
Ventilators....................................................................................5-02
Heater/Manual air conditioning*..................................................5-03
Automatic air conditioning*.........................................................5-08
Important operation tips for the air conditioning..........................5-12
Air purifier*..................................................................................5-12
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player*................5-13
To use the external audio input function*....................................5-27
Steering wheel remote control switch*........................................5-28
Error codes....................................................................................5-30
Audio system anti-theft feature....................................................5-32
Handling of compact discs...........................................................5-32
Antenna.........................................................................................5-34
Sun visors.....................................................................................5-35
Vanity mirror*..............................................................................5-36
Ashtray..........................................................................................5-36
Cigarette lighter............................................................................5-37
Accessory socket*........................................................................5-38
Digital clock*...............................................................................5-39 5
Interior lamps................................................................................5-39
Storage spaces...............................................................................5-41
Cup holder*..................................................................................5-44
Bottle holder.................................................................................5-45
Convenient hook...........................................................................5-46
Coat hook*....................................................................................5-46
First-aid kit and warning triangle securing bands*......................5-46
Ventilators Side ventilators These symbols are used in the next several illustra-
tions to demonstrate the quantity of air coming
E00700100344 The ventilator can be opened and closed with the di-
al (B). from the ventilators.
: Small amount of air from the ventilators
- Open : Medium amount of air from the ventilators
( )
: Large amount of air from the ventilators
- Close
( )
Face position
Adjust the direction of the air flow by moving the Air flows only to the upper part of the passenger
knob (C). compartment.
LHD RHD
1- Centre ventilators
2- Side ventilators
Air flow and direction adjustments

E00700200749
Centre ventilators
5 Adjust the direction of the air flow by moving the

knob (A).
Foot/Face position
NOTE
Air flows to the upper part of the passenger com-
l On air conditioned vehicles, the cool air
partment, and flows to the leg area.
from the ventilators may appear as a mist.
This is due to moist air being suddenly
cooled by the air conditioning. This will
clear after a few moments.
Changing the mode selection

E00700301008
To change the position and amount of air flowing
from the ventilators, turn the mode selection dial.
(Refer to “Mode selection dial” on pages 5-04,
5-09.)
: Optional equipment
5-02
NOTE NOTE Heater/Manual air conditioning*

l With the mode selection dial between the l With the mode selection dial between the E00700500410
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly to “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly to The heater/air conditioning can only be used while
the upper part of the passenger compartment. the leg area. With the mode selection dial be- the engine is running.
With the mode selection dial between the tween the “ ” and “ ” positions, air
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly to flows mainly to the windscreen and door win-
Control panel
E00700600512
the leg area. dows.
Foot position Demister position LHD

Air flows mainly to the leg area. Air flows mainly to the windscreen and the door
windows.
RHD
5
Foot/Demister position
Air flows to the leg area, the windscreen and the
door windows.
1- Mode selection dial

2- Rear window demister switch ® p. 3-40
3- Blower speed selection dial
4- Air conditioning switch*
5- Temperature control dial
6- Air selection lever
5-03
Blower speed selection dial NOTE Air is recirculated inside the passenger com-
E00700700119
l While the engine coolant temperature is low, partment.
Select the blower speed by turning the blower
the temperature of the air from the heater
speed selection dial clockwise or anticlockwise.
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up, LHD
The blower speed will gradually increase as the di-
even if you have selected warm air with the
al is turned to the right.
dial.
When the blower speed selection dial is set to the
“OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow will stop.
Mode selection dial
E00701100266
(Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page
5-02.)
RHD
Temperature control dial

5 E00700900209
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to
make the air warmer. Turn it anticlockwise to
make the air cooler.
Air selection lever
E00701300460
To change the air selection, use the air selection lev-
er.
l “ ” Outside air
Outside air is introduced into the passenger
compartment.
l “ ” Recirculated air
5-04
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or anti-

CAUTION RHD
clockwise to the desired temperature. Select the de-
sired blower speed.
l Normally, use the “ ” (outside) posi-
tion to keep the windscreen and side win-
dows clear and quickly remove fog or LHD
frost from the windscreen.
If high cooling performance is desired, or
if the outside air is dusty or otherwise con-
taminated, use the “ ” (recirculation)
position. Set the air selection lever to the
“ ” (outside) position periodically to in-
crease ventilation so that the windows do
not become fogged up. Push the switch again and the air conditioning com-
l Use of the “ ” (recirculation) position pressor will stop and the indication lamp goes off.
for extended time may cause the windows
to fog up.
CAUTION RHD
Air conditioning switch* l When using the air conditioning, the
E00701500781 idling speed may slightly increase as the
Push the switch, and the air conditioning compres- air conditioning compressor is switched
sor will turn on. The air conditioning indication on/off automatically. While the vehicle
lamp (A) will come on. with an A/T is stationary, fully depress
the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle
5
LHD from creeping.
Operating the air conditioning system

E00701800247
Heating NOTE
Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position l For maximum heat, set the blower speed at
and set the air selection lever to the “ ” (outside) the 3rd position.
position.
5-05
Cooling (vehicles with air conditioning)

E00701900424 CAUTION RHD
l If the outside air is dusty or otherwise con-

LHD taminated, or if high cooling performance
is desired, set air selection lever to the
“ ” (recirculation) position and the tem-
perature control dial all the way to the left.
Set to the “ ” (outside) position period-
ically to increase ventilation so that the
windows do not become fogged up.
Combination of unheated air and heated air

E00702000451 Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated or
Select the mode selection dial to the position slightly warm air (depending upon temperature set-
shown in the illustration and set the air selection lev- ting) flows to the upper part of the passenger com-
RHD er to the “ ” (outside) position. partment.
The air flow will be directed to the leg area and the Demisting of the windscreen and door windows
upper part of the passenger compartment. Select E00702100579
the desired blower speed.
LHD CAUTION
5 l For safety, make sure you have a clear
view through all the windows.
To remove frost or mist from the windscreen and

door windows, use the mode selection dial (“ ”
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi- or “ ”).
tion.
2. Set the air selection lever to the “ ” (out-
side) position.
3. Push the air conditioning switch (B).
4. Change the temperature by turning the con-
trol dial clockwise or anticlockwise.
5. Select the desired blower speed.
5-06
For ordinary demisting RHD RHD

Use this setting to keep the windscreen and door
windows clear of mist, and to keep the leg area heat-
ed (when driving in rain or snow).
LHD
1. Set the air selection lever to the “ ” (out- 1. Set the air selection lever to the “ ” (out-
side) position. side) position.
2. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi- 2. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-
tion. tion.
3. Select your desired blower speed by turning 3. Set the blower to the maximum speed.
the blower speed selection dial. 4. Set the temperature to the maximum temper-
4. Select your desired temperature by turning ature position.
the temperature control dial. 5. Push the air conditioning switch (B).
5. Push the air conditioning switch (B). (vehicles with air conditioning)
(vehicles with air conditioning)
For quick demisting NOTE
l To demist effectively, direct the air flow 5
from the side ventilators towards the door win-
LHD dows.
l Do not set the temperature control dial to the
max. cool position. Cool air will blow
against the window glasses and form mist on
them.
5-07
Introduction of outside air

E00702200235
Automatic air conditioning* NOTE
To introduce air into the vehicle during hot weath-
E00702400110 l There is an interior air temperature sensor
The air conditioning can only be used while the en- (A) in the illustrated position.
er, set the air selection lever to the “ ” (outside) gine is running. Never place anything on top of the sensor,
position and set the temperature control dial to the since doing so will prevent it from function-
positions shown in the illustration. Be sure to set Control panel ing properly.
the temperature control dial all the way to the left. E00702501192
Select the desired blower speed.

LHD RHD
Type 1
LHD
Blower speed selection dial

Type 2 E00702800273
Select the blower speed by turning the blower
5 RHD
speed selection dial clockwise or anticlockwise.
The blower speed will gradually increase as the di-
al is turned to the right.
1- Mode selection dial

2- Blower speed selection dial
3- Temperature control dial
NOTE
4- Rear window demister switch ® p. 3-40
l Turn the mode selection dial clockwise and
5- Air conditioning switch
air will flow to the leg area and the windscreen.
6- Air selection switch
5-08
When the blower speed selection dial is set to the Temperature control dial NOTE
“OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow will stop. E00703000575
l While the engine coolant temperature is low,
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to
the temperature of the air from the heater
make the air warmer. Turn it anticlockwise to
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
make the air cooler.
even if you have selected warm air with the
dial.
Type 1
Mode selection dial
E00703200274
(Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page
5-02.)
Type 2
Air selection switch

E00703400638
To change the air selection, simply press the air se-
lection switch.
l Outside air {Indication lamp (A) is OFF}
Outside air is introduced into the passenger
compartment.
5-09
l Recirculated air {Indication lamp (A) is ON} Air conditioning switch Operating the system in automatic
Air is recirculated inside the passenger com- E00703501128
mode
partment. Push the switch, and the air conditioning compres- E00704100919
sor will turn on. The air conditioning indication
lamp (A) will come on.
In normal conditions, use the system in the AUTO

CAUTION mode and follow these procedures:
Push the switch again, and the air conditioning com- 1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the “AU-
l Normally, use the outside position to keep pressor will stop and the indication lamp goes off. TO” position.
the windscreen and side windows clear
and quickly remove fog or frost from the 2. Select the temperature control dial to the de-
5 windscreen.
If high cooling performance is desired, or
CAUTION sired temperature. The temperature can be
set within a range of 17 to 27 (Type 1) or 20
to 30 (Type 2). The temperature will gradual-
if the outside air is dusty or otherwise con- l When using the air conditioning, the
ly increase as the dial is turned to the right.
taminated use the recirculation position. idling speed may slightly increase as the
Switch to the outside position periodically air conditioning compressor is switched 3. Set the mode selection dial to the “AUTO”
to increase ventilation so that the win- on/off automatically. While the vehicle position.
dows do not become fogged up. with an A/T is stationary, fully depress 4. Push the air conditioning switch to operate
the air conditioning. When the air condition-
l Use of the recirculation position for exten- the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle
ing operates, the indication lamp (A) in the di-
ded time may cause the windows to fog up. from creeping.
al will come on.
The outlet port (except “ ”) and blower speed,

and ON/OFF of air conditioning will be controlled
automatically.
5-10
NOTE To remove frost or mist from the windscreen and For quick demisting
l Set the temperature at about 22 (Type 1) or door windows, use the mode selection dial (“ ”
25 (Type 2) under normal conditions. or “ ”).
l When the temperature is set to the highest or For ordinary demisting
the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
tion, the air selection, mode selection, blower Use this setting to keep the windscreen and door
speed and the air conditioning will be auto- windows clear of mist, and to keep the leg area heat-
matically changed as follows. ed (when driving in rain or snow).
Also, if manually operated after an automatic
changeover, manual operation will be selec-
ted.
• Quick Heating (When the temperature is
set to the highest setting)
Outside air will be introduced, the air
flow will select foot position, and the air 1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-
conditioning will stop. tion.
• Quick Cooling (When the temperature is 2. Set the blower to the maximum speed.
set to the lowest setting) 3. Set the temperature to the highest position.
Inside air will be recirculated, the air
flow will select face position, and the air NOTE
conditioning will operate. l While the mode selection dial is set to the
1. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside
position. “ ” position, the air conditioning will oper-
Operating the system in manual mode
E00704200040
2. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi- ate automatically and the outside air position
will also be selected automatically.
5
tion.
Blower speed and ventilator mode may be control- 3. Select your desired blower speed by turning l To demist effectively, direct the air flow
led manually by setting the blower speed selection the blower speed selection dial. from the side ventilators towards the door win-
dial and the mode selection dial to the desired posi- 4. Select your desired temperature by turning dows.
tions. To return to automatic operation, set the dials the temperature control dial. l Do not set the temperature control dial to the
to the “AUTO” position. 5. Push the air conditioning switch (B). max. cool position. Cool air will blow
against the window glasses and form mist on
Demisting of the windscreen and door windows
E00704300689 them.
CAUTION
l For safety, make sure you have a clear
view through all the windows.
5-11
Important operation tips for the It is recommended that the refrigerant be recovered
and recycled for further use.
Air purifier*
air conditioning E00708400675
An air filter has been incorporated into this air con-
E00708300951
During a long period of disuse ditioning so that dirt and dust are cleaned from the
l Park the vehicle in the shade. The air conditioning should be operated for at least air.
Parking in the hot sun will make the vehicle
five minutes each week, even in cold weather. This Replace the air filter periodically as its ability to
inside extremely hot, and it will require more
is to prevent poor lubrication of the compressor in- clean the air will be reduced as it collects pollen
time to cool the interior.
ternal parts and to maintain the air conditioning in and dirt. For the maintenance interval, refer to the
If it is necessary to park in the sun, open the
the best operating condition. “SERVICE BOOKLET”.
windows for the first few minutes of air con-
ditioning operation to expel the hot air.
l Close the windows when the air conditioning NOTE
is in use. The entry of outside air through l Operation in certain conditions such as driv-
open windows will reduce the cooling effi- ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the
ciency. air conditioning can lead to reduction of serv-
l Too much cooling is not good for the health. ice life of the filter. When you feel that the
The inside air temperature should only be 5 air flow is lower than normal or when the
to 6 °C below the outside air temperature. windscreen or windows start to fog up easily,
l When operating the system, make sure the replace the air filter.
air intake, which is located in front of the We recommend you to have it checked.
windscreen, is free of obstructions such as
leaves and snow. Leaves collected in the air-
intake plenum may reduce air flow and plug
5 the plenum water drains.
Air conditioning system refrigerant

and lubricant recommendations
If the air conditioning seems less effective than usu-
al, the cause might be a refrigerant leak. We recom-
mend you to have the system inspected.
The air conditioning system in your vehicle must
be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a and the
lubricant ZXL-100PG.
Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause
severe damage which will result in the need to re-
place your vehicle’s entire air conditioning system.
The release of refrigerant into the atmosphere
should be prevented.
5-12
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player*

E00708501745
The audio system can be used when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
A- Display window B- Audio system

5
NOTE
l To listen to the audio system while the engine is stopped, turn the ignition key to the “ACC” position.
l If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, it may create noise from the audio equipment. This does not mean that anything is wrong with your audio
equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far away as possible from the audio equipment.
l If foreign objects or water get into the audio equipment, or if smoke or a strange odour comes from it, immediately turn off the audio system. We recom-
mend your to have it checked. Never try to repair it by yourself. Avoid continuous usage without inspection by a qualified person.
l The audio system’s control knob can be removed to deter thieves. For details, refer to “Audio system anti-theft feature” on page 5-32.
l The audio amplifier (if so equipped) is located under the front right seat.
Do not subject the amplifier to a strong impact.
It could damage the amplifier or malfunctioning could result.
5-13
Volume and tone control panel

E00708601049
1- PWR (On-Off) switch 5- AUDIO button

2- VOL (Volume control) knob 6- Audio adjust button
5 3-
4-
Memory select buttons
DISP (Display) button
7- Display
5-14
To adjust the volume BALANCE (Left/Right balance control) 3. In future, when you gently press the memory
E00708700548 Press the audio adjust button (6) either or select button in the audio adjust mode, the au-
to balance the volume of sound from the left and dio adjustment condition memorized for that
VOL (Volume control) the right speakers. button will take effect.
Turn the VOL knob (2) clockwise to increase the
volume; anticlockwise to decrease the volume. The
status will be displayed in the display (7).
NOTE
l The volume control mode will shut off auto-
matically if either the radio or CD is selec-
ted, or if no adjustment is made within about
2 seconds.
To adjust the tone

E00708801070
Press the AUDIO button (5) to select BASS TRE-
BLE FADER BALANCE Audio adjust
mode off. The status will be displayed in the dis- NOTE To change the information display
E00735100032
play (7). l Audio adjust mode will be cancelled when ra- Press the DISP button (4) to change the informa-
dio or CD operation is performed or no ad-
tion display. The display switches in the following
BASS (Bass tone control) justment is performed for more than
sequence: Audio information → Average fuel con-
Press the audio adjust button (6) either or
7 seconds.
sumption → Driving range → Average speed → 5
to select the desired bass tone quality. Outside temperature → Altimeter → Barometer →
To enter audio tone settings into the memory Calendar → Clock-only → Blank. For details, refer
E00733000079
TREBLE (Treble tone control) to “Changing the information display” on page
It is possible to enter the audio adjustment condi-
Press the audio adjust button (6) either or 3-12.
tion (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE) into
to select the desired treble tone quality. the memory.
1. Make the desired adjustments in the audio ad- NOTE
FADER (Front/Rear balance control)
Press the audio adjust button (6) either or
just mode. l Audio information is displayed when the au-
Refer to “To adjust the tone” on page 5-15. dio system is on.
to balance the volume of sound from the front and 2. In the audio adjust mode, press and hold one
the rear speakers. of the memory select buttons (3) [1-6]. The
display will show the button number
[SOUND1-SOUND6] for which the settings
were memorized.
5-15
Radio control panel and display

E00708901084
1- PWR (On-Off) switch 6- FM/MW/LW indicator

2- Memory select buttons 7- Preset memory number display
5 3-
4-
TUNE/SEEK (Down-step/Down-seek) button
TUNE/SEEK (Up-step/Up-seek) button
8-
9-
ST (Stereo) indicator
Frequency display window
5- AM/FM (FM/MW/LW selection) button
5-16
To listen to the radio To enter frequencies into the memory 3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by
E00709000463 E00716101102 pressing the button and then releasing it with-
1. Press the PWR switch (1) to turn the audio in 2 seconds.
Manual setting
system ON and OFF. The system turns on in
You can assign to the memory select buttons (2) a Automatic setting
the last mode used.
maximum of 18 stations in the FM band (6 FM1, 6 With the method, all manually set stations in the
2. Press the AM/FM buttons (5) to select the de-
FM2 and 6 FM3 stations) and 6 stations each in the band currently selected for reception are replaced
sired band.
MW and LW band. (Stations already assigned to with stations in the same band that are automatical-
3. Press the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) to
the memory select buttons are replaced by any newly selected in order of signal strength. The radio au-
tune to a station, or press one of the memory
ly assigned stations.) tomatically selects 6 stations in the FM band (FM3
select buttons (2) to recall a station memo-
rised for that button. station only) and 6 stations each in the MW and
LW band.
To tune the radio
E00709100451 Follow the steps described below.
1. With the radio mode selected, hold down the
Automatic tuning AM/FM button (5) for 2 seconds or longer.
After keeping the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) de- The 6 stations with the best signal strength
pressed, release the button, and the selected station will automatically be assigned to the memo-
reception will start. ry select buttons (2), with the lowest-frequen-
cy station being assigned to the lowest-num-
Manual tuning
ber button.
The frequency changes every time the TUNE/ 2. When you subsequently press a memory se-
SEEK button (3 or 4) is pressed. Press the button to lect button to select a channel number, the ra-
select the desired station.
Follow the steps described below.
dio will begin receiving the station assigned 5
to that number.
1. Press either the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4)
to tune the frequency to be entered in the mem-
ory. NOTE
2. Press one of the memory select buttons (2) l If you press the AM/FM button (5) for 2 sec-
for 2 seconds or longer. onds or longer while tuning in the FM1 or
The number of the button corresponding to FM2 band, the radio will automatically
the entry in the memory and the frequency switch to the FM3 band, where the automatic
are displayed. seeking/storing will be activated.
5-17
Radio data system (RDS)

E00709200393
1- PWR (On-Off) switch 9- RDS (Radio data system) indicator

2- Memory select buttons 10- PTY (Program type) indicator
5 3-
4-
TUNE/SEEK (Down-step/Down-seek) button
TUNE/SEEK (Up-step/Up-seek) button
11-
12-
REG (Regional program) indicator
AF (Alternative frequencies) indicator
5- AM/FM (FM/MW/LW selection) button 13- TP (Traffic program identification) indicator
6- TP (Traffic program) button 14- CT (Clock time) indicator
7- PTY (Program type) button 15- Display
8- Menu button
RDS uses PI (program identification) signal and AF (alternative frequency) list transmitted in addition to the normal FM broadcasting programs, and picks up the
FM stations that are transmitting the same program from the AF list and automatically tunes to the station with the strongest signal intensity.
Therefore, you can continue listening to one program in, for example, a long distance driving without retuning to the other station transmitting the same program
when you are leaving the service area of the currently receiving station.
The RDS radio also features the limited reception of the program types, the break-in reception of the traffic announcement to the EON (enhanced other network)
and emergency broadcast, and the limited/unlimited reception of the regional programs.
5-18
AF (Alternative Frequencies) function If there are no frequencies broadcasting the same 26. NATION M (National music)
E00720900061 programming, the radio searches a frequency broad- 27. OLDIES
The AF function finds a station broadcasting the casting the regional programming. The radio suc- 28. FOLK M (Folk music)
same program and selects the station with the stron- ceeds in searching the regional programming, then 29. DOCUMENT
gest signal of AF lists. the display shows the REG indicator (11).
The AF function is turned on (with the AF indica- If the radio does not succeed in searching the re- To search for a broadcast of desired program type:
tor (12) shown on the display) at all times unless gional programming, the radio returns to the recal- 1. Press the PTY button (7).
you manually switch it off. led preset station. 2. Press the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) for
less than 1 second repeatedly to select your
The AF function can be turned ON and OFF. PTY (Program Type) desired PTY.
Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-21. E00721300293
RDS broadcasts are classified according to pro- 3. Two seconds after a desired PTY has been se-
CT (Clock Time) function gram type (PTY) as follows. Use the TUNE/SEEK lected, the radio will begin to search for a
E00721000131
button (3 or 4) to select your desired PTY. broadcast of your selected PTY. During
The clock can be set automatically by using the sig- search, the selected PTY on the display blinks.
nal from the local RDS stations. Refer to “Adjust- 4. When the radio picks up a station with your
ing the time” on page 3-12. 1. NEWS
2. AFFAIRS (Current affairs) desired PTY, the display will show the name
3. INFO (Information) of the station.
REG (Regional) function
E00721100057 4. SPORT
REG function limits to receive the stations broad- 5. EDUCATE (Education)
casting regional programs. 6. DRAMA
Regional programming and regional networks are 7. CULTURE
organized differently depending on the country or 8. SCIENCE
area (they may be changed according to the hour,
state, or broadcast area), so if you don’t want to re-
9.
10.
VARIED
POP M (Pop music)
5
ceive the regional programs automatically, you can 11. ROCK M (Rock music)
set up REG ON not to receive regional programs. 12. EASY M (Easy music)
13. LIGHT M (Light classics)
The REG function can be turned ON and OFF. 14. CLASSICS
Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-21. 15. OTHER M (Other music)
16. WEATHER (Weather information)
PI (Program Identification) search function
E00721200188 17. FINANCE
When travelling long distance and the recalled pre- 18. CHILDREN NOTE
set station is weak, the radio searches another fre- 19. SOCIAL l If the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) is pressed
quency broadcasting the same programming with 20. RELIGION for more than 1 second, the radio will try to
the same PI code in AF list. 21. PHONE IN find out another broadcast of the same pro-
22. TRAVEL gram type as currently selected.
23. LEISURE
24. JAZZ
25. COUNTRY
5-19
l If no station is found with your desired PTY, 2. If the radio detects traffic information on ei-
the display will show “EMPTY” for about ther the station currently selected or another
5 seconds and the radio will return to the pre- station, the display will show “TRAF INF”
vious station. for 5 seconds followed by a 2-second indica-
tion of the frequency. Then, it will show the
How to enter PTYs in the memory name of the station broadcasting the traffic in-
E00721400135 formation to which you will listen. The vol-
As many as 6 PTYs can be entered in the memory. ume level is set separately for listening to nor-
Follow the steps described below. mal audio programs and for listening to traf-
1. Press either the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) fic information. The volume level will there-
to tune the PTY to be entered in the memory. fore change automatically to that set when
2. Press one of the memory select buttons (2) traffic information was last received. When
for 2 seconds or longer. The number of the the traffic information broadcast is over, the
button corresponding to the entry into the radio will return to the previously received
memory and the PTY are displayed. program and to the corresponding volume lev-
3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by el.
pressing the button and then releasing it with- 3. Press the TP button (6) to return to the previ-
in about 2 seconds. ous condition.
Traffic information NOTE

E00721600238
The radio will automatically tune in to traffic infor- l While “TP” is illuminated, the radio stops on-
ly at TP stations even if the TUNE/SEEK but-
mation broadcasts while receiving FM broadcasts
5 or playing compact discs.
ton (3 or 4) is pressed.
To select this function, follow the instructions below.
1. Press the TP button (6). The display will
show “TP” (13). If the RDS data can be read,
the display will show “RDS” (9). If not, the TP (Traffic information Program) search function
E00721800168
display will show “NO RDS” for about 5 sec-
onds. The traffic information program standby function
is turned on (with the TP indicator (13) shown on
the display) and after about 45 seconds since the
RDS indicator (9) turns off due to weak signal or
the tuning station is changed over from a TP sta-
tion to a station which does not broadcast traffic in-
formation, and seeks out a TP station in all frequen-
cies automatically.
The TP search function can be turned ON and OFF.

Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-21.
5-20
Emergency broadcasts If an emergency broadcast is caught while receiv- l CT

E00721700213 ing a FM broadcast or playing back a compact disc l REG
with the ignition switch in “ACC” or “ON” posi-
tion, the display will show “ALARM” and the emer- l TP-S
gency broadcast will interrupt the current program.
The volume level is set separately for listening to 1. Press the “MENU” button to select the func-
normal audio programs and for listening to emer- tion setup mode.
gency broadcasts. The volume level will therefore
change automatically to that set when an emergen-
cy broadcast or traffic information broadcast was
last received. When the emergency broadcast is
over, the radio will return to the previously re-
ceived program and to the corresponding volume
level.
Function setup mode
E00722500364
It is possible to change the following functions:
l AF
2. Press the “MENU” button repeatedly to se-

lect the mode you wish to change.
5-21
The order is: AF CT REG TP-S The setting will be shown on the display. NOTE
PH MUTE Function setup mode l After selecting a mode, you can leave the func-
OFF. tion setup mode by taking either of the fol-
lowing steps:
• Press the “MENU” button for at least 2
NOTE seconds.
l Although “PH” and “MUTE” appear on the • Make no entry for 7 seconds.
display, the PH and MUTE functions are in-
operative.
3. Select the desired setting for each mode to be

turned ON and OFF as shown below.
CD control panel and display

E00709501117
1- CD eject button 9- CD (CD mode changeover) button

2- Disc-loading slot 10- SCAN button
3- FOLDER (Folder down) button 11- RPT/RDM (Repeat/Random) button
4- FOLDER (Folder up) button 12- SCAN/RPT/RDM indicator
5-22
5- TEXT (Title display) button 13- TRACK indicator

6- PAGE (Title scroll) button 14- Track play time indicator
7- TRACK (Track down/up) button 15- CD indicator
8- PWR (On-Off) switch
5-23
To listen to a CD NOTE NOTE

E00709601903
1. Insert a disc with the label facing up, and the
l When you have fast-forwarded/fast-reversed l While listening to a disc on which CD-DA
the disc, the playing-time may be shown (CD-Digital Audio) and MP3 files have both
CD player will begin playing even if the ra- with deviation. been recorded, you can switch between read-
dio is being used. The CD indicator (15), the ing of the CD-DA, reading of the MP3 files,
track number, the playing time will appear To listen to an MP3 CD and the external audio input mode (AUX) by
on the display. The CD player will also start This CD player allows you to play MP3 (MPEG Au- pressing the CD button for 2 seconds or longer.
playback when the CD button (9) is pressed
with a disc in the player.
dio Layer-3) files recorded on CD-ROMs, CD-Rs l With a disc that contains both CD-DA and
(recordable CDs), and CD-RWs (rewritable CDs) MP3 files, the CD-DA files are automatical-
2. To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To in ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, and Romeo for- ly played first.
adjust the volume” on page 5-15 and “To ad-
just the tone” on page 5-15.
mats. Each disc may have a maximum of 16 trees, l The playback sound quality differs depend-
100 folders, and 255 files per disc. During MP3 ing on the encoding software and the bit rate.
3. To stop the CD, turn off the power by press- playback, the unit can display ID3 tag information. For details, refer to the user manual of your
ing the PWR switch (8) or change over to ra- For information concerning ID3 tag, refer to “CD encoding software.
dio mode by pressing the AM/FM buttons, or
eject the disc by pressing the eject button (1).
text and MP3 title display” on page 5-26. l Depending on file/folder configurations on a
disc, it may take some time before playback
starts.
NOTE l MP3 encoding software and writing software
l When an 8 cm compact disc is used, the adapt- are not supplied with this unit.
er is not needed for playback. Insert the disc l You may encounter trouble in playing an
in the centre of the disc-loading slot. MP3 or displaying the information of MP3
l For information concerning the handling of files recorded with certain writing software
5 compact discs, refer to “Handling of compact
discs” on page 5-32. l
or CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers).
If you record too many folders or files other
than MP3 onto a disc, it may take some time
To fast-forward/fast-reverse the disc before playback starts.
To fast-forward or fast-reverse the disc, press the l This unit does not record MP3 files.
TRACK button (7). l For information concerning CD-Rs/RWs, re-
fer to “Notes on CD-Rs/RWs” on page 5-33.
Fast-forward 1. Insert a disc containing MP3 files into the slot.
You can fast-forward the disc by pressing the 2. The display shows the folder number and the
side of the TRACK button (7). While the button is
kept pressed, the disc will be fast-forwarded.
file number, then playback will begin. CAUTION
Fast-reverse
l Attempting to play a file not in the MP3
format which has a “.mp3” file name may
You can fast-reverse the disc by pressing the produce noise from the speakers and
side of the TRACK button (7). While the button is speaker damage, and can damage your
kept pressed, the disc will be fast-reversed. hearing.
5-24
Folder selection order/MP3 file playback order To select a desired folder (MP3 CDs only) NOTE
(Example) You can select your desired folder by pressing the l Pressing the side of the TRACK button
FOLDER buttons (3 or 4). (7) once during the song will cause the CD
player to restart playback from the beginning
Root folder (root directory) of the song.
To repeat the same track or change the order of

tracks for playback
Press the RPT/RDM button (11) to select RPT
RDM RPT/RDM mode off.
To repeat the same track

Select the RPT mode, and the RPT indicator (12)
will come on. You can listen to the same track re-
peatedly.
To exit the repeat mode, press the RPT button two
Folder up times.
Tree 1 Tree 2 Tree 3 Tree 4 Press the FOLDER button (4) until the desired fold-
er number appears on the display.
Repeat mode
Folder down
Press the FOLDER button (3) until the desired fold-
Folder selection CD-DA
In the order
er number appears on the display.
5
To select a desired track
You can select your desired track by using the
TRACK button (7).
File selection MP3
Track up
In the order
Press the side of the TRACK button (7) repeat-
edly until the desired track number appears on the
display.
NOTE
Track down l The repeat mode will be cancelled by press-
Press the side of the TRACK button (7) repeat- ing the track button (7), the SCAN button
edly until the desired track number appears on the (10) or eject button (1).
display.
5-25
To change the order of tracks for playback NOTE CD text

Select the RDM mode, and the RDM indicator (18) l Once all tracks on the disc have been scan- The CD player can display disc and track titles for
will come on. Tracks on the currently selected disc ned, playback of the disc will restart from the discs encoded with disc and track title information.
will be played in a random sequence. beginning of the track that was playing when Press the TEXT button (5) repeatedly to make se-
To exit the random mode, press the RPT/RDM but- scanning started. lections in the following sequence: disc name
ton (11) again. l The scan mode will be cancelled when radio track name normal display mode.
or CD operation is selected.
Random mode l With a disc that contains both CD-DA and
Example
MP3 files, the scan mode causes only files of
the same format (CD-DA only or MP3 files
CD-DA only) to be played. Disc
name
To eject a disc
When the CD eject button (1) is pressed, the disc
automatically stops and is ejected. The system auto-
MP3 matically switches to radio mode. Track
name
CD text and MP3 title display
E00725000605
This CD player can display CD text and MP3 titles
including ID3 tag information.
NOTE NOTE
l With a disc that contains both CD-DA and l The display can show up to 16 characters. If
5 MP3 files, the random mode causes only
files of the same format (CDDA only or
a disc name or track name has more than 16
characters, press the PAGE button (6) to
MP3 files only) to be played in a random se- view the next 16 characters.
quence. l When there is no title information to be dis-
played, the display shows “NO TITLE”.
To find the start of each track on a disc for playback l Characters that the CD player cannot display
Press the SCAN button (10). “SCAN” will appear are shown as “ ”.
on the display and the CD player will play back the
first 10 seconds of each track on the selected disc.
The track number will blink while the scan mode is
selected. To exit the scan mode, press the SCAN
button again.
5-26
MP3 title l The display can show up to 16 characters. If

a folder name, track name, or item of ID3 tag
To use the external audio input
The CD player can display folder and file titles for
discs encoded with folder and file information. information has more than 16 characters, function*
E00732200566
Press the TEXT button (5) for less than 1 second re- press the PAGE button (6) to view the next
peatedly to make selections in the following se- 16 characters.
quence: folder name file name normal dis- l Folder names and track names can each be Auxiliary Audio connector
play mode. displayed up to a length of 16 characters. (RCA)
Items of ID3 tag information can each be dis-
played up to a length of 16 characters.
Example
l Characters that the CD player cannot display
are shown as “ ”. Auxiliary Video connector
Folder (RCA)
name
File
name
Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA)
A- Left audio input connector (white)
B- Right audio input connector (red)
ID3 tag information
The CD player can display ID3 tag information for Auxiliary Video connector (RCA)
files that have been recorded with ID3 tag informa-
tion.
A- Left audio input connector (white) 5
B- Right audio input connector (red)
1. Press the TEXT button (5) for 2 seconds or C- Video input connector (yellow)
longer to switch to the ID3 tag information.
2. Then press the TEXT button for less than 1
second repeatedly to make selections in the
You can listen to commercially available audio
following sequence: album name title
equipment, such as a portable audio system, from
name artist name normal display mode. your vehicle’s speakers, by connecting the audio
equipment to the audio input connectors, which are
NOTE external input connectors (pin jacks).
l To return from ID3 tag information to the
folder name, press the TEXT button (5)
again for 2 seconds or longer.
l When there is no title information to be dis-
played, the display shows “NO TITLE”.
5-27
NOTE
CAUTION Steering wheel remote control
l On vehicles equipped with the MITSUBISHI switch*
Multi-Communication System (MMCS), re- l Do not operate the connected audio equip- E00710000694
fer to the separate owner’s manual of the ment while driving. The remote control switches are located on the left
MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication Sys- This could distract you and an accident side of the steering wheel.
tem. might occur. These switches can be used when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
To activate the external audio input
mode NOTE
l The connected audio equipment cannot be op-
erated with the vehicle’s audio system.
l Depending on the connected audio equip-
ment, it may produce noise from the speakers.
l Use the connected audio equipment’s own
power source, such as its battery.
Noise may be produced from the speakers if
the connected audio equipment is used while
charging it using the accessory socket of the
vehicle.
l Do not activate the external audio input
mode when no audio equipment is connected. 1- Volume up button
Otherwise, noise may be produced from the 2- Volume down button
5 1. Use a commercially available audio cable to l
speakers.
Connect audio equipment when the external
3-
4-
PWR (ON-OFF)/Mode change button
Seek up/Track up/Fast-forward button
connect the audio equipment to the external audio input mode is deactivated or lower the 5- Seek down/Track down/Fast-reverse button
audio input connector. vehicle’s speaker volume before connecting it.
2. Press the CD button (D) for more than 2 sec- Noise may be produced from the speakers if
audio equipment is connected after the exter-
NOTE
onds. The display (E) will show “AUX” and l Do not push two or more of the steering
then the external audio input mode will be ac- nal audio input mode is activated.
wheel remote control switches at the same
tivated. l For information on how to connect and oper-
time.
3. To deactivate the external audio input mode, ate the audio equipment, refer to the owner’s
press the AM/FM button (F) or the CD but- manual for the equipment.
To turn on the power
ton (D) to switch to another mode.
PWR (ON-OFF) button - 3
When the power is off, press this button to turn the
power on. To turn the power off, press this button
for 2 seconds or longer.
5-28
To adjust the volume

Fast-reverse button - 5
Volume up button - 1 You can fast-reverse the disc by pressing the fast-
The volume will increase when this button is pressed. reverse button. While the button is kept pressed,
the disc will be fastreversed.
Volume down button - 2
The volume will decrease when this button is press- NOTE
ed. l In the case of an MP3 CD, you can fast-for-
ward and fastreverse tracks in the same folder.
To listen to the audio system
Select the desired mode by lightly pressing the To select a desired track
mode change button (3). Track up button - 4
The mode switches between the radio and CD with Press the button repeatedly until the desired track
each push of the button. number appears on the display.
To listen to the radio Track down button - 5

Press the button repeatedly until the desired track
To select FM/MW/LW mode number appears on the display.
Mode change button — 3
Select the desired band by pressing this button.
The order is: FM1 → FM2 → FM3 → MW → LW
→ CD → FM1.
Automatic radio tuning

5
Seek up button - 4/Seek down button - 5
After pressing these buttons, the reception of the se-
lected station will begin.
To listen to a CD
To fast-forward/fast-reverse the disc
To fast-forward or fast-reverse the disc, press the
fast-forward button (4) or the fast-reverse button (5).
Fast-forward button - 4
You can fast-forward the disc by pressing the fast-
forward button. While the button is kept pressed,
the disc will be fast-forwarded.
5-29
Error codes
E00710101142
5 If an error code (1) appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below.
5-30
Error display Problem Description Repair

NO DISC No disc inserted Disc is not in CD player. Insert disc.
Disc is not loaded correctly, or condensation on Insert disc with label facing up. Remove
ERROR 01 Focus error
disc. moisture from disc.
Disc is dirty, scratched, or deformed; or exces- Clean or replace disc. Retry when vibra-
ERROR 02 Disc error
sive vehicle vibration. tions stop.
Eject disc and reload. If disc will not eject,
ERROR 03 Mechanism error Loading or eject error. Pick-up is out of position.
have the equipment inspected.
Allow CD player to cool by waiting about
ERROR HOT High temperature Internal protection against high temperatures.
30 minutes.
Communication error between external device
Communication or power supply Consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ERROR and audio equipment.
error ized Service Point.
Power supply error of external device.
5-31
Audio system anti-theft feature 2. With the key in the “LOCK” position
The lamp (B) will start flashing to deter
Handling of compact discs
E00710200306 E00723000034
To prevent theft of the audio system, the control thieves. l Use only the type of compact discs that have
knob can be removed. Always remove the control the mark shown in the illustration below.
knob when you leave the vehicle. (Playback of CD-R or CD-RW discs may
cause problems.)
Removing the control knob
Slide the release button (A) to the right and remove
the control knob from the audio system.
Anti-theft function operates in two ways depending
on the position of the ignition key.
NOTE
l When sliding the release button, place one
hand on the control knob to prevent it from
falling out.
5 Refitting the control knob

Put the control knob back into the original position
and then push it until it clicks. The “Please refit the
1. With the key in the “ON” or “ACC” posi- control panel.” indicator will disappear or the lamp
tion (B) will stop flashing.
“Please refit the control panel.” indicator will
appear on the display. Any audio system op-
NOTE
eration will be disabled while the “Please re-
fit the control panel.” indicator is displayed. l Do not leave the control knob in any place
where it may become hot (for example, the
dashboard) or in any place where it may be-
come wet.
l If you lose the control knob, contact a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point.
5-32
l The use of special shaped, damaged compact • When the temperature suddenly rises, l Do not use a ball point pen, felt pen, pencil,
discs (like cracked discs) or low-quality com- such as right after the heater is turned on etc. to write on the label surface of the disc.
pact discs (like warped discs or burrs on the in cold weather. l Do not put additional labels (A) or stickers
discs) such as those shown will damage the (B) on compact discs. Also, do not use any
CD player. In this case, wait until the moisture has compact disc on which a label or sticker has
had time to dry out. started to peel off or any compact disc that
l When the CD player is subjected to violent vi- has stickiness or other contamination left by
brations, such as during off-road driving, the a peeled-off label or sticker. If you use such
tracking may not work. a compact disc, the CD player may stop work-
l When storing compact discs, always store ing properly and you may not be able to eject
them in their separate cases. Never place com- the compact disc.
pact discs in direct sunlight, or in any place
where the temperature or humidity is high.
l Never touch the flat surface of the disc with-
out a label. This will damage the disc surface
and could affect the sound quality. When han-
dling a compact disc, always hold it by the
outer edge and the centre hole.
l To clean a disc, use a soft, clean, dry cloth.
Wipe directly from the centre hole towards
the outer edge. Do not wipe in a circle. Nev-
er use any chemicals such as benzine, paint
thinner, a disc spray cleaner, or an anti-static
agent on the disc. 5
Notes on CD-Rs/RWs
E00725100039
l You may have trouble playing back some

CD-R/RW discs recorded on CD recorders
(CD-R/RW drives), either due to their record-
ing characteristics or dirt, fingerprints,
l In the following circumstances, moisture can scratches, etc. on the disc surface.
form on discs and inside the audio system,
preventing normal operation. l CD-R/RW discs are less resistant to high tem-
peratures and high humidity than ordinary mu-
• When there is high humidity (for exam- sic CDs. Leaving them inside a vehicle for ex-
ple, when it is raining). tended periods may damage them and make
playback impossible.
5-33
l The unit may not successfully play back a

CD-R/RW that was made by the combina-
Antenna Roof antenna*
E00710900071
E00710500022
tion of writing software, a CD recorder Pillar antenna* When listening to the radio, raise the antenna up un-
(CD-R/RW drive) and a disc if they are in- E00710700109 til you hear it click.
compatible with one another. When listening to the radio, fully extend the antenna.
l This player cannot play the CD-R/RW discs
if the session is not closed.
l This player cannot play CD-R/RW discs
which contain other than CD-DA or MP3 da-
ta (Video CD, etc.).
l Be sure to observe the handling instructions
for the CD-R/RW disc.
WARNING
l Operating the CD player in a manner oth-
er than specifically instructed herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure. To remove
Do not remove the cover and attempt to Turn the pole (A) anticlockwise.
repair the CD player by yourself. There
NOTE
are no user serviceable parts inside. In l Be sure to retract the pillar antenna in the fol- To install
case of malfunction, we recommend you lowing cases:
Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base (B) un-
5 to have it checked. • When entering a place with low clearance.
• When using an automatic car wash.
til it is securely retained.
• When placing a car cover over the vehicle.
5-34
NOTE Sun visors Card holder*

l Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the fol- E00711200693 Cards can be slipped into the front (A) of the lid of
lowing cases: the passenger side vanity mirror.
• When using an automatic car wash.
• When placing a car cover over the vehicle.
l Before driving into a structure that has a low
ceiling, fold down the antenna to prevent it
from hitting the ceiling.
1- To eliminate front glare

2- To eliminate side glare
Ticket holder*
The driver’s sun visor is provided with a ticket hold-
er (A) on the backside.
5-35
Vanity mirror* Ashtray To remove the ashtray, pull it out while pressing
the stop (A).
E00711300489 E00711400826
A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun visor
on the passenger side.
CAUTION
l Put out matches and cigarettes before
they are placed in the ashtray.
l Don’t put papers and other things that
burn into your ashtrays. If you do, ciga-
rettes or other smoking materials could
set them on fire, causing damage.
l Always close the ashtray. If left open, oth-
er cigarette butts in the ashtray may be re-
kindled.
Type 1 (fixed position) Type 2 (moveable)

To use the ashtray, pull it out. To use the moveable ashtray, open the lid.
Mounting position for moveable ashtray

The moveable ashtray can be fitted at the indicated
position.
5-36
Refer to “Cup holder” on page 5-44. Cigarette lighter NOTE

E00711501257 l Do not leave the cigarette lighter removed
For the front seat The cigarette lighter can be used while the ignition from its socket, because the socket might be-
switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position. come clogged by foreign material and be
short-circuited.
Type 1
CAUTION
l Do not touch heating element or lighter
housing. Hold only the knob to prevent
For the rear seat burns.
l Do not allow children to operate or play
with the cigarette lighter as burns may oc-
cur.
l Something is wrong with the cigarette
lighter if it does not pop back out within
approximately 30 seconds of being push-
ed in.
Type 2
Leaving the cigarette lighter pushed in
for an extended period could cause fire. If
it does not pop out by itself, we recom-
mend you to have it checked.
l Do not leave the cigarette lighter pushed 5
in or insert the cigarette lighter from an-
other vehicle. Otherwise, the lighter may
overheat and cause fire.
l It is recommended that only the lighter
be inserted in its socket.
Use of “plug-in” type accessories may
1- Push all the way in. damage the socket and result in poor re-
tention of the lighter.
The lighter will automatically return to its original
position with a “click” when ready. Pull it out for
use.
After use, insert the lighter to its original position
in the socket.
5-37
CAUTION Accessory socket* CAUTION

E00711601160
The accessory socket can be used while the igni-
l When the cigarette lighter socket is used tion switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
l When you connect an electrical device,
as a power source for an electric appli- make sure it is rated at 12 V and its elec-
ance, be sure that the electric appliance Open the cap (A) to uncover the socket. Use it to trical capacity does not exceed 120 W. Re-
operates at 12 V and has an electric ca- plug in an electrical device. member that prolonged use of an electri-
pacity of 120 W or less. In addition, long cal device with the engine off could run
use of the electric appliance without run- Type 1 down the battery.
ning the engine may run down the battery. l When the accessory socket is not in use,
be sure to close the cap, because the sock-
et might become clogged by foreign mate-
rial and be short-circuited.
NOTE
l Long use of the electric appliance without run-
ning the engine may run down the battery.
Especially avoid using it with the cigarette
lighter.
Type 2
5-38
Digital clock* Interior lamps Room lamps

E00712101016
E00711700193 E00712000917
The digital clock indicates the time with the igni-
tion switch in either “ON” or “ACC” position. Front*
To set the time

Set the time by pressing the various buttons as de-
scribed below.
1- Room lamp (Front)*

Personal lamps* Rear (Type 1)*
2- Room lamp (Rear)*
3- Door courtesy lamps*
4- Centre console downlight
1- To adjust the hour NOTE

2- To adjust the minutes
3- To reset the minutes to zero
l If you leave the lamps on without running
the engine, you will run down the battery. Be-
5
fore you leave the vehicle, make sure that all
the lamps are off.
10:30 - 11:29...... Changes to 11:00
11:30 - 12:29...... Changes to 12:00
NOTE
l If the battery cables are disconnected during
repairs or for any other reason, reset the
clock to the correct time after they are recon-
nected.
5-39
Rear (Type 2)* 2( )- [Vehicles without central door locks NOTE

system] l On vehicles with keyless entry
The room lamp goes on when a door system, when the ignition key
is opened. When all doors are is removed with the doors
closed, the room lamp is illuminated closed, the lamp is illuminated
and dimmed gradually for 7 seconds and after about 15 seconds it
then goes out. goes off.
However, the lamp goes out immedi- The dimming period is also ad-
ately without being dimmed when justable.
the ignition switch is turned to the For further information, we
“ON” position. recommend you to consult a
[Vehicles with central door locks sys- MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-
tem] thorized Service Point.
1 (ON) - The lamp illuminates. The room lamp goes on when a door
is opened. When all doors are
closed, the room lamp is illuminated 3 (OFF) - The lamp goes off.
and dimmed gradually for 15 sec-
onds then goes out. Personal lamps*
However, the lamp goes out immedi- E00712500156
ately without being dimmed in case Push the switch (A) to turn on the lamp. Push it
of the followings: again to turn it off.
l All doors are closed and the ig-
5 nition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
l All doors are locked using the
key mechanism of the driver’s
door, the lock knob of the driv-
er’s door, or the remote con-
trol switch of the keyless entry
system (if so equipped).
5-40
Door courtesy lamps*

E00717500034
Type 2 Storage spaces
E00713101404
Each door courtesy lamp comes on when the rele-
vant door is opened and goes off when the door is
closed. CAUTION
l Never leave lighters, cans of carbonated
drink, and spectacles in the cabin when
parking the vehicle in hot sunshine. The
cabin will become extremely hot, so light-
ers and other flammable items may catch
fire and unopened drink cans (including
beer cans) may rupture. The heat may al-
so deform or crack plastic spectacle len-
ses and other spectacle parts that are
made of plastic.
l Keep the lids of storage spaces closed
while driving the vehicle. A lid or the con-
tents of a storage space could otherwise
Centre console downlight cause injuries.
E00733300043
The centre console downlight go on when the lamp
switch is in the “ ” or the “ ” position. NOTE
Refer to “Combination headlamps and dipper l Do not leave valuables in any storage space
when leaving the vehicle.
5
switch” on page 3-30.
Type 1
5-41
Type 1 Front console box*

To open, pull the lever (A). E00733400161
To open, pull up the knob (A).
1- Utility box*
2- Glove box
3- Sunglasses holder*
4- Seat under tray*
5- Front console box* Type 2
6- Floor console box* The glove box can be locked and unlocked using
7- Secret box (Club cab) Floor console box*
the key. E00723300633
Glove box Type 1

E00717601090 To open, raise the lid.
5 NOTE
l When the lamp switch is in the “ ” or
“ ” position, the glove box lamp illumi-
nates.
1- To lock
2- To unlock
3- To open, pull the lever
Type 2
Upper and lower boxes are located inside the floor
console box.
5-42
The floor console box can also be used as an armrest. Lower box Close the lid by pushing it till it clicks.
To open the lower box, lift the left release lever (B)
and raise the lid.
1- Upper box
2- Lower box
CAUTION
NOTE Utility box* l The holder should not be used to store any-
l The Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA) or the E00717900100 thing heavier than sunglasses. These ob-
Auxiliary Video connector (RCA) is located To open, pull up the knob (A). jects could drop out.
in the lower box (if so equipped). For details,
refer to “To use the external audio input func-
NOTE
tion” on page 5-27.
l The holder may not be able to accomodate ev- 5
Upper box ery possible size and shape of sunglasses; it
To open the upper box, lift the right release lever is advisable to check compatibility before use.
(A) and raise the lid.
Secret box (Club cab)
E00724900043
The secret box is in the floor behind the seat.
Sunglasses holder*
E00718600250
Push the lid to open.
5-43
To use the box, open the lid. To remove Cup holder*

Pull off the tray while lifting upward. E00714500802
CAUTION
l Do not drink beverages while driving the
vehicle; doing so could distract you and
result in an accident.
For the front seat

The cup holder is located between the front seats.
Type 1
Seat under tray (under front passen-

ger’s seat)*
E00725700035
A tray is provided underneath passenger’s seat.
To use
Draw out the tray.
5
Type 2
To store
Push in the tray positively until it is fully locked.
5-44
NOTE Bottle holder For the rear seat (Double cab)

l The cup holder adapter (A) can be removed E00718200171 The bottle holders are provided at both sides.
to enable the cup holder to hold relatively
large cup. Remove the cup holder adapter
when necessary. CAUTION
l Do not drink beverages while driving the
Type 3 vehicle; doing so could distract you and
result in an accident.
l Beverages can spill due to vibration or oth-
er movement during vehicle operation.
Be careful not to get scalded by a hot bev-
erage if spilled
NOTE
l Make sure the cap of any plastic bottle
placed in a bottle holder is tightly closed.
l The bottle holders may not accommodate bot-
tles of certain shapes and sizes.
For the rear seat (Double cab)
E00716900389
In order to use the cup holder, allow the armrest to For the front seat
The bottle holders are provided at both sides.
drop down.
5
5-45
Convenient hook Coat hook* First-aid kit and warning

E00732900071
Light items of luggage can be hung from the hook.
E00725600438
There is a coat hook on the rear seat assist grip. triangle securing bands*
E00717200028
A first-aid kit and a warning triangle can be se-
Type 1 Type 2 cured with the band(s) installed in the illustrated po-
sition.
Single cab, Double cab

The wall behind the seat is provided with a band
for securing a first-aid kit and a warning triangle.
Single cab, Double cab* Double cab*
NOTE
l Do not hang heavy luggage (more than about
4 kg) on the hook.
Doing so could cause damage to the hook.
5 WARNING
l Do not put a hanger or any heavy or poin-
ted object on the coat hook. If the curtain
airbag was activated, any such item could
be propelled away with great force and
could prevent the curtain airbag from in-
flating correctly. Hang clothes directly on
the coat hook (without using a hanger).
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp ob-
jects in the pockets of clothes that you
hang on the coat hook.
5-46
Club cab
A band for securing a first-aid kit is installed in the
secret box.
A band for securing a warning triangle is installed

left under the rear seat.
5-47
For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down............................................................6-02

Emergency starting.......................................................................6-02
Engine overheating.......................................................................6-04
Bleeding the fuel system...............................................................6-05
Removal of water from the fuel filter...........................................6-06
Tools, jack and jack handle..........................................................6-07
Jacking up the vehicle...................................................................6-13
Spare wheel...................................................................................6-16
How to change a tyre....................................................................6-17
Towing..........................................................................................6-20
Operation under adverse driving conditions.................................6-24
6
For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down Emergency starting WARNING

E00800101166 E00800502112
If the vehicle breaks down on the road, move it to If the engine cannot be started because the battery
the shoulder and use the hazard warning flashers and/ is weak or dead, the battery from another vehicle
l Turn off the ignition on both vehicles be-
forehand.
or the warning triangle etc. can be used with jumper cables to start the engine. Make sure that the cables or your clothes
Refer to “Hazard warning flasher switch” on page cannot be caught by the fan or drive belt.
3-34. Personal injury could result.
WARNING
If the engine stops/fails
Vehicle operation and control are affected if the en- l To start the engine using jumper cables NOTE
connected from another vehicle, perform l Turn off all lamps, heater and other electrical
gine stops.
the correct procedures according to the in- loads. This will avoid sparks and help save
Before moving the vehicle to a safe area, be aware
struction manual. Incorrect procedures both batteries.
of the following:
could result in a fire or explosion or dam-
l The brake booster becomes inoperative and age to the vehicles.
the pedal effort will increase. Press down the 3. Make sure battery electrolyte is at the proper
brake pedal harder than usual. level.
l Since the power steering pump is no longer 1. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper Refer to “Battery” on page 8-09.
operative, the steering wheel feels heavy cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles
when turning it. aren’t touching each other.
If they are, it could cause a ground connec- WARNING
tion you don’t want. The vehicle will not
start, and the bad grounding could damage l If electrolyte fluid is not visible, or ap-
pears to be frozen, Do Not Attempt Jump
the electrical systems.
Starting!
A battery might rupture or explode if the
temperature is below the freezing point
CAUTION
6 l Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
or if it is not filled to the proper level.
volt battery. 4. Connect one end of one jumper cable to the

If the other system isn’t 12-volt, shorting positive (+) terminal of the discharged bat-
can damage both vehicles. tery (A), and the other end to the positive (+)
terminal of the booster battery (B).
2. You could be injured if the vehicles move.
Set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle.
Put an automatic transmission in “P”
(PARK) or a manual transmission in “N”
(Neutral). Turn off the ignition switch.
6-02
For emergencies
Vehicles with 1 battery NOTE

l Open the cover before connecting the jumper CAUTION
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the battery.
(Refer to “Battery” on page 8-09.) l Keep the engine of the vehicle giving assis-
tance running.
WARNING 7. After the engine is started, disconnect the ca-

bles in the reverse order.
l Be sure to observe the connecting se-
quence of .
l Make sure that the connection is made
to the appointed position (shown in the il-
WARNING
lustration). If the connection is made di- l Charging the battery while it is installed
rectly to the negative side of the battery, in the vehicle might cause the battery to
the inflammable gasses generated from catch fire and explode.
Vehicles with 2 batteries the battery might catch fire and explode. Or damage to the vehicle could result. If
l When connecting the jumper cables, do it has to be charged in that condition for
not connect the positive (+) cable to the unavoidable reasons, disconnect the vehi-
negative (-) terminal. cle side negative (-) terminal connected to
Otherwise sparks might cause explosion the battery.
of the battery. l Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames away
from the battery because the battery may
produce an explosion.
CAUTION l Use adequate ventilation when charging
or using the battery in an enclosed space.
l Take care not to get the jumper cable l Remove all the caps before charging the
battery.
caught in the cooling fan or other rotat-
ing part in the engine compartment. l Electrolyte is corrosive diluted sulphuric 6
l Use the proper cables suitable for the bat- acid.
tery size. If electrolyte (battery acid) comes into con-
5. Connect one end of the other jumper cable to Otherwise heat damage to the cables tact with your hands, eyes, clothes and
the negative (-) terminal of the booster bat- could result. the painted surface of your vehicle, it
tery (B), and the other end to the engine l Check the jumper cables for damage and should be thoroughly flushed with water.
block of the vehicle with the discharged bat- corrosion before use. If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
tery at the point farthest from the battery. with water immediately and thoroughly,
and get prompt medical attention.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few mi-
nutes, then start the engine in the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
6-03
For emergencies
CAUTION Engine overheating 3. Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the
fan is not turning, stop the engine immediate-
E00800601985
If the water temperature gauge indication remains ly and have it checked.
l Do not attempt to start the engine by pull- in the overheating zone for a long time, the engine
ing or pushing the vehicle.
It could damage your vehicle. may be overheating. If this occurs, take the follow-
ing corrective measures:
l Always wear protective eye goggles when
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
working near the battery.
2. Check whether steam is coming from the en-
l Keep the battery out of the reach of chil-
gine compartment.
dren.
[If steam does not come from the engine com-
NOTE partment]
l On vehicles with anti-lock brake system, if With the engine still running, raise the bon-
the vehicle is put in motion without fully net to ventilate the engine compartment.
charging the battery, it might cause the loss
of smooth engine operation and the antilock [If steam is coming from the engine compart-
brake warning lamp to illuminate. 1- Radiator cap
ment]
Refer to “Anti-lock brake system (ABS)” on 2- Cooling fan
Stop the engine, and when the steam stops,
page 4-43. 3- Reserve tank
raise the bonnet to ventilate the engine com-
*: if so equipped
partment. Restart the engine.
WARNING WARNING
l Do not open the bonnet while steam is com- l Be careful not to get your hands or
clothes caught in the cooling fan.
ing from the engine compartment. It
6 could cause steam or hot water to spurt
out, causing burns. Hot water could spurt
out even when there is no steam coming
out, and some parts will be very hot. Be
very careful when opening the bonnet.
l Be careful of hot steam, which could be
blowing off the reserve tank cap.
l Do not attempt to remove the radiator
cap while the engine is hot.
6-04
For emergencies
4. After the engine coolant temperature has drop-

ped to the normal temperature, stop the engine.
6. Add coolant to the radiator and/or reserve
tank if necessary (refer to the “Maintenance”
Bleeding the fuel system
E00800700178
section.) The fuel system should be bled to remove air as de-
scribed below if the fuel supply is exhausted during
travel.
CAUTION
Type 1
l Do not add coolant while the engine is
1. Loosen the air plug (A) at the top of the fuel
hot. Suddenly adding cold coolant could
damage the engine. Wait for the engine to filter.
cool down, then add coolant a little at a
time.
7. Examine the radiator hoses for coolant leak-

age and the drive belt for looseness or damage.
If there is anything wrong with the cooling
5. Check the coolant level in the reserve tank. system or drive belt, we recommend you to
have it checked and repaired.
WARNING
l If there is none, make sure that the en-
gine has cooled down before removing
the radiator cap, because hot steam or boil-
ing water otherwise will gush from the fill-
er port and may scald you.
6-05
For emergencies
2. Pump the hand pump (B) until there are no

more bubbles in the fuel coming out of the
If the engine does not start, repeat the process above. Removal of water from the fuel
air plug (A). When doing this, place a cloth filter
E00800800267
around the air plug (A) to prevent the escap-
If the fuel filter indication lamp in the instrument
ing fuel from spraying out.
panel illuminates during driving, it indicates that wa-
ter has accumulated in the fuel filter. If this occurs,
remove the water as described below.
Type 1
1. Loosen the drain plug (A) at the bottom of
the fuel filter.
CAUTION
l Do not smoke or have any other open
3. Tighten the air plug (A) when there are no flame near the vehicle while bleeding the
more bubbles in the fuel. fuel system.
4. Continue pumping until the hand pump (B) l Be sure to carefully clean away any spilt
becomes stiff. fuel which could ignite and cause a fire.
5. Finally, check to be sure that there is no leak-
age of fuel.
If in doubt, we recommend you to consult a
6 specialist for necessary information.
Type 2
Pump the hand pump (A) at the top of the fuel fil-
ter until the hand pump becomes stiff.
Then try again to start the engine.
6-06
For emergencies
2. Operate the hand pump (B) slowly 6 or 7

times in order to force the water out through
Type 2 Tools, jack and jack handle
E00800900819
the drain plug (A).
Storage
The storage location of the tools, jack and jack han-
dle should be remembered in case of an emergency.
Single cab
Type 1
Take your vehicle to a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-

thorized Service Point to remove the water from
3. Tighten the drain plug (A) when water no lon- the fuel filter.
ger comes out.
4. Loosen the air plug and bleed the air.
(Refer to “Bleeding the fuel system” on page
6-05.) A- Tool (wheel nut wrench)
5. Check to be sure that the fuel filter indication B- Jack handle
lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is C- Jack
turned to “ON”, and that it goes off when the
engine is started. If in doubt, we recommend
you to consult a specialist for necessary infor-
mation.
6
CAUTION
l Do not smoke or have any other open
flame near the vehicle while bleeding the
fuel system.
l Be sure to carefully clean away any water
drained out because any fuel mixed with
the water could ignite and cause a fire.
6-07
For emergencies
Type 2 Double cab Vehicles with rear retractable power window

Except for vehicles with rear retractable power
window Type 1
Type 1
A- Tools
B- Jack handle
C- Jack A- Tool (wheel nut wrench)
B- Jack
Club cab A- Tool (wheel nut wrench) C- Jack handle
B- Jack handle
C- Jack Type 2
Type 2
6
A- Tools A- Tools
B- Jack B- Jack
C- Jack handle A- Tools C- Wheel nut wrench
B- Jack handle D- Jack handle
C- Jack
6-08
For emergencies
Tools Single cab, Club cab, Double cab 3. Remove the securing nut (E), and then take
E00801900382 1- Tool bag out the jack (F).
2- Wheel nut wrench
Type 1 3- Plier
4- Driver
Single cab, Double cab Club cab 5- Spanner
Removing and storing the tools, jack

and jack handle
E00802300240
Single cab
The tools, jack, and jack handle are located behind
the seat.
1. Tip forward the seatback.
(Refer to “Folding the seatback forward” on 4. Remove the jack handle (G) from the holder
page 2-06.) (H), and take out the handle.
Single cab, Double cab 2. <Type 1>
1- Wheel nut wrench Remove the wheel nut wrench (A) from the
holder (B), and take out the wrench.
Club cab <Type 2>
1- Tool bag Remove the securing band (C), and then take
2- Wheel nut wrench out the tools (D).
Type 2
6
5. Reverse the removing procedure when stor-

ing the tool, jack and jack handle.
6-09
For emergencies
NOTE 3. Remove the securing band (A), and then take 5. Remove the jack handle (E) from the holder
l When stowing the jack handle, align the black- out the tools (B). (F), and then take out the jack handle.
marked part (I) of the jack handle with the
holder (J).
4. Remove the securing nut (C), and then take 6. Reverse the removing procedure when stor-
out the jack (D). ing the tools, jack and jack handle.
Club cab
The tools, jack, and jack handle are stored under
NOTE
the floor on the left-hand side of the cargo space.
1. Raise the left side seat cushion. Refer to l When stowing the jack handle, align the col-
oured marking on the jack handle with that
“Folding up the seat cushion (Club cab)” on
on the holder, and fit the jack in the holder.
page 2-07.
Tip forward the seatback of the driver seat.
Double cab
Slide the driver seat forward.
6 2. Open the lid. Except for vehicles with rear retractable power
window
The tool (wheel nut wrench only), jack, and jack
handle are located behind the rear seat.
1. Tip forward the seatback of the rear seat.
(Refer to “Folding the seatback forward” on
page 2-07.)
2. <Type 1>
Remove the wheel nut wrench (A) from the
holder (B), and take out the wrench.
<Type 2>
6-10
For emergencies
Remove the securing band (C), and then take 4. Remove the jack handle (G) from the holder 1. Tip forward the seatback of the rear seat.
out the tools (D). (H), and take out the handle. (Refer to “Folding the seatback forward” on
page 2-07.)
2. <Type 1>
Remove the wheel nut wrench (A) from the
holder of the back panel (B), and take out the
wrench.
<Type 2>
Take out the tools (C) from the rear back
trim (D).
3. Remove the securing nut (E), and then take 5. Reverse the removing procedure when stor-
out the jack (F). ing the tool, jack and jack handle.
NOTE
l When stowing the jack handle, align the black-
marked part (I) of the jack handle with the
holder (H). 3. Remove the securing nut (E), and then take
out the jack (F).
Vehicles with rear retractable power window

The tools, jack, and jack handle are located behind
the rear seat.
6-11
For emergencies
4. Remove the jack handle (G) from the holder To use the jack handle (Club cab, Dou- 3. While pressing the snap pin (F) on the assem-
of the back panel (H), and take out the handle. ble cab with rear retractable power bled handle (E), insert the white-marked han-
dle (G) until it is locked by snap pin as illus-
window only) trated.
E00802400124
1. While pressing the snap pin (A) on the han-
dle that has a black marking, withdraw and re-
move the inner handle (B).
5. Reverse the removing procedure when stor-

ing the tool, jack and jack handle.
NOTE
l When stowing the wheel nut wrench, insert it
into the holder on the back panel as illustrated. 2. Reverse the inner handle (B) then, while press-
ing the snap pin (C), insert it into the outer
handle (D) until it is locked by snap pin as il-
lustrated.
6-12
For emergencies
Jacking up the vehicle WARNING

2WD vehicles with 15 inch wheels
E00801001436
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
l Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the
correct tyre when jacking up the vehicle.
3. On vehicles with manual transmission, turn If the vehicle moves while jacked up, the
the ignition key to the “LOCK” position, jack could slip out of position, leading to
move the gearshift lever to the “R” (Reverse) an accident.
position.
move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) po- NOTE
sition, turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” l The chocks shown in the illustration do not
position. come with your vehicle. It is recommended
4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and set that you keep one in the vehicle for use if nee-
up a warning triangle, flashing signal lamp, ded.
etc., at an adequate distance from the vehi- l If chocks are not available, use stones or any
C- Front jacking point (2WD vehicles with 15
cle, and have all your passengers leave the ve- other objects that are large enough to hold
the wheel in position. inch wheels)
hicle.
5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when it
is raised on the jack, place chocks or blocks 6. Get the spare wheel, jack and jack handle 2WD vehicles with 16 inch wheels and 4WD ve-
(A) at the tyre that is diagonally opposite ready. hicles
from the tyre (B) you are changing. 7. Place the jack under one of the jacking
points shown in the illustration. Use the jack-
ing point closest to the tyre you wish to
change.
D- Front jacking point (2WD vehicles 16 inch

wheels and 4WD vehicles)
6-13
For emergencies
3. Move the jack handle up and down to raise

the ram until just before the jack contacts the
jacking point of the vehicle. Ensure that the
jack will properly contact the vehicle jacking
point.
Move the jack handle up and down to raise
the vehicle.
E- Rear jacking point To raise the vehicle

1. Using the jack handle, turn the release valve
(G) clockwise until it stops.
WARNING
l Set the jack only at the positions shown
here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,
it could dent your vehicle or the jack
might fall over and cause personal injury.
l Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur- NOTE
face. Otherwise, the jack might slip and l This jack is a 2 stage expansion type.
cause personal injury. Always use the
jack on a flat, hard surface. Before set- To lower the vehicle
ting the jack, make sure there are no 1. Put the notch (J) provided on the jack handle
6 sand or pebbles under the jack base. end on the valve (K) of the jack.
NOTE 2. Insert the jack handle in the bracket of the

l When jacking up the rear of the vehicle, turn jack and hook the notch (H) on the jack han-
the tip of the jack so that the grooved portion dle end to the claw (I) of the bracket.
(F) properly meets the designated point.
6-14
For emergencies
2. Using the jack handle, turn the release valve

anticlockwise slowly to lower the ram and re- CAUTION WARNING
move the jack.
l Close the release valve slowly when lower- l Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
ing the vehicle, or the valve may be dam- sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
aged. are very dangerous.
l Do not use a jack except the one that
came with your vehicle.
NOTE l The jack should not be used for any pur-
l Occasionally when the vehicle is jacked up, pose other than to change a tyre.
the grooved portion of the designated point l No one should be in your vehicle when us-
will not come off. When this happens, rock ing the jack.
the vehicle to lower the ram. l Do not start or run the engine while your
l If the jack is difficult to remove by hand, in- vehicle is on the jack.
sert the jack handle (L) into the bracket (M). l Do not turn the raised wheel. The tyres
Then using the handle, remove the jack. still on the ground could turn and make
your vehicle fall off the jack.
3. Press the piston down all the way, and turn
the release valve clockwise as far as possible.
4. Store jack, jack handle and chocks.
WARNING
l Be sure to open the release valve slowly.
If it is opened quickly, the vehicle will
drop abruptly and the jack may come out
of position, causing a serious accident. 6
CAUTION WARNING
l If the release valve is loosened too much l Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the
(2 or more turns) in the anticlockwise di- tyre is raised off the ground. It is danger-
rection, the jack’s oil will leak and the ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
jack cannot be used. l Do not get under your vehicle while using
the jack.
6-15
For emergencies
Spare wheel CAUTION

3. Securely insert the pin (C) on the jack handle
into the holder (D) of the spare wheel carrier.
E00801100094
The spare wheel is stored under the floor of the car-
go bed.
l Check the air pressure of the spare wheel
frequently and make sure it is ready for
emergency use at any time.
Driving with an insufficient tyre pressure
can lead to an accident. If you have no
choice but to drive with an insufficient
tyre pressure, keep your speed down and
inflate the tyre to the correct pressure as
soon as possible. (Refer to “Tyre inflation
pressures” on page 8-12.)
Maintaining the spare wheel at the high-
est specified air pressure will ensure that
it can always be used under any condi-
tions (city/high-speed driving, varying
4. Insert the wheel nut wrench (E) through the
load weight, etc.).
A- Spare wheel end of the jack handle hole (F), and then turn
it anticlockwise to lower the spare wheel com-
To remove pletely to the ground and to slack the chain.
CAUTION 1. Set the jack handle. (Club cab, Double cab
with rear retractable power window only)
l When removing the spare wheel, put on (Refer to “To use the jack handle” on page
gloves. Removing the spare wheel with 6-12.)
your bare hands may cause injury to the 2. Insert the jack handle (A) in the hole (B) be-
fingers. low the rear gate.
6
6-16
For emergencies
5. Remove the hanger disc (G) from the spare

wheel.
How to change a tyre
E00801202653
Before changing a tyre, first stop your vehicle in a
safe, flat location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. On vehicles with manual transmission, turn
the ignition key to the “LOCK” position,
move the gearshift lever to the “R” (Reverse)
position.
move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) po-
sition, turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”
NOTE position.
l Confirm that the hanger disc is securely fit- 4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and set
ted in the wheel disc hole when the wheel is
up a warning triangle, flashing signal lamp,
To install just lifted off the ground.
etc., at an adequate distance from the vehi-
1. Install the hanger disc (A) in the wheel disc cle, and have all your passengers leave the ve-
hole. 3. After winding up the spare wheel sufficient- hicle.
ly, make sure it is not loose (the tightening 5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when it
torque should be approximately 40 Nm) then is raised on the jack, place chocks or blocks
withdraw the jack handle, taking care not to (A) at the tyre that is diagonally opposite
turn it in the reverse direction. from the tyre (B) you are changing.
CAUTION
l The spare wheel should always be secure- 6
ly in position.
If a flat tyre is changed, put the flat tyre
in the spare wheel mounting position
with the wheel outer surface upward, and
use the wheel nut wrench to secure it firm-
2. Turn the wheel nut wrench (B) clockwise to ly.
wind up the chain.
6-17
For emergencies
7. Loosen the wheel nuts with the wheel nut

WARNING wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet. CAUTION
l Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the l Handle the wheel carefully when chang-
correct tyre when jacking up the vehicle. Five wheel nuts ing the tyre, to avoid scratching the wheel
If the vehicle moves while jacked up, the surface.
jack could slip out of position, leading to
an accident.
10. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub surface
(C), hub bolts (D) or in the installation holes
NOTE (E) in the wheel, and then mount the spare
l The chocks shown in the illustration do not wheel.
come with your vehicle. It is recommended
that you keep one in the vehicle for use if nee-
ded.
l If chocks are not available, use stones or any
other objects that are large enough to hold
the wheel in position. Six wheel nuts
6. Get the spare wheel, jack, jack handle and

wheel nut wrench ready.
6 WARNING
l Mount the spare wheel with the valve
8. Find the closest jacking point to the flat tyre stem (F) facing outboard. If you cannot
(refer to “Jacking up the vehicle” on page see the valve stem (F), you have installed
6-13). Then position the jack and raise the ve- the wheel backwards.
hicle until the tyre is slightly off the ground. Operating the vehicle with the spare
9. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut wheel installed backwards can cause vehi-
wrench, then take the wheel off. cle damage and result in an accident.
NOTE
l Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body
near the flat tyre. This makes it safer if the
jack slips out of position.
6-18
For emergencies
Tighten the wheel nuts (flange nuts) until the

flanges of the wheel nuts touch the wheel CAUTION
and the wheel is not loose.
l Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts
or the nuts, or they will tighten too much.
Normal wheels and spare wheel
(aluminium wheels)
NOTE
l Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the
spare wheel, but return to the original wheel
and tyre as soon as possible.
l If all four aluminium wheels are changed to
steel wheels, use tapered nuts.
11. Finger-tighten the wheel nuts. (Turn them
clockwise.) 12. Lower the vehicle slowly and then tighten
the nuts crisscross in 2 or 3 steps until each
Vehicles with steel wheels nut has been tightened securely.
Tighten the wheel nuts (tapered nuts) until With a spare wheel, tighten the wheel nuts un-
the tapered parts of the wheel nuts make Tightening torque
til the tapered parts of the wheel nuts make Steel wheel: 137 to 157 Nm
light contact with the seats of the wheel light contact with the seats of the wheel
holes and the wheel is not loose. Aluminium wheel: 118 to 137 Nm
holes and the wheel is not loose. (Achieved by applying a force at the end
With a spare wheel, tighten the wheel nuts in
the same way. of the wheel nut wrench supplied with
Spare wheel (steel wheels) the vehicle.
Steel wheel: 510 to 580 N
Aluminium wheel: 440 to 500 N)
Five wheel nuts 6
Vehicles with aluminium wheels
6-19
For emergencies
Six wheel nuts Towing

E00801502816
If your vehicle needs to be towed

If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have
it done by your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-
ized Service Point or a commercial tow truck service.
In the following cases, transport the vehicle using a

tow truck.
l The engine runs but the vehicle does not
move or abnormal noise is produced.
l Inspection of the vehicle’s underside reveals
CAUTION CAUTION that oil or some other fluid is leaking.
l Never use your foot or a pipe extension l The tyre pressure should be periodically
If a wheel gets stuck in a ditch, do not try to tow
for extra force in the wheel nut wrench. checked and maintained at the specified
the vehicle. Please contact your MITSUBISHI
If you do so, you will tighten the nut too pressure while the tyre is stowed.
MOTORS Authorized Service Point or a commer-
much. l After changing the tyre and driving the ve-
cial tow truck service for assistance.
hicle about 1,000 km (620 miles), retight-
en the wheel nuts to make sure that they
13. Lower and remove the jack, then store the Only when you cannot receive a towing service
have not come loose.
jack, jack handle, wheel nut wrench, flat from a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-
tyre, and chocks. Have your damaged tyre re- l If the steering wheel vibrates when driv-
ice Point or commercial tow truck service, tow
ing after changing the tyre, we recom-
paired as soon as possible. your vehicle carefully in accordance with the in-
mend you to have the tyres checked for
14. Check your tyre inflation pressure. The cor- structions given in “Emergency towing” in this part.
balance.
rect pressures are shown on the door label.
6 See the illustration. l Do not mix one type of tyre with another
or use a different size from the one listed.
This would cause early wear and poor han-
dling.
6-20
For emergencies
The regulations concerning towing may differ from Towing the vehicle by a tow truck
country to country. It is recommended that you CAUTION
obey the regulations of the area where you are driv-
l If you tow a vehicle with automatic trans-
ing your vehicle. CAUTION mission with the driving wheels on the
ground (Type B) as illustrated, make sure
l This vehicle must not be towed by a tow
that the towing speed and distance given
truck using sling lift type equipment
below are never exceeded, causing dam-
(Type A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift
age to the transmission.
will damage the bumper and front end.
l On 4WD vehicles, be sure to shift the trans-
Towing speed: 50 km/h (30 mph)
fer shift lever to “2H” position and trans-
Towing distance: 50 km (30 miles)
port the vehicle with the driving wheels
on a carriage (Type C, D or E) as illustra-
For the towing speed and the towing dis-
ted. Never try to tow with the transfer
tance, follow the local driving laws and
shift lever in “4H” or “4L” positions and
regulations.
with the front or rear wheels on the
ground (Type B or Type C) as illustrated.
This could result in driving system dam- Towing with front wheels off the ground (Type B)
age or the vehicle may jump at the car- Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-
riage. If you cannot shift the transfer tion (manual transmission) or the selector lever in
shift lever to “2H” position or the trans- the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (automatic transmis-
mission is malfunctioning or damaged, sion).
transport the vehicle with all the wheels Release the parking brake.
on a carriage (Type D or E) as illustrated.
l If vehicles equipped with the Active Sta-
bility & Traction Control system (ASTC) CAUTION
are towed with the ignition switch in the
“ON” position and only the front wheels l Never tow an automatic transmission ve- 6
hicle with the front wheels up (and the
or only the rear wheels raised off the
rear wheels on the ground) (Type B)
ground, the active Traction Control Sys-
when the automatic transmission fluid lev-
tem may operate, resulting in an accident.
el is low. This may cause serious and ex-
l On 2WD vehicles, if the transmission is
pensive damage to the transmission.
malfunctioning or damaged, transport
the vehicle with the driving wheels on a
carriage (Type C, D or E) as illustrated.
6-21
For emergencies
Towing with rear wheels off the ground (Type C) Front (2WD vehicles with 16 inch wheels and l Take care that the tow rope is kept as horizon-
Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi- 4WD vehicles) tal as possible. An angled tow rope can dam-
tion (manual transmission) or the selector lever in age the vehicle body.
the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (automatic transmis- l Secure the tow rope to the same side towing
sion). Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” position hook, to keep the tow rope as straight as pos-
and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead po- sible.
sition with a rope or tie-down strap. Never place
the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position when 2. Keep the engine running.
towing. If the engine is not running, turn the ignition
key to the “ACC” or “ON” position to un-
lock the steering wheel.
Emergency towing
If towing service is not available in an emergency,
your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable
or chain secured to the towing hook.
CAUTION
If your vehicle is to be towed by another vehicle, l When the engine is not running, the
pay careful attention to the following points. Rear* brake booster and power steering pump
do not operate. This means higher brake
If your vehicle is to be towed by another vehicle depression force and higher steering ef-
1. The front towing hooks (A) and rear towing fort are required. Therefore, vehicle oper-
hook (B) are located as shown in the illustra- ation is more difficult than usual.
tion. Secure the tow rope to the towing hook. l Do not leave the key in the “LOCK” posi-
tion. The steering wheel will lock, causing
loss of control.
Front (2WD vehicles with 15 inch wheels)
3. Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)
6 position (manual transmission) or the selec-
tor lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (au-
NOTE tomatic transmission).
4. On 4WD vehicles, the transfer shift lever to
l Using any part other than the designated tow- “2H” position.
ing hooks could result in damage to the vehi-
5. Turn on the hazard warning lamps if required
cle body.
by law. (Follow the local driving laws and
l Using a wire rope or metal chain can result
regulations.)
in damage to the vehicle body. It is best to
6. During towing make sure that close contact
use a non-metallic rope. If you use a wire
is maintained between the drivers of both ve-
rope or metal chain, wrap it with cloth at any
hicles, and that the vehicles travel at low
point where it touches the vehicle body.
speed.
6-22
For emergencies
NOTE NOTE
WARNING l Using any part other than the designated tow- l Your vehicle should only be used to tow an-
l To prevent entry of exhaust gas from the ing hook could result in damage to the vehi- other vehicle if the weight of the other vehi-
towing vehicle, set your air selection lever cle body. cle is less than the weight of your vehicle.
to the recirculation position.
CAUTION
l Avoid sudden braking, sudden accelera-
tion and sharp turning; such operation
could cause damage to the towing hooks
or the tow rope.
People in the vicinity could be injured as
a result.
l When towing or being towed down a long
slope, the brakes may overheat reducing
the effectiveness. In this situation, have
your vehicle transported by a tow truck.
l When the vehicle with automatic trans- CAUTION
mission is to be towed by another vehicle
with the all wheels on the ground, make
l On vehicles with super select 4WD, when
you are going to tow another vehicle,
sure that the towing speed and distance move the transfer shift lever to “4H” posi-
given below are never exceeded, causing tion.
damage to the transmission. Selecting “2H” drive may increase the dif-
Towing speed: 50 km/h (30 mph)
ferential oil temperature, resulting in pos-
sible damage to the driving system. 6
Towing distance: 50 km (30 miles) Further, the drive train will be subjected
to excessive loading possibly leading to oil
For the towing speed and the towing dis- leakage, component seizure, or other seri-
tance, follow the local driving laws and ous faults.
regulations.
If your vehicle tows another vehicle (vehicles with

rear towing hook only)
The rear towing hook is located as shown in the il-
lustration. Secure the tow rope to the rear towing
hook.
6-23
For emergencies
Operation under adverse driving NOTE l Depressing the brake pedal during travel on
snowy or icy roads may cause tyre slippage
conditions l Depress the accelerator pedal gradually when
starting the vehicle. and skidding. When traction between the
E00801702140
tyres and the road is reduced the wheels may
On a flooded road skid and the vehicle cannot readily be
If your vehicle becomes stuck in sand, brought to a stop by conventional braking
mud or snow l Avoid flooded roads. Water could enter the
techniques. Braking will differ, depending
brake discs, resulting in temporarily ineffec-
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or tive brakes. In such cases, lightly depress the upon whether you have anti-lock brake sys-
mud, it can often be moved with a rocking motion. brake pedal to see if the brakes operate prop- tem (ABS). If you do have ABS, brake by
Move the selector lever alternately between the erly. If they do not, lightly depress the pedal pressing the brake system pedal hard, and
“L” (LOW) and “R” (REVERSE) position (with several times while driving in order to dry keeping it pressed. If you do not have ABS,
manual transmission, between 1st and Reverse), the brake pads. pump the brake pedal with short rapid jabs,
while applying slight pressure to the accelerator ped- each time fully applying and fully releasing
al.
l When driving in rain or on a road with many
for greatest effect.
puddles a layer of water may form between
Avoid racing the engine or spinning the wheels. Pro- the tyres and the road surface. l Allow extra distance between your vehicle
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in This reduces a tyre’s frictional resistance on and the vehicle in front of you, and avoid sud-
overheating and transmission failure. Allow the en- the road, resulting in loss of steering stability den braking.
gine to idle for a few minutes to let the transmis- and braking capability. l Accumulation of ice on the braking system
sion cool between rocking attempts. can cause the wheels to lock. Pull away from
If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking at- To cope with this, observe the following items: a standstill slowly after confirming safety
tempts, seek other assistance. around the vehicle.
(a) Drive your vehicle at slow speed.
WARNING (b) Do not drive on worn tyres. Always

maintain the specified tyre inflation
CAUTION
l When attempting to rock your vehicle out pressures. l Do not press the accelerator pedal rapid-
6 of a stuck position, be sure that the area
around the vehicle is clear of people and On a snow-covered or frozen road
ly. If the wheels break free of the ice, the
vehicle could suddenly start moving and
physical objects. The rocking motion may possibly cause an accident.
cause the vehicle to suddenly launch for- l When driving on a snow-covered or frozen
road, it is recommended that you use snow
ward or backward, causing injury or dam-
age to nearby people or objects.
tyres or tyre chains. On a bumpy or rutted road
Refer to the “Snow tyres” and “Tyre chains” l Drive as slow as possible when driving on
sections. bumpy or rutted roads.
On 2WD vehicles, it is recommended to start the ve- l Avoid high-speed operation, sudden acceler-
hicle with parking brake partially, but not complete- ation, abrupt brake application and sharp cor-
ly, applied by slightly pulling the parking brake lev- nering.
er.
After the vehicle has become free, do not forget to
release the parking brake.
6-24
For emergencies
CAUTION
l The impact on tyres and/or wheels when
driving on a bumpy or rutted road can
damage the tyre and/or wheel.
6-25
Vehicle care
Vehicle care precautions...............................................................7-02

Cleaning the interior of your vehicle............................................7-02
Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle...........................................7-03
7
Vehicle care
Vehicle care precautions Cleaning the interior of your NOTE

E00900100870
vehicle l Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and protec-
In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, it is tants containing silicons or wax.
E00900200288
necessary to perform regular maintenance using the After cleaning the interior of your vehicle with wa- Such products may cause annoying reflec-
proper procedures. Always maintain your vehicle ter, cleaner or similar, wipe and dry in a shady, well- tions and obscure vision.
in compliance with environmental pollution control ventilated area.
regulations. Carefully select the materials used for
washing, etc., to be sure that they do not contain cor-
Upholstery
E00900500018
rosives. If in doubt, we recommend you to consult
a specialist for selection of these materials. CAUTION 1. To maintain the value of your new vehicle,
handle the upholstery carefully and keep the
l Do not use organic substances (solvents, interior clean.
benzine, kerosene, alcohol, petrol, etc.) or Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean the
CAUTION alkaline or acidic solutions. seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic leather
These chemicals can cause discolouring, should be cleaned with an appropriate clean-
l Cleaning products can be dangerous.
staining or cracking of the surface. er, and cloth fabrics can be cleaned with ei-
Some are poisonous. Others can burst in- If you use cleaners or polishing agents, ther upholstery cleaner or a 3 % solution of
to flame if you strike a match or drop make sure their ingredients do not in- neutral detergent in lukewarm water.
them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some clude the substances mentioned above. 2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum cleaner
are dangerous if you breathe their fumes
in a closed space. When you use anything and remove any stains with carpet cleaner.
in a container to clean your vehicle, al- Oil and grease can be removed by lightly dab-
NOTE bing with a clean colourfast cloth and stain re-
ways follow the instructions and always l Always read the instructions on the cleaner la-
open your vehicle doors or windows when mover.
bel.
you’re cleaning the inside. Never use the
following to clean your vehicle: Genuine leather*
• Petrol Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and E00900600817
• Paint Thinner flocked parts 1. Gently wipe off with gauze or other soft
• Benzine E00900300045 cloth soaked with a 5 % aqueous solution of
• Kerosene 1. Gently wipe off with gauze or other soft neutral detergent.
• Turpentine cloth soaked with a 3 % aqueous solution of 2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out
7 • Naphtha
• Lacquer Thinner
neutral detergent.
2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out
well. Using this cloth, wipe off the detergent
thoroughly.
• Carbon Tetrachloride well. Using this cloth, wipe off the detergent 3. Apply leather protecting agent to the genuine
• Nail Polish Remover thoroughly. leather surface.
• Acetone
l These are all dangerous, and can damage
your vehicle.
7-02
Vehicle care
NOTE Cleaning the exterior of your

l If genuine leather is wet with water or is wash- CAUTION
ed in water, wipe off water as quickly as pos- vehicle
sible with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mil- E00900700010 l When washing the under side of your ve-
If the following is left on your vehicle, it may hicle or wheel, be careful not to injure
dew may grow. your hands.
cause corrosion, discolouration and stains, wash
l The genuine leather surface may be damaged
the vehicle as soon as possible. l Refrain from using a car wash as its brush-
if a nylon brush or synthetic fibre is rubbed es may scratch the paint surface, causing
hard against it. l Seawater, anti-freeze for road use.
it to lose its gloss.
l Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene, l Soot and dust, iron powder from factories, Scratches will be especially visible on
alcohol and petrol, acid or alkaline solvents chemical substance (acids, alkalis, coal-tar,
etc.). darker coloured vehicles.
may discolour the genuine leather surface.
Be sure to use neutral detergents. l Droppings from birds, carcasses of insects, l Never spray or splash water on the electri-
tree sap, etc. cal components in the engine compart-
l Remove dirty patches or oil substances quick- ment, as this may adversely affect engine
ly as they can stain genuine leather. starting.
l The genuine leather surface may harden and Washing Exercise caution also when washing the
shrink if it is exposed to direct sun for long E00900902016
underbody; be careful not to spray water
hours. When your vehicle is parked, place it Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust picked up
into the engine compartment.
in the shade as much as possible. from the road surface can damage the paint coat
and body of your vehicle if left in prolonged contact. l Some types of hot water washing equip-
l When the temperature of the vehicle interior ment apply high pressure and heat to the
rises in summer, vinyl products left on the Frequent washing and waxing is the best way to pro-
vehicle. They may cause heat distortion
genuine leather seat may deteriorate and tect your vehicle from this damage. This will also
and damage to the vehicle resin parts and
stick to the seat. be effective in protecting it from environmental el-
may result in flooding of the vehicle inte-
ements such as rain, snow, salt air, etc.
rior. Therefore; observe the following.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Park the
• Maintain a distance of approx. 50 cm
vehicle in the shade and spray it with water to re-
or more between the vehicle body and
move dust. Next, using an ample amount of clean
the washing nozzle.
water and a car washing brush or sponge, wash the
• When washing around the door glass,
vehicle from top to bottom.
hold the nozzle at a distance of more
Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. Rinse
than 50 cm and at right angles to the
thoroughly and wipe dry with a soft cloth. After
washing the vehicle, carefully clean the joints and
glass surface.
7
flanges of the doors, bonnet, etc., where dirt is like-
ly to remain.
7-03
Vehicle care
NOTE
CAUTION l To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping CAUTION
l After washing the vehicle, drive the vehi- on the doors, bonnet, etc., they should be trea- l On vehicles with a sunroof, be careful
cle slowly while lightly depressing the ted with silicone spray. when waxing the area around the sunroof
brake pedal several times in order to dry opening, not to put any wax on the weath-
out the brakes. Waxing erstrip (black rubber). If stained with
Leaving the brakes wet could result in re- E00901000687 wax, the weatherstrip cannot maintain a
duced braking performance. Also, there Waxing the vehicle will help prevent the adherence weatherproof seal with the sunroof.
is a possibility that they could freeze up of dust and road chemicals to the paintwork. Apply
or become inoperative due to rust, render- a wax solution after washing the vehicle, or at least
ing the vehicle unable to move. once every three months to assist displacing of water. Polishing
E00901100011
l When using an automatic car wash, pay Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. You
The vehicle should only be polished if the paint-
attention to the following items, referring should wax after the surfaces have cooled.
work has become stained or lost its lustre. Matt-fin-
to the operation manual or consulting a
ish parts and plastic bumpers must not be polished,
car wash operator. If the following proce-
polishing these parts will stain them or damage
dure is not followed, it could result in dam- CAUTION their finish.
age to your vehicle.
• The outside mirrors are retracted. l Waxes containing high abrasive com-
Damaged paint
• If your vehicle is equipped with the pil- pounds should not be used. Such waxes re- E00901200155
lar antenna, it can be retracted. move rust and stains effectively from the Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat should
• If your vehicle is equipped with the paintwork but they are harmful to the lus- be touched up as soon as possible with
roof antenna, it can be removed. tre on the painted surface and the plated MITSUBISHI touch-up paint to prevent corrosion.
surface. Check body areas facing the road or the tyres care-
Further, they are harmful to glossy surfa- fully for damage to the paint coat caused by flying
During cold weather ces such as grille, garnish, mouldings, etc.
Salt and other chemicals spread on the roads in stones, etc. The paint code number for your vehicle
some areas in winter can have a harmful effect on
l Do not use petrol or paint thinners to re- can be found on the vehicle information code plate.
move road tar or other contamination to (Refer to “Vehicle labeling” on page 9-02.)
the vehicle body. You should therefore wash the ve- the vehicle surface.
hicle as often as possible in accordance with our
care-instructions. It is recommended to have a pres-
l Do not apply wax on the areas having Cleaning plastic parts
black mat coating as it can cause uneven
7
E00901300446
ervative applied and the underfloor protection discolouration, patches, blurs, etc. If Use a sponge or chamois leather.
checked before and after the cold weather season. stained with wax, immediately wipe off If a car wax adheres on a grey or black rough sur-
After washing your vehicle, wipe off all water- with a piece of soft cloth and warm water. face of the bumper, moulding or lamps, the surface
drops from the rubber parts around the doors to pre- becomes white. In such a case, wipe it off using
vent the doors from freezing. lukewarm water and soft cloth or chamois leather.
7-04
Vehicle care
Wiper blades
CAUTION CAUTION E00901700017
Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove grease,
l Do not use a scrubbing brush or other l Do not use a brush or other hard imple- dead insects, etc., from the wiper blades. Replace
hard tools as they may damage the plastic ment on the wheels.
the wiper blades when they no longer wipe proper-
part surface. Doing so could scratch the wheels.
ly. (Refer to page “Wiper blades” on page 8-17.)
l Do not use wax containing compound (pol- l Do not use any cleaner that contains an
ishing powder) which may damage the abrasive substance or is acidic or alka- Cleaning the sunroof*
plastic part surface. line. Doing so could cause the coating on E00901800180
l Do not bring the plastic parts into contact the wheels to peel or become discoloured Clean the inside of the sunroof with a soft cloth.
with petrol, light oil, brake fluids, engine or stained. Hard deposits should be wiped away with a cloth
oils, greases, paint thinners, and sulphu- l Do not directly apply hot water using a dipped in warm, neutral detergent solution. Wipe
ric acid (battery electrolyte) which may steam cleaner or by any other means. away the solution with a sponge dipped in fresh wa-
crack, stain or discolour the plastic parts. l Contact with seawater and road deicer ter.
If they touch the plastic parts, wipe them can cause corrosion. Rinse off such sub-
off with soft cloth, chamois or the like stances as soon as possible. NOTE
and an aqueous solution of neutral deter-
gent then immediately rinse the affected l The surface treatment on the inside of the
Window glass glass may be removed if hard cloth or organ-
parts with water.
E00901600058 ic solvent (benzine, kerosene, thinner, etc.) is
The window glass can normally be cleaned using used.
Chrome parts only a sponge and water.
E00901400014 Glass cleaner can be used to remove oil, grease, Engine compartment
In order to prevent spots and corrosion of chrome dead insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe dry E00902100265
parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and apply a with a clean, dry, soft cloth. Never use the same Clean the engine compartment at the beginning and
special protective coating. This should be done cloth to wipe the window glass as would be used to end of winter. Pay particular attention to flanges,
more frequently in winter. wipe the paintwork; wax from the painted surfaces crevices and peripheral parts where dust containing
could adhere to the glass and reduce its transparen- road chemicals and other corrosive materials might
Aluminium wheels* cy and visibility. collect.
E00901500116
1. Remove dirt using a sponge while sprinkling If salt and other chemicals are used on the roads in
NOTE your area, clean the engine compartment at least ev-
water on the vehicle.
2. Use neutral detergent on any dirt that cannot l To clean the inside of the rear window, al- ery three months. 7
be removed easily with water. ways use a soft cloth and wipe the window Never spray or splash water on the electrical com-
Rinse off the neutral detergent after washing glass along the demister heater element so as ponents in the engine compartment, as this may
the vehicle. not to cause damage. cause damage.
3. Dry the vehicle thoroughly using a chamois Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic parts and
leather or a soft cloth. so on into contact with sulphuric acid (battery elec-
trolyte) which may crack, stain or discolour them.
7-05
Vehicle care
If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth, cha-

mois or the like and an aqueous solution of neutral
detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts
with plenty of water.
7-06
Maintenance
Service precautions.......................................................................8-02
Catalytic converter........................................................................8-02
Bonnet...........................................................................................8-03
Engine oil......................................................................................8-04
Engine coolant..............................................................................8-05
Automatic transmission fluid*......................................................8-06
Washer fluid.................................................................................8-07
Brake fluid....................................................................................8-07
Clutch fluid*.................................................................................8-08
Power steering fluid......................................................................8-09
Battery..........................................................................................8-09
Tyres.............................................................................................8-11
Clutch pedal free play*.................................................................8-15
Brake pedal free play....................................................................8-16
Parking brake lever stroke............................................................8-16
Wiper blades.................................................................................8-17
General maintenance....................................................................8-18
For cold and snowy weather.........................................................8-19
Fusible links..................................................................................8-19
Fuses.............................................................................................8-20
Replacement of lamp bulbs..........................................................8-23
8
Maintenance
Service precautions WARNING Catalytic converter

E01000100706 E01000200925
Adequate care of your vehicle at regular intervals For ordinary use, there are no particular precautions.
serves to preserve the value and appearance as long
l Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open The exhaust gas scavenging devices used with the
flames around fuel or battery. The fumes
as possible. are flammable. catalytic converter are extremely efficient for the re-
Maintenance items as described in this owner’s man- duction of noxious gases. The catalytic converter is
ual can be performed by the owner.
l Be extremely cautious when working
installed in the exhaust system.
around the battery. It contains poisonous
We recommend you to have the periodic inspection and corrosive sulphuric acid. It is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
and maintenance performed by a MITSUBISHI ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent possi-
MOTORS Authorized Service Point or another spe-
l Do not get under your vehicle with just
ble catalyst damage.
the body jack supporting it. Always use
cialist. automotive jack stands.
In the event a malfunction or other problem is dis-
l Improper handling of components and
covered, we recommend you to have it checked materials used in the vehicle can endan- CAUTION
and repaired. This section contains information on ger your personal safety. We recommend
inspection maintenance procedures that you can do you to consult a specialist for necessary in- l Damage to the catalytic converter can re-
yourself. Follow the instructions and cautions for sult if your vehicle is not kept in proper
formation. operating condition. In the event of an en-
each of the various procedures.
gine malfunction particularly involving
engine misfire or other apparent loss of
WARNING performance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly.
l When checking or servicing the inside of Continued operation of your vehicle with
the engine compartment, make sure the a severe overheated condition may result
engine is switched off and has had a in possible damage to the converter and
chance to cool down. vehicle.
l If it is necessary to do work in the engine
compartment with the engine running, be
especially careful that your clothing, hair,
etc., does not become caught by the fans,
WARNING
drive belts, or other moving parts. l As with any vehicle, do not park or oper-
l For vehicle with air conditioning, the fan ate this vehicle in areas where combusti-
may turn on automatically even if the en- ble materials such as dry grass or leaves
gine is not running; turn the ignition key can come in contact with a hot exhaust
to “LOCK” position and remove the key since a fire could occur.
8 to ensure safety while you work in the en- l Paint should not be applied to the catalyt-
gine compartment. ic converter.
8-02
Maintenance
The catalytic converter itself gets hot quickly, and

may be damaged if overheated. The following
Bonnet Raise the bonnet while pressing the safety lock.
E01000302281
points should be noted in order to prevent the igni-
tion of unburned fuel within the catalytic converter. To open
l Do not drive with an extremely low fuel lev- Pull the release lever towards you to unlock the bon-
el; running out of fuel could cause damage to net.
the catalytic converter.
l Do not switch OFF the ignition switch while
driving. LHD
l Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing

the vehicle. If the battery is weak or dis-
charged, use another battery to start the en-
gine.
l Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods
during very rough idle or malfunctioning op-
erating conditions. NOTE
l Do not race the engine when turning off the l Only open the bonnet when the wipers are in
ignition switch. This will cause the catalytic the parked position. Failure to do so may
converter to be damaged due to contact with cause damage to the bonnet, wiper arms or
unburnt fuel. front windscreen.
l Stop driving the vehicle if you think the per- RHD
formance is noticeably low, or if the engine
Support the bonnet by inserting the support bar in
has a malfunction such as with the ignition,
its slot.
etc.
If it is impractical to stop driving immediate-
ly, reduce the speed and drive for only a
short time. We recommend you to have your
vehicle inspected as soon as possible.
l In unusual situations involving major engine
problems, a burnt smell may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating.
If this occurs, the vehicle should be stopped
in a safe place, the engine switched off and
the vehicle allowed to cool. Once the engine
is cool, a service, including a tune-up to man- 8
ufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained
immediately.
8-03
Maintenance
CAUTION CAUTION Engine oil

E01000402455
l Note that the support bar may disengage l Be careful that hands or fingers are not
the bonnet if the open bonnet is lifted by trapped when closing the bonnet. To check and refill engine oil
a strong wind. l Before driving, make sure that the bon-
l Always insert the support bar into the net is securely locked. An incompletely Type 1 Type 2
hole provided specifically for this pur- locked bonnet can suddenly open while
pose. Supporting the bonnet at any other driving. This can be extremely dangerous.
location could result in the support bar
slipping out and lead to an accident.
To close
Unlatch the support bar and clip it in its holder.
Slowly lower the bonnet to a position about 20 cm
above the closed position, then let it drop.
The engine oil used has a significant effect on the

engine’s performance, service life and startability.
Be sure to use oil of the recommended quality and
appropriate viscosity.
All engines consume a certain amount of oil during
normal operation, and engine oil consumption is
greatly influenced by payload, engine speed, etc.
Therefore, it is important to check the oil level at
regular intervals or before starting a long trip.
This check must be made with the engine warm but
not running. Park the vehicle on a level surface,
stop the engine, and then wait a few moments to al-
NOTE low the engine oil in circulation to return to the oil
l If this does not close the bonnet, release it pan to ensure accurate measurement.
from a slightly higher position. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean cloth.
8 l Do not press down the bonnet hard with a
hand as it may damage the bonnet.
Reinsert the dipstick as far as it goes. Remove the
dipstick and read the oil level, which should al-
ways be within the range indicated.
8-04
Maintenance
If the oil level is below the specified limit, remove

the cap located on the cylinder head cover and add
l Select engine oil of the proper SAE viscosity
number according to the atmospheric temper-
Engine coolant
E01000501202
enough oil to raise the level to within the specified ature.
range. l Use engine oil conforming to the following To check the coolant level
Be sure to use the specified engine oil and do not classification: A translucent coolant reserve tank is located in the
mix various types of oil. Also, avoid mixing differ- • ACEA classification: engine compartment.
ent makes of oil together if possible. “For service A1/ B1, A3/B3, A3/B4, The coolant level in this tank should be kept be-
After adding oil, close the cap securely. A5/B5” tween the “LOW” and “FULL” marks when meas-
• API classification: ured while the engine is cold.
Use only the recommended oils with an ACEA or “For service CF-4”
API classification as specified in this manual.
NOTE
NOTE l Use of additives is not recommended since
l The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the they may reduce the effectiveness of addi-
vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for tives already included in the engine oil. It
example, repeated operation on rough roads, may result in failure of the mechanical assem-
in mountainous regions, on roads with many bly.
uphill and downhill gradients, or over short
distances). Consequently, the oil will require
earlier replacement.
l For handling of used engine oils, refer to
page 05.
Selection of engine oil To add coolant

The cooling system is a closed system and normal-
ly the loss of coolant should be very slight. A no-
ticeable drop in the coolant level could indicate leak-
age. If this occurs, we recommend you to have the
system checked as soon as possible.
If the level should drop below the “LOW” level on
the reserve tank, open the lid and add coolant.
Also, if the reserve tank is completely empty, re-
move the radiator cap and add coolant until the lev-
el reaches the filler neck.
8
8-05
Maintenance
WARNING CAUTION Automatic transmission fluid*

E01000600974
The proper amount of automatic transmission fluid
l Do not open the radiator cap while the en- l Do not use alcohol or methanol anti-
is essential to the life and operation of the automat-
gine is hot. freeze or any engine coolants mixed with
The coolant system is under pressure and alcohol or methanol anti-freeze. The use ic transmission. Either insufficient fluid or exces-
any hot coolant escaping could cause se- of an improper anti-freeze can cause cor- sive fluid could cause transmission trouble. The
vere burns. rosion of the aluminium components. transmission fluid filler port cap is equipped with a
dipstick. Use the following procedure to check the
l For effective anti-corrosion and anti-
fluid level.
Anti-freeze freeze performance, keep the anti-freeze
The engine coolant contains an ethylene glycol anti- concentration within the range of 30 to
corrosion agent. The cylinder head and water pump 60 %. Procedure for checking the fluid level
housing are cast aluminium alloy, and periodic Concentrations exceeding 60 % will re- 1. Check the fluid level after the vehicle has
changing of the engine coolant is necessary to pre- sult in a reduction of both the anti-freeze been driven enough to warm up the transmis-
vent corrosion of these parts. and cooling performance thus adversely sion fluid.
affecting the engine. 2. Park the vehicle on a flat, level surface and
Use “DIA QUEEN SUPER LONG LIFE COOL- l Do not top up with water only. apply the parking brake.
ANT” or equivalent. Water by itself reduces the rust-protec- 3. With the engine idling and the brake pedal
MITSUBISHI Genuine Coolant has excellent pro- tive and anti-freeze qualities of the cool- fully depressed, move the transmission selec-
tection against corrosion and rust formation of all ant and has a lower boiling point. It can tor lever through all the positions from the
metals including aluminium and can avoid block- also cause damage to the cooling system if "P” (PARK) to “L” (LOW) (with 4A/T), the
ages in the radiator, heater, cylinder head, engine it should freeze. Do not use tapwater, as it “P” (PARK) to “D” (DRIVE) (with 5A/T),
block, etc. can cause corrosion and rust formation. stopping momentarily at each position.
Because of the necessity of this anti-corrosion 4. Move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK)
position.
agent, the coolant must not be replaced with plain During cold weather 5. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean
water even in summer. The required concentration If the temperatures in your area drop below freez-
of anti-freeze differs depending on the expected am- lint-free cloth.
ing, there is the danger that the coolant in the en- 6. Reinsert the dipstick as far as it goes.
bient temperature. gine or radiator could freeze and cause severe dam-
age to the engine and/or radiator. The concentra-
Ambient tion should be checked before the start of cold weath-
temperature -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -50 er and anti-freeze added to the system if necessary.
(minimum) °C Add a sufficient amount of anti-freeze to the cool-
Anti-freeze ant to prevent it from freezing.
8 concentra-
tion %
30 35 40 45 50 60 The concentration should be checked before the
start of cold weather and anti-freeze added to the
system if necessary.
8-06
Maintenance
7. Remove dipstick and read the automatic trans-

mission fluid level.
Washer fluid Brake fluid
E01000700672 E01000900687
The fluid level should always be between the The windscreen washer fluid reservoir is in the en-
two marks on the dipstick. gine compartment. To check the fluid level
Check the washer fluid level at regular intervals Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir.
and add washer fluid to reservoir if necessary. The brake fluid level must be between the “MAX”
and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.
WARNING
l Do not spill the fluid onto a hot exhaust NOTE
manifold during topping up or inspec- l The washer fluid container serves the wind- The brake fluid level is monitored by a float. When
tion, or a fire may occur. screen and headlamps (if so equipped). the brake fluid level falls below the “MIN” mark,
the brake fluid warning lamp lights up.
During cold weather The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the brake
Fluid type pads, but this does not indicate any abnormality.
Use only “DIA QUEEN ATF SP III” transmission To ensure proper operation of the washers at low
temperatures, use a fluid containing an anti-freez- If the brake fluid level falls markedly in a short
fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance. length of time, it indicates leaks from the brake sys-
ing agent.
tem.
If this occurs, we recommend you to have the vehi-
cle checked.
Fluid type
Use brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or DOT4.
The brake fluid is hygroscopic. Too much moisture
8
in the brake fluid will adversely affect the brake sys-
tem, reducing the brake performance.
8-07
Maintenance
In addition, the brake fluid reservoir is equipped

with a special cap to prevent the entrance of air,
Clutch fluid* A rapid fluid loss indicates a leak in the clutch sys-
tem which should be inspected by a MITSUBISHI
E01001000281
and this cap should not be removed. MOTORS Authorized Service Point or another spe-
To check the fluid level cialist and repaired immediately.
The clutch fluid in the master cylinder should be
CAUTION checked when performing other underhood service. Fluid type
In addition, the system should be checked for leak- Brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 should
l Take care in handling brake fluid as it is
age at the same time. be used.
harmful to the eyes, may irritate your
Check to make certain that the clutch fluid level is The reservoir cap must be fully tightened to avoid
skin and also damage painted surfaces.
always between the “MAX” and “MIN” level mark- contamination from foreign matter or moisture.
l Use only the specified brake fluid.
ings on the fluid reservoir. DO NOT ALLOW PETROLEUM-BASED FLUID
Do not mix or add different brands of
TO CONTACT, MIX WITH, OR OTHERWISE
brake fluid to prevent chemical reactions.
CONTAMINATE THE BRAKE FLUID. SEAL
Do not let any petroleum-based fluid LHD
DAMAGE WILL RESULT.
touch, mix with, or get into the brake fluid.
This will damage the seals.
l Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to pre-
WARNING
vent the brake fluid from deteriorating ex-
cept maintenance. l Take care in handling brake fluid as it is
l Clean the filler cap before removing and harmful to the eyes and may also cause
close the cap securely after maintenance. damage to painted surfaces. Wipe up any
spills immediately.
RHD
8-08
Maintenance
Power steering fluid Battery Check the electrolyte level at least once every 4
weeks, depending on the operating conditions.
E01001100703 E01001202144
The condition of the battery is very important for If the battery is not used, it will discharge by itself
To check the fluid level quick starting of the engine and proper functioning with time.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir while the en- of the vehicle’s electrical system. Regular inspec- Check it once every 4 weeks and charge with low
gine is idling. tion and care are especially important in cold weath- current as necessary.
Check to make certain that the power steering fluid er.
level is always between the “MAX” and “MIN” lev- During cold weather
el markings on the fluid reservoir and refill the flu- NOTE The capacity of the battery is reduced at low tem-
id, if necessary. peratures. This is an inevitable result of its chemi-
l On vehicles equipped with 2 batteries, when cal and physical properties.
the batteries are replaced, the 2 batteries
should be replaced at the same time. This is why a very cold battery, particularly one
If only a battery is replaced, it will cause short- that is not fully charged, will only deliver a fraction
ening the batteries life. of the starter current which is normally available.
We recommend you to have the battery checked be-
fore the start of cold weather and, if necessary,
Checking battery electrolyte level have it charged or replaced.
This does not only ensure reliable starting, but a bat-
tery which is kept fully charged also has a longer life.
Disconnection and connection

To disconnect the battery cable, stop the engine,
first disconnect the negative (-) terminal and then
the positive (+) terminal.
Fluid type When connecting the battery, first connect the posi-
Use “ATF DEXRON III or DEXRON II”. tive (+) terminal and then the negative (-) terminal.
NOTE
l Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-
necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-
The electrolyte level must be between the specified nal of the battery.
limit on the outside of the battery. Replenish with
distilled water as necessary.
The inside of the battery is divided into several com- 8
partments; remove the cap from each compartment
and fill to the upper mark. Do not top up beyond
the upper mark because spillage during driving
could cause damage.
8-09
Maintenance
Type 1
WARNING CAUTION
l The battery electrolyte is extremely caus- l Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic
tic. Do not allow it to come in contact parts and so on into contact with sulphu-
with your eyes, skin, clothing, or the pain- ric acid (battery electrolyte) which may
ted surfaces of the vehicle. Spilt electro- crack, stain or discolour them.
lyte should be flushed immediately with If they are in contact, wipe off with soft
ample amounts of water. cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous
Irritation to eyes or skin from contact solution of neutral detergent then imme-
with electrolyte requires immediate medi- diately rinse the affected parts with plen-
cal attention. ty of water.
l Ventilate when charging or using the bat-
tery in an enclosed space.
Type 2 NOTE
l Keep the terminals clean. After the battery is
connected, apply terminal protection grease.
CAUTION To clean the terminals, use lukewarm water.
l Never disconnect the battery with the ig- l Check to see if the battery is securely instal-
nition switch in the “ON” position; doing led and cannot be moved during travel. Also
so could damage the vehicle’s electrical check each terminal for tightness.
components. l When the vehicle is to be left unused for a
l Never short-circuit the battery; doing so long period of time, remove the battery and
could cause it to overheat and be damaged. store it in a place where the battery fluid will
l Always wear protective eye goggles when not freeze. The battery should be stored only
working near the battery. in a fully charged condition.
l If the battery is to be quick-charged, first
WARNING disconnect the battery cables.
l Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away l In order to prevent a short circuit, be
sure to disconnect the negative (-) termi-
from the battery because the battery
nal first.
could explode.
l Keep it out of reach of children.
8-10
Maintenance
Tyres
E01001300239
WARNING
l Driving with tyres that are worn, dam-
aged or improperly inflated can lead to a
loss of control or blow out of the tyres
which can result in a collision with seri-
ous or fatal injury.
8-11
Maintenance
Tyre inflation pressures

E01001402423
UP TO 3 PASSENGERS MAX. LOAD OR TRAILER TOWING

Tyre size
Front Rear Front Rear
2.2 bar 2.2 bar 2.2 bar 4.5 bar
195R15C 106/104R 8PR (220 kPa) (220 kPa) (220 kPa) (450 kPa)
{32 psi} {32 psi} {32 psi} {65 psi}
2.4 bar 2.4 bar 2.4 bar 4.5 bar
205R16C 110/108R 8PR (240 kPa) (240 kPa) (240 kPa) (450 kPa)
{35 psi} {35 psi} {35 psi} {65 psi}
2.2 bar 2.2 bar 2.2 bar 2.9 bar
205/80R16 104S RF (220 kPa) (220 kPa) (220 kPa) (290 kPa)
{32 psi} {32 psi} {32 psi} {42 psi}
2.0 bar 2.0 bar 2.0 bar 2.9 bar
{29 psi} {29 psi} {29 psi} {42 psi}
2.0 bar 2.0 bar 2.0 bar 2.9 bar
{29 psi} {29 psi} {29 psi} {42 psi}
Check the tyre inflation pressure of all the tyres while they are cold; if insufficient or excessive, adjust to the specified value.
After the tyre inflation pressure has been adjusted, check the tyres for damage and air leaks. Be sure to put caps on the valves.
8-12
Maintenance
Wheel condition NOTE

E01001800797
l The mark and the location of the tyre tread CAUTION
wear indicators are different depending on l Even if a wheel has the same rim size and
the tyre manufacturer. offset as the specified type of wheel, its
shape may prevent it from being fitted cor-
rectly. We recommend you to consult a
On 4-wheel drive vehicles, when replacement of specialist before using wheels that you
any of the tyres is necessary, replace all of them. have.
CAUTION Tyre rotation

E01001900990
Tyre wear varies with vehicle conditions, road sur-
l Always use tyres of the same size, same
face conditions and individual driver’s driving hab-
type, and same brand, and which have no
wear differences. its. To equalize the wear and help extend tyre life,
1- Location of the tread wear indicator it is recommended to rotate the tyres immediately
Using tyres of different size, type, brands
2- Tread wear indicator after discovery of abnormal wear, or whenever the
or degree of wear, will increase the differ-
ential oil temperature, resulting in possi- wear difference between the front and rear tyres is
Check the tyres for cuts, cracks and other damage. ble damage to the driving system. Fur- recognizable.
Replace the tyres if there are deep cuts or cracks. ther, the drive train will be subjected to
Also check each tyre for pieces of metal or pebbles. excessive loading, possibly leading to oil
The use of worn tyres can be very dangerous be- leakage, component seizure, or other seri-
cause of the greater chance of skidding or hydro- ous faults.
planing. The tread depth of the tyres must exceed
1.6 mm in order for the tyres to meet the minimum
requirement for use. Replacing tyres and wheels
If there are tread wear indicators on the tyres, they E01007200038
will appear in six places on the surface of the tyre

as the tyre wears, thereby indicating that the tyre
no longer meets the minimum requirement for use. CAUTION
When these wear indicators appear, the tyres must
be replaced with new ones. l Avoid using different size tyres from the
one listed and the combined use of differ-
Check that the wheel nuts are tightened correctly. ent types of tyres, as this can affect driv-
Refer to the section entitled “For emergencies” for
information concerning replacement of the tyres.
ing safety.
Refer to “Tyres and wheels” on page
8
9-17.
8-13
Maintenance
When rotating tyres, check for uneven wear and Snow tyres
damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incor- CAUTION E01002000725
rect tyre pressure, improper wheel alignment, out The use of snow tyres is recommended for driving
of balance wheel, or severe braking. We recom- l If the tyres have arrows (A) indicating
on snow and ice. To preserve driving stability,
the correct direction of rotation, swap the
mend you to have it checked to determine the mount snow tyres of the same size and tread pat-
front and rear wheels on the left hand
cause of irregular tread wear. tern on all 4 wheels.
side of the vehicle and the front and rear
Snow tyres worn more than 50% are no longer suit-
wheels on the right hand side of the vehi-
able for use as snow tyres.
Spare tyre used* cle separately. Keep each tyre on its origi-
Snow tyres which do not meet specifications must
nal side of the vehicle. When fitting the
not be used.
tyres, make sure the arrows point in the
direction in which the wheels will turn
when the vehicle moves forward. Any
Front
tyre whose arrow points in the wrong di- CAUTION
rection will not perform to its full poten- l Observe permissable maximum speed for
tial. your snow tyres and the legal speed limit.
Spare tyre not used
NOTE
Front
Front l The laws and regulations concerning snow
tyres (driving speed, required use, type, etc.)
vary. Find out and follow the laws and regu-
lations in the area you intend to drive.
Tyres that have arrows showing rotation direction l If flange nuts are used on your vehicle,
change to tapered nuts when steel wheels are
used.
Front Tyre chains

E01002101534
It is recommended that snow chains are carried in
snow regions and fitted when required to the rear
CAUTION wheels.
On 4WD vehicles in which the driving power is dis-
*- If the spare tyre wheel differs from the stand- l Avoid the combined use of different types tributed preferentially to the rear wheels, ensure
8 ard tyre wheel, do not perform tyre rotation us-
ing a spare wheel.
of tyres.
Using different types of tyres can affect ve-
that the tyre chains are fitted on the rear.
Use only tyre chains which are designed for use
hicle performance and safety. with the tyres mounted on the vehicle: use of the in-
correct size or type of chain could result in damage
to the vehicle body.
8-14
Maintenance
Before fitting tyre chains, we recommend you to

consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv- CAUTION Clutch pedal free play*
E01002200222
ice Point. The max. chain height is as follows. Press down the clutch pedal with your fingers until
l After driving around 100-300 metres,
initial resistance is felt.
stop and retighten the chains.
Max. chain This distance should be within the specified range.
Tyre size Wheel size l Drive carefully and do not exceed
height [mm]
50 km/h (30 mph). Remember, fitting
195R15C 15x6.0 JJ chains is not going to stop accidents from
happening.
205R16C 16x6.0 JJ
l When tyre chains are installed, take care
205/80R16 16x6.0 JJ 22 that they do not damage the disc wheel or
body.
245/70R16 16x7.0 J
l An aluminium wheel can be damaged by
245/65R17 17x7.5 J a tyre chain while driving. When fitting a
tyre chain on an aluminium wheel, take
The speed limit for tyre chain is 50 km/h (30 mph)
care that any part of the chain and fitting
and remove the tyre chains as soon as possible on
cannot be brought into contact with the
snow free roads.
wheel.
l When installing or removing the tyre
A- Free play: 3 to 8 mm
chains, take care that hands and other
WARNING parts of your body are not injured by the
sharp edges of the vehicle body. If the clutch pedal free play is not within the stand-
l DO NOT use a jack when fitting the
ard range, we recommend you to have it checked.
chains, as in thsee conditions, the tyres l Install the chains only on the rear tyres
may slip on the icy road causing the vehi- and tighten them as tightly as possible
cle to slip off the jack. with the ends securely fastened.
NOTE
CAUTION l The laws and regulations concerning the use
of tyre chains vary. Find out and follow the
l Practice fitting the chains before you
laws and regulations of the area you’re driv-
need them.
Don’t expect help from other people in ing in.
the cold. In most countries, it is prohibited by law to
use tyre chains on roads without snow.
l Choose a clear straight stretch of road
where you can pull over and still be seen 8
while you are fitting the chains.
l Do not fit chains before you need them.
This will wear out your tyres and the
road surface.
8-15
Maintenance
Brake pedal free play Parking brake lever stroke Type 2 (RHD)
E01002300281 E01002400527
Stop the engine, depress the brake pedal several Pull the parking brake lever up to check the num-
times, and press down the pedal with your fingers ber of “clicks” that the ratchet makes. One click rep-
until initial resistance is felt. This distance should resents a lever movement of one notch. The lever
be within the specified range. should move the specified number of notches for
normal brake application.
Type 1
A
A- Parking brake lever stroke

Type 1 8 to 9 notches
Type 2 11 to 13 notches
(Parking brake adjustment when pulled with
the force of 200 N)
If the parking brake lever stroke is out of the stand-

A- Free play: 3 to 8 mm ard range, we recommend you to have it checked.
If the brake pedal free play is not within the stand-

ard range, we recommend you to have it checked.
Type 2 (LHD)
WARNING
l Continued operation of the vehicle with
the parking brake lever out of adjust-
ment may result in the vehicle moving
when unattended.
8-16
Maintenance
Wiper blades For LHD vehicles refer to the illustration to NOTE

E01002600385 ensure that the retainers are correctly aligned l If retainers are not supplied with the new wip-
When lifting the wiper arms off the windscreen, as you attach them. er blade, use the retainers from the old blade.
first raise the driver’s side wiper arm and then the
passenger’s side wiper arm. LHD 5. Push the wiper blade until the hook (B) en-
When returning them to their original positions, gages securely with the stopper (A).
first put the passenger’s side wiper arm back in
place and then the driver’s side wiper arm.
If the blades are frozen to the windscreen, do not
operate the wipers until the ice has melted and the
blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be
damaged.
Wiper blade rubber replacement

Driver’s side
1. Lift the wiper arm off the windscreen.
2. Pull the wiper blade until its stopper (A) dis-
engages from the hook (B). Then, pull the
wiper blade further to remove it.
Passenger’s side
1. Lift the wiper arm off the windscreen.
2. Pull the wiper blade until its stopper (A) dis-
RHD
engages from the hook (B). Then, pull the
wiper blade further to remove it.
NOTE
8
4. Insert the wiper blade into the arm, starting
l Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the
with the opposite end of the blade from the
windscreen; it could damage the glass.
stopper. Make sure the hook (B) is fitted cor-
rectly in the grooves in the blade.
3. Attach the retainers (C) to a new wiper blade.
8-17
Maintenance
NOTE 5. Push the wiper blade until the hook (B) en- General maintenance
l Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the gages securely with the stopper (A). E01002700113
windscreen; it could damage the glass.
Fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust
3. Attach the retainers (C) to a new wiper blade. gas leakage
Refer to the illustration to ensure that the re- Look under the body of your vehicle to check for
tainers are correctly aligned as you attach fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust gas leaks.
them.
WARNING
l If you see a suspicious fuel leak or if you
smell fuel, do not operate the vehicle; we
recommend you to call for assistance.
Exterior and interior lamp operation

Operate the combination lamp switch to check that
all lamps are functioning properly.
If the lamps do not illuminate, the probable cause
is a blown fuse or defective lamp bulb. Check the
fuses first. If there is no blown fuses, check the
lamp bulbs.
For information regarding the inspection and re-
placement of the fuses and the lamp bulbs, refer to
“Fuses” on page 8-20 and “Replacement of lamp
bulbs” on page 8-23.
If the fuses and bulbs are all OK, we recommend
4. Insert the wiper blade into the arm, starting you to have your vehicle checked and repaired.
with the opposite end of the blade from the
stopper. Make sure the hook (B) is fitted cor- Meter, gauge and indicator/warning
rectly in the grooves in the blade.
lamps operation
Run the engine to check the operation of all meters,
NOTE
8 l If retainers are not supplied with the new wip-
gauges, and indicator/warning lamps.
If there is anything wrong, we recommend you to
er blade, use the retainers from the old blade. have your vehicle inspected.
8-18
Maintenance
Hinges and latches lubrication For cold and snowy weather Fusible links
Check all latches and hinges, and lubricate if neces- E01002800257 E01002900030
sary by first cleaning and then applying multipur- The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if a
pose grease. Ventilation slots large current attempts to flow through certain elec-
The ventilation slots in front of the windscreen trical systems.
should be kept clear of leaves or brushed clear after In case of a melted fusible link, we recommend
heavy snowfall, so that the operation of the heating you to have your vehicle inspected.
and ventilation systems will not be impaired.
Weatherstripping
To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on the
doors, bonnet, etc., they should be treated with sili-
cone grease or spray.
Additional equipment
It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-han-
dled spade in the vehicle during the winter so that
you can clear away snow if you get stranded. A
small hand-brush for sweeping snow off the vehi-
cle and a plastic scraper for the windscreen and
rear window are also useful.
8-19
Maintenance
Fuses Engine compartment Passenger compartment fuse location (LHD)

E01003000849 In the engine compartment, the fuse block is loca-
Fuse block location ted as shown in the illustration.
E01007600032
To prevent damage to the electrical system due to
shortcircuiting or overloading, each individual cir-
cuit is provided with a fuse.
There are fuse blocks in the passenger compart-
ment and in the engine compartment.
Passenger compartment
The fuse block in the passenger compartment is lo-
cated in front of the driver’s seat at the position
shown in the illustration.
LHD 1- Push the knob.

2- Remove the cover.
Fuse load capacity

E01007700033
The fuse capacity and the name of the electrical sys-
tems protected by the fuses are indicated on the in-
side of the fuse lid located at the driver’s leg area
and on the inside of the fuse block cover for fuses
located in the engine compartment.
Passenger compartment fuse location table
E01007900501
RHD
NOTE
l Spare fuses are contained in the fuse lid. Al-
ways use a fuse of the same capacity for re-
placement.
8
8-20
Maintenance
Passenger compartment fuse location (RHD) Ca- Ca-

No. Symbol Electrical system No. Symbol Electrical system
pacity pacity
7 Tail lamp (right) 7.5 A 26 Electronic controlled unit 15 A
8 Outside rear-view mirrors 7.5 A 27 — Spare fuse 7.5 A
9 28 — Spare fuse 20 A
Engine control unit 7.5 A
29 — Spare fuse 30 A
10 Control unit 7.5 A
l Some fuses may not be installed on your ve-
11 Rear fog lamp 10 A hicle, depending on the vehicle model or spec-
ifications.
12 Central door lock 15 A l The table above shows the main equipment
corresponding to each fuse.
13 Room lamp 10 A The fuse block does not contain spare 10 A
and 15 A fuses. If a fuse of one of these ca-
14 Rear window wiper 15 A pacities blows, replace it temporarily by bor-
15 Gauge 7.5 A rowing the one that matches from:
10 A: Radio
16 Relay 7.5 A 15 A: Cigarette lighter
Replace the borrowed fuse as soon as possible.
17 Heated seat 20 A
18 Option 10 A
Ca- 19 Heated door mirror 7.5 A
No. Symbol Electrical system
pacity
1 Tail lamp (left) 7.5 A 20 Windscreen wiper 20 A
2 21 Reversing lamps 7.5 A

Cigarette lighter 15 A
3 Ignition coil 10 A 22 Demister 30 A
4 Starter motor 7.5 A 23 Heater 30 A
5 Sunroof 20 A 24 Power seat 40 A

8
6 Accessory socket 15 A 25 Radio 10 A
8-21
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse location table Ca- Identification of fuse

E01008000583 No. Symbol Electrical system E01008100308
pacity
Headlamp high-beam Capacity Colour
Engine compartment fuse location 6 10 A
(left) 7.5 A Brown
Headlamp high-beam 10 A Red
7 10 A
(right)
15 A Blue
8 Headlamp low beam (left) 10 A
20 A Yellow
Headlamp low beam
9 10 A Green (fuse type)/
(right) 30 A
Pink (fusible link type)
10 Engine control 20 A 40 A Green (fusible link type)
11 Alternator 7.5 A Fuse replacement
E01007800656
12 Stop lamps 15 A 1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off the
electrical circuit concerned and place the ig-
13 Horn 10 A nition switch in the “LOCK” position.
2. Pull the fuse lid (A) to remove it.
14 Automatic transmission 20 A 3. Remove the fuse puller (B) from the fuse lid
Hazard warning flasher (A).
15 10 A
16 Fuel pump 15 A LHD

Front
17 Front fog lamps 15 A
Ca- 18 Audio amp 20 A

No. Symbol Electrical system
pacity
l Some fuses may not be installed on your ve-
1 — — — hicle, depending on the vehicle model or spec-
ifications.
2 Electric window system 40 A
l The table above shows the main equipment
8 3 Ignition switch 40 A
corresponding to each fuse.
Air conditioning compres-

4 10 A
sor
5 Condenser fan motor 20 A
8-22
Maintenance
RHD 5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity by us-

ing the fuse puller into the same place at the
Replacement of lamp bulbs
E01003100710
fuse block. Before replacing a bulb, ensure the lamp is off. Do
not touch the glass part of the new bulb with your
bare fingers; the skin oil left on the glass will evap-
orate when the bulb gets hot and the vapour will
condense on the reflector and dim the surface.
CAUTION
l Bulbs are extremely hot immediately af-
ter being turned off.
4. Referring to the fuse load capacity table, When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool
check the fuse pertaining to the problem. sufficiently before touching it. You could
otherwise be burnt.
CAUTION NOTE
l If you are unsure of how to carry out the
l If the newly inserted fuse blows again af- work as required, we recommend you to con-
ter a short time, we recommend you to sult a specialist.
have the electrical system checked to find l Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
the cause and rectify it. when removing a lamp or lens.
l Never use a fuse with a capacity larger l When it rains or when the vehicle has been
than that specified or any substitute, such washed, the inside of the lens sometimes be-
as wire, foil, etc.; doing so will cause the comes foggy. This is the same phenomenon
circuit wiring to heat up and could cause as when window glass mists up on a humid
C- Fuse is OK a fire. day, and does not indicate a functional prob-
D- Blown fuse lem. When the lamp is switched on, the heat
will remove the fog. However, if water gath-
NOTE ers inside the lamp, we recommend you to
l If any system does not function but the fuse have the lamp checked.
corresponding to that system is normal, there
may be a fault in the system elsewhere. We
recommend you to have your vehicle checked.
Bulb capacity 8
E01003200085
When replacing a bulb, use a new bulb with the
same wattage and colour.
8-23
Maintenance
Outside 4- Side turn-signal lamps: 5 W (WY5W) Inside

E01003302530 5- Front fog lamps*: 55 W (H11) E01003401518
Single cab
Front (Type 1) Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.
Rear
1- Headlamps, high-beam: 60 W (HB3) 1- Door courtesy lamps*: 3.4 W

2- Headlamps, low beam: 55 W (H11) 2- Room lamp: 8 W
3- Position lamps: 5 W (W5W) 3- Glove box lamp: 1.4 W
4- Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W (PY21W) 4- Centre console downlight: 1.4 W
Type 1 Type 2
5- Side turn-signal lamps: 5 W (WY5W)
6- Front fog lamps*: 55 W (H11)
Front (Type 2)
6- High-mounted stop lamp: 5 W (W5W)

7- Rear turn-signal lamps: 16 W (W16W)
8- Tail and stop lamps: 21/5 W (P21/5W)
9- Reversing lamps: 16 W (W16W)
10- Rear fog lamp (Type 1, Driver’s side only):
8 21 W (P21W)
11- Rear fog lamp (Type 2, Driver’s side only):
21 W (W21W)
1- Headlamps, high/low beam: 60/55 W (H4) 12- Licence plate lamps: 5 W (W5W)
2- Position lamps: 5 W (W5W)
3- Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W (PY21W) Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.
8-24
Maintenance
Club cab Headlamps 2. Depress the tab (B) on the harness connector
E01003501375 and pull the harness connector (C) to remove
it.
Type 1
1. Remove the bulb and connector assembly
High beam Low beam
(A) by turning it anticlockwise.
High beam
1- Door courtesy lamps*: 3.4 W

2- Front room lamp and personal lamps*:
7.5 W
3- Rear room lamp: 8 W 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
4- Glove box lamp: 1.4 W steps in reverse.
5- Centre console downlight: 1.4 W
Low beam
Double cab
CAUTION
l Handle halogen lamp bulbs with care.
The gas inside halogen lamp bulbs is high-
ly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or
scratching a halogen lamp bulb can cause
it to shatter.
l Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with a
bare hand, dirty glove, etc.
The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the head-
lamps are operated.
If the glass surface is dirty, it must be
1- Door courtesy lamps*: 3.4 W
cleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc., 8
and refit it after drying it thoroughly.
2- Front room lamp and personal lamps: 7.5 W
3- Rear room lamp*: 8 W
4- Glove box lamp: 1.4 W
5- Centre console downlight: 1.4 W
8-25
Maintenance
2. Remove the sealing cover (B).

CAUTION
it to shatter.
bulb to break the next time the head-
lamps are operated.
Type 2 If the glass surface is dirty, it must be
1. Disconnect the connector (A). cleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc.,
and refit it after drying it thoroughly.
3. Unhook the spring (C) which secures the
bulb, and then remove the headlamp bulb.
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal

steps in reverse.
8-26
Maintenance
Position lamps Type 2 et by turning it anticlockwise while pressing

E01003700833 1. Turn the bulb socket anticlockwise to re- in.
move it. And remove the bulb from the sock-
Type 1 et by pulling out.
1. Turn the bulb socket anticlockwise to re-
et by pulling out.

steps in reverse.
steps in reverse. Type 2
2. To install the bulb, perform the removal move it. And remove the bulb from the sock-
steps in reverse. Front turn-signal lamps et by turning it anticlockwise while pressing
E01003800818
in.
Type 1
8-27
Maintenance
2. To install the bulb, perform the removal 2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly togeth- Front fog lamps*
steps in reverse. er by turning it anticlockwise, and then re- E01004001537
move the bulb by pulling out. 1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver
with a cloth over its tip at the edge of the cov-
Side turn-signal lamps er and pry gently to remove the cover.
E01003900037
1. To remove a side turn-signal lamp, insert a
straight blade (or minus) screwdriver at the Type 1
end of the lamp nearer the front of the body
and use it to gently lever the lamp out of the
body.
Front

steps in reverse.
Type 2
NOTE
l When replacing the lamp assembly, push in
the end facing the rear of the vehicle first.
NOTE
l Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the Front
screwdriver in order to avoid scratching the
lens and the body.
8-28
Maintenance
2. Turn the 3 bolts (A) anticlockwise to remove 4. Turn the entire socket and bulb assembly (D)
them. And then remove the lamp assembly. anticlockwise to remove it.
Rear fog lamp

E01004100384
3. Depress the tab (B) on the harness connector 5. To install the bulb, perform the removal Type 1 (Driver’s side only)
and pull the harness connector (C) to remove steps in reverse. 1. Remove the screws (A) from the rear fog
it. lamp lens, and then remove the lens (B).
CAUTION
it to shatter.
bulb to break the next time the fog lamps
are operated.
If the glass surface is dirty, it must be
cleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc.,
and refit it after drying thoroughly. 8
8-29
Maintenance
2. Remove the bulb (C) by turning it anticlock- Rear combination lamps 4. Remove each socket and bulb assembly by
wise while pressing it inward. E01004200763 turning it anticlockwise.
1. Open the rear gate.
(Refer to “Rear gate” on page 1-13.)
2. Remove the screws (A) that hold the lamp unit.
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal C- Rear turn-signal lamp

steps in reverse. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.
D- Tail and stop lamp
Type 2 (Driver’s side only) 3. Move the lamp unit towards the rear of the ve- Remove the bulb from the socket by turn-
1. Remove the socket and bulb assemblies by hicle and remove the clips (B). ing it anticlockwise while pressing in.
turning it anticlockwise, and then remove the
E- Reversing lamp
bulb by pulling out.
Remove the bulb by pulling it out.

steps in reverse.
NOTE
l When mounting the lamp unit, align the pins
(F) and clip (G) on the lamp unit with the
holes (H) in the body.
8
steps in reverse.
8-30
Maintenance
3. Remove the socket and bulb assembly togeth- NOTE

er by turning it anticlockwise, and then re- l Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the
move the bulb by pulling it out. screwdriver in order to avoid scratching the
lens and the body.
2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly togeth-

er by turning it anticlockwise, and then re-
move the bulb by pulling out.
High-mounted stop lamp

E01004500577
1. Open the rear gate.
(Refer to “Rear gate” on page 1-13.)
2. Remove the 8 screws (A) from the inner sur- 4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
face of the rear gate. Remove the rear gate steps in reverse.
cover (B).
Licence plate lamps

E01004600578
1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver 3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
into the lamp assembly and pry gently to re- steps in reverse.
move it.
NOTE
l When mounting the lamp unit, put the hook
(A) on the right side of the lamp unit into the
body first.
8-31
Maintenance
NOTE NOTE
l When installing the lens, align the 2 tabs on l Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the
the lens with the holes on the vehicle side. screwdriver in order to avoid scratching the
lens.

steps in reverse.
NOTE
l When installing the lens, fit the two tabs on
one side of the lens into the holes on the vehi-
cle side before fitting the two tabs on the op-
Front room lamp and personal lamps* posite side of the lens into the holes on the ve-
E01004700364 hicle side.
1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver
into the notch of the lens and pry gently to re-
move it.
Remove the bulb from the lamp holder. Rear room lamp*
E01004900119
Type 1
move it. Remove the bulb from the lamp hold-
er.
Type 2
move it. Remove the bulb from the lamp hold-
NOTE er.
8 l Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the
lens.

steps in reverse.
8-32
Maintenance
Door courtesy lamps* NOTE

E01005400238
l When installing the lens, align the 2 tabs on
the lens with the holes on the vehicle side.
into the lens and pry gently to remove it. Re-
move the bulb from the lamp holder.
NOTE
l Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the
lens.

Glove box lamp
E01006100069
steps in reverse. NOTE We recommend you to have the glove box lamp re-
l Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the placed by a specialist.
NOTE screwdriver in order to avoid scratching the
l When installing the lens, align the 2 tabs on
lens. Centre console downlight
E01008700144
the lens with the holes on the vehicle side.
steps in reverse. Type 1 Type 2
8-33
Maintenance
Type 1 3. Remove the bulb by pulling out.

We recommend you to have the centre console
downlight replaced by a specialist.
Type 2
with a cloth over its tip at edge of the garnish
(A) and pry gently to remove it.

steps in reverse.
2. Turn the bulb socket (B) anticlockwise to re-

move it.
8-34
Specifications
Vehicle labeling............................................................................9-02
Vehicle dimensions.......................................................................9-03
Vehicle performance.....................................................................9-09
Vehicle weight..............................................................................9-10
Engine specifications....................................................................9-14
Transmission specifications..........................................................9-15
Electrical system...........................................................................9-16
Tyres and wheels..........................................................................9-17
Other specifications......................................................................9-18
Fuel consumption.........................................................................9-19
Refill capacities............................................................................9-21
9
Specifications
Vehicle labeling Please use this number when ordering replacement

parts.
Vehicle identification number plate
E01100101791 (RHD vehicles only)
The vehicle identification number is stamped on
Vehicle identification number the plate riveted to the left front corner of the instru-
The vehicle identification number is stamped as ment panel pad. It is visible from outside of the ve-
shown in the illustration. hicle through the windscreen.
1- Model code
2- Engine model code
3- Transmission model code
4- Body colour code
5- Interior code
Vehicle information code plate 6- Option code Engine number
The vehicle information code plate is located as The engine number is stamped on the engine cylin-
shown in the illustration. der block as shown in the illustration.
9 The plate shows model code and engine model,

transmission model and body colour code, etc.
9-02
Specifications
Vehicle dimensions
E01100202308
Single cab
9
9-03
Specifications
Single cab
1 Front track 1,505 mm
2 Overall width 1,750 mm
3 Front overhang 830 mm
4 Wheel base 3,000 mm
5 Rear overhang 1,210 mm
6 Overall length 5,040 mm
7 Ground clearance (unladen) 200 mm
8 Overall height (unladen) 1,775 mm
9 Rear track 1,500 mm
10 Cargo bed length 2,220 mm
11 Cargo bed width 1,470 mm
12 Cargo bed height 845 mm
9
9-04
Specifications
Club cab
9
9-05
Specifications
Club cab
Item Easy select 4WD Super select 4WD
1 Front track 1,505 mm 1,520 mm
2 Overall width 1,750 mm 1,800 mm
3 Front overhang 795 mm, 830 mm*1
Without rear bumper 1,325 mm
5 Rear overhang
With rear bumper 1,400 mm
6 Without rear bumper 5,120 mm, 5,155 mm*1
Overall length
With rear bumper 5,195 mm, 5,230 mm*1
7 Ground clearance (unladen) 200 mm 205 mm
8 Overall height (unladen) 1,775 mm 1,780 mm
9 Rear track 1,500 mm 1,515 mm
10 Cargo bed length 1,805 mm
12 Cargo bed height 855 mm 860 mm
*1: Vehicles for Russia and Ukraine
9
9-06
Specifications
Double cab
9
9-07
Specifications
Double cab
Item 2WD and Easy select 4WD Super select 4WD
1 Front track 1,505 mm 1,520 mm
2 Overall width 1,750 mm 1,800 mm
3 Front overhang 795 mm, 830 mm*1
Without rear bumper 1,210 mm, 1,390 mm*1
5 Rear overhang
With rear bumper 1,285 mm, 1,465 mm*1
6 Without rear bumper 5,005 mm, 5,185 mm*1, 5,040 mm*2, 5.220 mm*3
Overall length
With rear bumper 5,080 mm, 5,260 mm*1, 5.115 mm*2, 5.295 mm*3
7 Ground clearance (unladen) 200 mm 205 mm
8 Overall height (unladen) 1,775 mm 1,780 mm
9 Rear track 1,500 mm 1,515 mm
10 Cargo bed length 1,325 mm, 1,505 mm*1
12 Cargo bed height 845 mm 850 mm
*1: Vehicles with long bed
*3: Vehicles for Russia and Ukraine with long bed
9
9-08
Specifications
Vehicle performance
E01100301966
Item M/T A/T

167 km/h (104 mph), 165 km/h*
Vehicles with standard power engine 165 km/h (102 mph)
Maximum speed (102 mph)*
Vehicles with high power engine 179 km/h (111 mph) 175 km/h (109 mph)
Body 6.3 m, 6.1 m*
Minimum turning radius
Wheel 5.9 m, 5.7 m*
*: 2WD vehicles with 15 inch tyres
9
9-09
Specifications
Vehicle weight
E01100404160
Single cab
4WD
Item 2WD
LHD RHD
Without optional parts 1,555 kg 1,770 kg
Kerb weight
With full optional parts 1,585 kg 1,830 kg 1,810 kg
Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,630 kg 2,850 kg 2,890 kg
Front 1,030 kg 1,260 kg
Maximum axle weight
Rear 1,700 kg 1,800 kg
With brake 1,800 kg 2,700 kg
Maximum towable weight
Without brake 750 kg
Maximum trailer-nose weight 77 kg 115 kg
Maximum gross combination weight 4,400 kg 5,500 kg 5,540 kg
Seating capacity (including a driver) 2 persons, 3 persons*
*: Vehicles equipped with bench seat
NOTE
l Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer’s recommendation.
l When loading luggage and/or towing a trailer, make sure not to exceed any of the above maximum weights all the time.
Club cab
Easy select 4WD
Item Super select 4WD
LHD RHD
Without optional parts 1,790 kg 1,805 kg, 1,815 kg *
Kerb weight
9 *:
With full optional parts 1,890 kg 1,870 kg 1.900 kg, 1.910 kg *
Vehicles with high power engine
9-10
Specifications
Easy select 4WD

Item Super select 4WD
LHD RHD
Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,850 kg
Front 1,260 kg
Maximum axle weight
Rear 1,800 kg
With brake 2,700 kg
Maximum trailer-nose weight 115 kg
Maximum gross combination weight 5,500 kg
Seating capacity (including a driver) 4 persons
*: Vehicles with high power engine
NOTE
Double cab
2WD
M/T
Item
Vehicles with 15 inch Vehicles with 16 inch A/T
tyres tyres
Without optional parts 1,655 kg 1,760 kg 1,770 kg
Kerb weight
With full optional parts 1,725 kg 1,890 kg 1,900 kg
Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,630 kg 2,800 kg
Front 1,030 kg 1,260 kg
Maximum axle weight
Rear 1,700 kg 1,800 kg
9
9-11
Specifications
2WD
M/T
Item
Vehicles with 15 inch Vehicles with 16 inch A/T
tyres tyres
With brake 1,800 kg 2,700 kg
Maximum trailer-nose weight 75 kg 112 kg
Maximum gross combination weight 4,400 kg 5,465 kg
NOTE
4WD
Easy select 4WD Super select 4WD
Item
M/T M/T A/T
A/T
LHD RHD LHD RHD LHD RHD
1,880 kg, 1,865 kg, 1,890 kg, 1,875 kg,
Without optional parts 1,860 kg 1,840 kg 1,870 kg
1,890 kg *1 1,875 kg *1 1,905 kg *1 1,890 kg *1
Kerb weight 2,020 kg, 2,020 kg,
1,990 kg, 2,010 kg, 2,020 kg,
With full optional parts 1,970 kg 2,000 kg 2,030 kg*1, 2,035 kg*1,
1,980 kg *2 2,020 kg *1 2,035 kg *1
2,015 kg *2 2,025 kg *2
2,910 kg, 2,920 kg,
Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,850 kg 2,890 kg 2,850 kg 2,850 kg
2,920 kg *1 2,935 kg *1
*1: Vehicles with high power engine
9
9-12
Specifications
4WD
Easy select 4WD Super select 4WD
Item
M/T M/T A/T
A/T
LHD RHD LHD RHD LHD RHD
Front 1,260 kg
Maximum axle weight
Rear 1,800 kg
With brake 2,700 kg
Maximum trailer-nose weight 115 kg
5,560 kg, 5,570 kg,
Maximum gross combination weight 5,500 kg 5,540 kg 5,500 kg 5,500 kg
5,570 kg *1 5,585 kg *1
*1: Vehicles with high power engine
NOTE
9
9-13
Specifications
Engine specifications
E01100602416
Standard power engine High power engine

Item
2WD with 15 inch tyres 2WD with 16 inch tyres, 4WD M/T A/T
Four-cylinder, in line, water
cooled four-cycle, double
Four-cylinder, in line, water cooled four-cycle, double overhead camshaft with intercooler
Engine type overhead camshaft with
and turbocharger
small-sized intercooler and
turbocharger
Engine models 4D56
Total displacement 2,477 cc
Bore 91.1 mm
Stroke 95.0 mm
Compression ratio 17.0:1 16.5:1
Intake 0.09 mm (cold)
Valve clearance
Exhaust 0.14 mm (cold)
100 kW/4,000 r/min,
Maximum output (EEC net) 94 kW/4,000 r/min 131 kW/4,000 r/min
100 kW/3,500 r/min*
Maximum torque (EEC net) 240 Nm/1,500 to 3,500 r/min 314 Nm/2,000 r/min 400 Nm/2.000 to 2.850 r/min 350 Nm/1.800 to 3,500 r/min
*: Vehicles for Ukraine and Kazakhstan.
9
9-14
Specifications
Transmission specifications
E01100701452
M/T A/T
2WD 4WD 4WD
Item Super select 4WD Super select 4WD
Vehicles Vehicles 2WD
Easy select Standard Easy select
with 15 with 16 High power
4WD power en- 4WD 4A/T 5A/T
inch tyres inch tyres engine
gine
1st gear ratio 4.313 2.842 3.789
2nd gear ratio 2.330 1.495 2.057
3rd gear ratio 1.436 1.000 1.421
Transmission
4th gear ratio 1.000 0.731 1.000
5th gear ratio 0.788 — 0.731
Reverse gear ratio 4.220 2.720 3.865
High gear ratio — 1.000 — 1.000 1.000
Transfer
Low gear ratio — 1.900 — 1.900 1.900
Final gear ratio 3.909 3.917 3.917 3.917 4.100 3.917 3.917 4.100 3.917
9
9-15
Specifications
Electrical system
E01100801769
Voltage 12 V
Type (JIS) 95D31L 80D26L*
Battery
Capacity (5HR) 64 Ah 55 Ah*
Alternator capacity 90 A, 120 A*
*: Optional equipment
9
9-16
Specifications
Tyres and wheels

E01100902204
205/80R16 104S RF,

Tyre 195R15C 106/104R 8PR 245/70R16 111S RF 245/65R17 111S RF
205R16C 110/108R 8PR
Size 15x6 JJ 16x6 JJ 16x7 J 17x7 1/2 J
Wheel
Offset 46 mm 38 mm
NOTE
l Contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point for details on the combination used on your vehicle.
9
9-17
Specifications
Other specifications
E01101000862
Fuel control Direct injection common rail system

Fuel system
Fuel pump Electronic controlled rotary type
Clutch Dry single disc clutch with diaphragm spring, hydraulic action
Steering system Rack & pinion type, power assisted
Front Independent type, wishbone, coil spring
Suspension
Rear Rigid type, leaf spring
Vehicles without ABS Hydraulic, front and rear split double circuit system with power assistance
Type
Vehicles with ABS Hydraulic, diagonal split double circuit system with power assistance
Service brakes
Front Ventilated disc brakes
Rear Drum brakes
Parking brakes Parking brake acts mechanically on rear wheels
9
9-18
Specifications
Fuel consumption
E01101100560
Vehicles with standard power engine

Extra-urban condi-
Combined Urban conditions
tions
Item
CO2 (g/km) Fuel consumption Fuel consumption Fuel consumption
(L/100 km) (L/100 km) (L/100 km)
2WD 190 7.2 9.3 6.0
Single cab
4WD 215 8.1 10.3 6.9
Standard 215, 221*1 8.1, 8.4*1 10.3, 10.6*1 6.9, 7.1*1
Club cab
Full option 218, 224*1 8.3, 8.5*1 10.4, 10.7*1 7.1, 7.2*1
2WD with 15 inch tyres 194 7.4 9.4 6.2
Standard 215 8.1 10.3 6.9
M/T
2WD with 16 Full option 218 8.3 10.4 7.1
inch tyres Standard 229 8.6 11.0 7.3
A/T
Double cab Full option 234 8.8 11.2 7.5
Standard 218, 215*2, 224*1 8.3, 8.1*2, 8.5*1 10.4, 10.3*2, 10.7*1 7.1, 6.9*2, 7.2*1
M/T
Full option 223, 218*2, 229*1 8.5, 8.3*2, 8.7*1 10.5, 10.4*2, 10.9*1 7.3, 7.1*2, 7.4*1
4WD
Standard 234, 240*1 8.8, 9.0*1 11.2, 11.7*1 7.5
A/T
Full option 240, 246*1 9.1, 9.3*1 11.6, 12.1*1 7.6, 7.7*1
*2: RHD vehicles without wide fender
9
9-19
Specifications
Vehicles with high power engine

Extra-urban condi-
Combined Urban conditions
tions
Item
CO2 (g/km) Fuel consumption Fuel consumption Fuel consumption
(L/100 km) (L/100 km) (L/100 km)
Standard 212 8.0 9.6 7.1
Club cab
Full option 214 8.1 9.7 7.2
Standard 214 8.1 9.7 7.2
M/T
Full option 218 8.3 9.8 7.4
Double cab
Standard 240 9.1 10.9 8.1
A/T
Full option 248 9.4 11.3 8.3
NOTE
l The results given do not express or imply any guarantee of the fuel consumption of the particular vehicle.
The vehicle itself has not been tested and there are inevitably differences between individual vehicles of the same model. In addition, this vehicle may incor-
porate particular modifications. Furthermore, the driver’s style and road and traffic conditions, as well as the extent to which the vehicle has been driven and
the standard of maintenance, will all affect its fuel consumption.
9
9-20
Specifications
Refill capacities
E01101303358
LHD
M/T A/T
RHD M/T A/T
9
9-21
Specifications
No. Item Quantity Lubricants

8.2 litres
DIA QUEEN SUPER LONG LIFE
1 Engine coolant [includes 0.65 litre in the
COOLANT or equivalent
reserve tank]
2 Automatic transmission fluid 9.7 litres DIA QUEEN ATF SP III
3 Brake fluid As required Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
4 Clutch fluid As required Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
5 Power steering fluid As required ATF DEXRON III or DEXRON II
2WD with 15 inch tyres 6.5 litres
Oil pan
2WD with 16 inch tyres, 4WD 5.5 litres
6 Engine oil Refer to page 8-04.
Oil filter 0.8 litre
Oil cooler 0.1 litre
4.8 litres,
7 Washer fluid —
4.5 litres*1
Manual transmis- 2WD 2.3 litres Gear oil API classification GL-3 SAE
8
sion oil 4WD 3.4 litres 75W-85
Gear oil API classification GL-3 SAE
9 Transfer oil 2.5 litres 75W-85 or Gear oil API classification
GL-4 SAE 75W-85
Front*2 1.2 litres
Standard power en- 2WD with 15 inch tyres 1.5 litres

gine Gear oil API classification GL-5 or
10 Differential oil 2WD with 16 inch tyres, 4WD
Rear 2.6 litres higher SAE 80W
A/T
High power engine
M/T 3.2 litres
480-520 g,
11 Refrigerant (air conditioning) HFC-134a
535-575 g*3
9 *1: Vehicles with “front (Type 1)” (Refer to “Outside” on page 8-24)
*2: 4WD vehicles only
9-22
Specifications
*3: Double cab with capacity up air conditioning
9
9-23
Alphabetical index
Selector lever operation 4-20 Cigarette lighter 5-37

4 Selector lever position indicator 4-21 Cleaning
Selector lever positions 4-21 Exterior of your vehicle 7-03
4-wheel drive operation 4-38 Sports mode 4-22 Genuine leather 7-02
Sports mode indicator 4-22 Interior of your vehicle 7-02
A Plastic, vinyl leather, etc 7-02
B Sunroof 7-05
Accessory (Installation) 04 Waxing 7-04
Accessory socket 5-38 Battery 8-09 Clock 3-19,5-39
Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC) 4-46 Discharged battery (Emergency starting) 6-02 Clutch
Additional equipment 8-19 Specification 9-16 Fluid 8-08,9-21
Air conditioning Bleeding the fuel system 6-05 Pedal free play 8-15
Automatic air conditioning 5-08 Bonnet 8-03 Coat hook 5-46
Important operation tips for the air condition- Bottle holder 5-45 Combination headlamps and dipper switch 3-30
ing 5-12 Brake Convenient hook 5-46
Manual air conditioning 5-03 Anti-lock brake 4-43 Coolant (engine) 8-05,9-21
Air purifier 5-12 Braking 4-42 Cruise control 4-48
Airbag 2-27 Fluid 8-07,9-21 Switch 4-49
Antenna 5-34 Parking brake 4-07 Cup holder 5-44
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 4-43 Parking brake lever stroke 8-16 Curtain airbag system 2-35
Warning lamp 4-44 Pedal free play 8-16
Armrest (Double cab) 2-07 Warning lamp 3-08 D
Ashtray 5-36
Audio C Demister (rear window) 3-40
Audio system anti-theft feature 5-32 Differential oil 9-21
Error codes 5-30 Cargo loads 4-52 Digital clock 3-19,5-39
Handling of compact discs 5-32 Catalytic converter 8-02 Dimensions 9-03
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD Cautions on handling of 4-wheel drive vehi- Dipper (High/Low beam change) 3-31
player 5-13 cles 4-40 Door courtesy lamps 5-41
Steering wheel remote control switch 5-28 Central door locks 1-07 Replacement 8-33
Automatic air conditioning 5-08 Centre console downlight 5-41 Doors
Automatic transmission 4A/T 4-16 Bulb capacity 8-24 Central door locks 1-07
Fluid 8-06,9-21 Replacement 8-34 Child-protection 1-08
Overdrive control switch 4-17 Centre information display 3-10 Lock and unlock 1-06
Selector lever operation 4-16,4-20 Changing a fuse 8-22 Driving, alcohol and drugs 4-02
Selector lever position 4-17 Changing gears 4-14
Selector lever position indicator 4-16 Check engine warning lamp 3-08 E
Automatic transmission Sports Mode 5A/T 4-20 Child restraint 2-13
Fluid 8-06,9-21 Child-protection rear doors 1-08 Easy select 4WD 4-25
1
Alphabetical index
Economical driving 4-02 Front room lamp Bulb capacity 8-24

Electric window control 1-08 Bulb capacity 8-25 Headlamp flasher 3-31
Switch 1-08 Replacement 8-32 Replacement 8-25
Electrical system 9-16 Front seat 2-03 Switch 3-30
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting sys- Front turn-signal lamps Washer switch 3-39
tem) 1-03 Bulb capacity 8-24 Heated mirror 4-11
Emergency starting 6-02 Replacement 8-27 Heated seats 2-06
Engine specifications 9-14 Fuel consumption 9-19 Heater 5-03
Engine Fuel High-mounted stop lamp
Coolant 8-05,9-21 Filling the fuel tank 02 Bulb capacity 8-24
Number 9-02 Fuel filter indication lamp 3-07 Replacement 8-31
Oil 8-04,9-21 Fuel gauge 3-04 Hinges and latches lubrication 8-19
Overheating 6-04 Fuel selection 02 Hooks
Specifications 9-14 Low fuel warning lamp 3-04 Coat hook 5-46
Used engine oils safety instructions and disposal Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel Convenient hook 5-46
information 05 systems 04 Horn switch 3-40
Water temperature gauge 3-05 Tank capacity 02
Error codes 5-30 Fuses 8-20 I
Exterior and interior lamp operation 8-18 Fusible links 8-19
If the vehicle breaks down 6-02
F G Ignition switch 4-11
Indication and warning lamps 3-06
First-aid kit and warning triangle band for secur- Gauges 3-02 Indication lamps 3-07
ing 5-46 General maintenance 8-18 Inside rear-view mirror 4-09
Floor console box 5-42 General vehicle data 9-03 Inspection and maintenance following rough road
Fluid Genuine parts 05 operation 4-40
Automatic transmission fluid 8-06,9-21 Glove box 5-42 Installation of accessories 04
Brake fluid 8-07,9-21 Glove box lamp Instruments 3-02
Clutch fluid 8-08,9-21 Bulb capacity 8-24 Interior lamps 5-39
Engine coolant 8-05,9-21 Replacement 8-33
Power steering fluid 8-09,9-21 J
Washer fluid 8-07,9-21 H
For cold and snowy weather 8-19 Jack handle 6-12
Front console box 5-42 Handling of compact discs 5-32 Storage 6-07
Front fog lamps Hazard warning flasher switch 3-34 Jacking up the vehicle 6-13
Bulb capacity 8-24 Hazard warning indication lamps 3-07 Jack
Indication lamp 3-07 Head restraints 2-08 Storage 6-07
Replacement 8-28 Headlamp levelling switch 3-32 Jump starting (Emergency starting) 6-02
Switch 3-34 Headlamps
2
Alphabetical index
Differential oil 9-21 Replacement 8-29

K Engine oil 8-04,9-21 Switch 3-35
Manual transmission fluid 9-21 Rear room lamp 5-39
Keyless entry system 1-04 Transfer oil 9-21 Bulb capacity 8-25
Keys 1-02 Operation under adverse driving conditions 6-24 Replacement 8-32
Other specifications 9-18 Rear seat 2-07
L Outside rear-view mirrors 4-10
Overheating 6-04
Rear side/quarter window 1-12
Rear turn-signal lamps
Labeling 9-02 Bulb capacity 8-24
Lamp monitor buzzer 3-31 P Replacement 8-30
Lamps (headlamps, fog lamp, etc.) auto-cutout func- Rear window demister switch 3-40
tion 3-31 Parking 4-08 Rear-view mirror
Leakage (Fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust Parking brake 4-07 Inside 4-09
gas) 8-18 Parking brake lever stroke 8-16 Outside 4-10
Licence plate lamps Personal lamps 5-40 Refill capacities 9-21
Bulb capacity 8-24 Replacement 8-32 Removal of water from the fuel filter 6-06
Replacement 8-31 Position lamps Replacement of lamp bulbs 8-23
Limited-slip differential (LSD) 4-42 Bulb capacity 8-24 Reversing lamps
Low fuel warning lamp 3-04 Replacement 8-27 Bulb capacity 8-24
Lubricants 9-21 Power steering Replacement 8-30
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD play- Fluid 8-09,9-21 Room lamp 5-39,5-40
er 5-13 System 4-45 Running-in recommendations 4-04
Precautions to observe when using wipers and wash-
M ers 3-39 S
Pregnant women restraint 2-11
Manual transmission 4-14 Puncture (Tyre changing) 6-17 Safe driving techniques 4-03
Oil 9-21 Seat belt 2-09
Manual window control 1-08 R Adjustable seat belt anchor 2-11
Mirror Child restraint 2-13
Inside rear-view mirror 4-09 Radio Inspection 2-27
Outside rear-view mirrors 4-10 LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD Pregnant women restraint 2-11
Vanity mirror 5-36 player 5-13 Pretensioner 2-12
Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel sys- Rear combination lamps Seat belt reminder/warning lamp 2-10
tems 04 Bulb capacity 8-24 Seat under tray 5-44
Replacement 8-30 Seat
Adjustment 2-03
O Rear differential lock 4-34
Rear fog lamp Armrest (Double cab) 2-07
Bulb capacity 8-24 Front seat 2-03
Odometer 3-03
Indication lamp 3-07 Head restraints 2-08
Oil
3
Alphabetical index
Heated seats 2-06

Rear seat 2-07 T V
Secret box 5-43
Service precaution 8-02 Tachometer 3-03 Vanity mirror 5-36
Side airbag system 2-35 Tail lamps Vehicle care precautions 7-02
Side turn-signal lamps Bulb capacity 8-24 Vehicle dimensions 9-03
Bulb capacity 8-24 Replacement 8-30 Vehicle identification number 9-02
Replacement 8-28 Tank capacity 02 Vehicle identification number plate 9-02
Snow tyres 8-14 Ticket holder 5-35 Vehicle information code plate 9-02
Spare wheel 6-16 Tools 6-09 Vehicle labeling 9-02
Spark plug 9-16 Storage 6-07 Vehicle performance 9-09
Specifications 9-02 Towing 6-20 Vehicle weight 9-10
Speedometer 3-03 Trailer towing 4-53 Ventilators 5-02
Starting 4-13 Transfer oil 9-21
Steering
Power steering fluid 8-09,9-21
Transmission W
Automatic transmission 4A/T 4-16
Power steering system 4-45 Automatic transmission Sports Mode 5A/ Warning lamps 3-08
Steering wheel height adjustment 4-09 T 4-20 Washer
Steering wheel lock 4-12 Fluid 8-06,9-21 Fluid 8-07,9-21
Steering wheel remote control switch 5-28 Manual transmission 4-14 Switch 3-36,3-39
Stop lamps Specifications 9-15 Washing 7-03
Bulb capacity 8-23 Tripmeter 3-03 Water temperature gauge 3-05
Replacement 8-30 Turn-signal indication lamps 3-07 Waxing 7-04
Storage spaces 5-41 Turn-signals lever 3-33 Weatherstripping 8-19
Sun visors 5-35 Tyres 8-11 Weight 9-10
Sunglasses holder 5-43 How to change a tyre 6-17 Wheel condition 8-13
Sunroof 1-13 Inflation pressures 8-12 Wheel
Safety mechanism 1-14 Rotation 8-13 Specification 9-17
Sunshade 1-14 Size (tyre and wheel) 9-17 Wiper
Switch 1-13 Snow tyres 8-14 Switch 3-36
Super select 4WD 4-29 Tyre chains 8-14 Wiper blade rubber replacement 8-17
Supplemental restraint system 2-27 Wheel condition 8-13 Wiper blades 8-17
How the Supplemental Restraint System
works 2-29
Servicing 2-39
U
Warning lamp 2-38 Used engine oils safety instructions and disposal in-
formation 05
Utility box 5-43
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

2011 Mitsubishi l200 12

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2011 Mitsubishi l200 12

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2011 Mitsubishi l200 12

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

L200 - ENGLISH - OCRE11E1

L200 - ENGLISH - OCRE11E1

Vehicles outside the warranty period:

Locking and unlocking 1

Seat and seat belts 2

Instruments and controls 3

Starting and driving 4

For pleasant driving 5

Instruments and Controls (Driver’s area)

1. Combination headlamps and dipper switch p. 3-30

1. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for driver’s

Instruments and Controls (Single cab)

1. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 3-34

1. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for front passen-

Instruments and Controls (Club, Double cab)

1. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 3-34

1. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for front passen-

Interior (Single cab)

1. Lock switch* p. 1-09

NOTE:*1- Tools differ according to the vehicle model.

1. Digital clock p. 5-39

Interior (Club cab)

1. Lock switch* p. 1-09

1. Personal lamps* p. 5-40, 8-24, 8-32

Interior - front area (Double cab)

1. Lock switch* p. 1-09

1. Sunroof switch* p. 1-13

Interior - rear area (Double cab)

1. Head restraints p. 2-08

1 NOTE:*1- Tools differ according to the vehicle model.

1. Room lamp (rear)* p. 5-39, 8-24, 8-32

NOTE:*1- Tools differ according to the vehicle model.

Exterior - front (Single cab)

1. Wiper and washers p. 3-36

Exterior - rear (Single cab)

1. Rear turn-signal lamps p. 3-33, 8-24, 8-30

Exterior - front (Club cab)

1. Wiper and washers p. 3-36

Exterior - rear (Club cab)

1. Rear turn-signal lamps p. 3-33, 8-24, 8-30

Exterior - front (Double cab)

1. Wiper and washers p. 3-36

Exterior - rear (Double cab)

1. Rear turn-signal lamps p. 3-33, 8-24, 8-30

Fuel selection l Poor-quality diesel fuel can cause deposits to

Fuel tank capacity

4. Insert the gun in the tank port as far as it

the highest quality and dependability. E00200600025

Electronic immobilizer (Anti- If the engine does not start, we recom-

In cases like these, remove the object or

Keyless entry system* l If the UNLOCK switch (2) is pressed and

Coin type battery

6. Close the remote control transmitter firmly.

1- Insert or remove the key

All of the doors can be locked and unlocked as de-

Driver’s door with key

“Child-protection” rear doors Manual window control* Electric window control*

A- Fully closed position Lock switch

dow is fully closed. When this switch is operated, the passenger’s

2 I -9 to 18 kg UF, L3, L4 U, L3, L4

2 II -15 to 25 kg UF, L5 U, L5 U, L5 L5